Перевод: с греческого на английский

с английского на греческий

things+in+which

  • 21 ὁ

    ὁ, ἡ, τό pl. οἱ, αἱ, τά article, derived fr. a demonstrative pronoun, ‘the’. Since the treatment of the inclusion and omission of the art. belongs to the field of grammar, the lexicon can limit itself to exhibiting the main features of its usage. It is difficult to set hard and fast rules for the employment of the art., since the writer’s style had special freedom of play here—Kühner-G. I p. 589ff; B-D-F §249–76; Mlt. 80–84; Rob. 754–96; W-S. §17ff; Rdm.2 112–18; Abel §28–32; HKallenberg, RhM 69, 1914, 642ff; FVölker, Syntax d. griech. Papyri I, Der Artikel, Progr. d. Realgymn. Münster 1903; FEakin, AJP 37, 1916, 333ff; CMiller, ibid. 341ff; EColwell, JBL 52, ’33, 12–21 (for a critique s. Mlt-H.-Turner III 183f); ASvensson, D. Gebr. des bestimmten Art. in d. nachklass. Epik ’37; RFink, The Syntax of the Greek Article ’53; JRoberts, Exegetical Helps, The Greek Noun with and without the Article: Restoration Qtly 14, ’71, 28–44; HTeeple, The Greek Article with Personal Names in the Synoptic Gospels: NTS 19, ’73, 302–17; Mussies 186–97.
    ① this one, that one, the art. funct. as demonstrative pronoun
    ⓐ in accordance w. epic usage (Hes., Works 450: ἡ=this [voice]) in the quot. fr. Arat., Phaenom. 5 τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν for we are also his (lit. this One’s) offspring Ac 17:28.
    ⓑ ὁ μὲν … ὁ δέ the one … the other (Polyaenus 6, 2, 1 ὁ μὲν … ὁ δὲ … ὁ δε; PSI 512, 21 [253 B.C.]); pl. οἱ μὲν … οἱ δέ (PSI 341, 9 [256 B.C.]; TestJob 29:1) some … others w. ref. to a noun preceding: ἐσχίσθη τὸ πλῆθος … οἱ μὲν ἦσαν σὺν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις, οἱ δὲ σὺν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις Ac 14:4; 17:32; 28:24; 1 Cor 7:7; Gal 4:23; Phil 1:16f. Also without such a relationship expressed τοὺς μὲν ἀποστόλους, τοὺς δὲ προφήτας, τοὺς δὲ εὐαγγελιστάς Eph 4:11. οἱ μὲν … ὁ δέ Hb 7:5f, 20f. οἱ μὲν … ἄλλοι (δέ) J 7:12. οἱ μὲν … ἄλλοι δὲ … ἕτεροι δέ Mt 16:14. τινὲς … οἱ δέ Ac 17:18 (cp. Pla., Leg. 1, 627a; 2, 658 B.; Aelian, VH 2, 34; Palaeph. 6, 5).—Mt 26:67; 28:17 οἱ δέ introduces a second class; just before this, instead of the first class, the whole group is mentioned (cp. X., Hell. 1, 2, 14, Cyr. 3, 2, 12; KMcKay, JSNT 24, ’85, 71f)= but some (as Arrian, Anab. 5, 2, 7; 5, 14, 4; Lucian, Tim. 4 p. 107; Hesych. Miles. [VI A.D.]: 390 Fgm. 1, 35 end Jac.).
    ⓒ To indicate the progress of the narrative, ὁ δέ, οἱ δέ but he, but they (lit. this one, they) is also used without ὁ μέν preceding (likew. Il. 1, 43; Pla., X.; also Clearchus, Fgm. 76b τὸν δὲ εἰπεῖν=but this man said; pap examples in Mayser II/1, 1926, 57f) e.g. Mt 2:9, 14; 4:4; 9:31; Mk 14:31 (cp. Just., A II, 2, 3). ὁ μὲν οὖν Ac 23:18; 28:5. οἱ μὲν οὖν 1:6; 5:41; 15:3, 30.—JO’Rourke, Paul’s Use of the Art. as a Pronoun, CBQ 34, ’72, 59–65.
    ② the, funct. to define or limit an entity, event, or state
    ⓐ w. nouns
    α. w. appellatives, or common nouns, where, as in Pla., Thu., Demosth. et al., the art. has double significance, specific or individualizing, and generic.
    א. In its individualizing use it focuses attention on a single thing or single concept, as already known or otherwise more definitely limited: things and pers. that are unique in kind: ὁ ἥλιος, ἡ σελήνη, ὁ οὐρανός, ἡ γῆ, ἡ θάλασσα, ὁ κόσμος, ἡ κτίσις, ὁ θεός (BWeiss [s. on θεός, beg.]), ὁ διάβολος, ὁ λόγος (J 1:1, 14), τὸ φῶς, ἡ σκοτία, ἡ ζωή, ὁ θάνατος etc. (but somet. the art. is omitted, esp. when nouns are used w. preps.; B-D-F §253, 1–4; Rob. 791f; Mlt-Turner 171). ἐν συναγωγῇ καὶ ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ J 18:20.—Virtues, vices, etc. (contrary to Engl. usage): ἡ ἀγάπη, ἡ ἀλήθεια, ἡ ἁμαρτία, ἡ δικαιοσύνη, ἡ σοφία et al.—The individualizing art. stands before a common noun that was previously mentioned (without the art.): τοὺς πέντε ἄρτους Lk 9:16 (after πέντε ἄρτοι vs. 13). τὸ βιβλίον 4:17b (after βιβλίον, vs. 17a), τοὺς μάγους Mt 2:7 (after μάγοι, vs. 1). J 4:43 (40); 12:6 (5); 20:1 (19:41); Ac 9:17 (11); Js 2:3 (2); Rv 15:6 (1).—The individ. art. also stands before a common noun which, in a given situation, is given special attention as the only or obvious one of its kind (Hipponax [VI B.C.] 13, 2 West=D.3 16 ὁ παῖς the [attending] slave; Diod S 18, 29, 2 ὁ ἀδελφός=his brother; Artem. 4, 71 p. 245, 19 ἡ γυνή=your wife; ApcEsdr 6:12 p. 31, 17 μετὰ Μωσῆ … ἐν τῷ ὄρει [Sinai]; Demetr. (?): 722 fgm 7 Jac. [in Eus., PE 9, 19, 4] ἐπὶ τὸ ὄρος [Moriah]) τῷ ὑπηρέτῃ to the attendant (who took care of the synagogue) Lk 4:20. εἰς τὸν νιπτῆρα into the basin (that was there for the purpose) J 13:5. ἰδοὺ ὁ ἄνθρωπο here is this (wretched) man 19:5. ἐκ τῆς παιδίσκης or ἐλευθέρας by the (well-known) slave woman or the free woman (Hagar and Sarah) Gal 4:22f. τὸν σῖτον Ac 27:38. ἐν τῇ ἐπιστολῇ 1 Cor 5:9 (s. ἐπιστολή) τὸ ὄρος the mountain (nearby) Mt 5:1; 8:1; 14:23; Mk 3:13; 6:46; Lk 6:12; 9:28 al.; ἡ πεισμονή this (kind of) persuasion Gal 5:8. ἡ μαρτυρία the (required) witness or testimony J 5:36.—The art. takes on the idea of κατʼ ἐξοχήν ‘par excellence’ (Porphyr., Abst. 24, 7 ὁ Αἰγύπτιος) ὁ ἐρχόμενος the one who is (was) to come or the coming one par excellence=The Messiah Mt 11:3; Lk 7:19. ὁ προφήτης J 1:21, 25; 7:40. ὁ διδάσκαλος τ. Ἰσραήλ 3:10 (Ps.-Clem., Hom. 5, 18 of Socrates: ὁ τῆς Ἑλλάδος διδάσκαλος); cp. MPol 12:2. With things (Stephan. Byz. s.v. Μάρπησσα: οἱ λίθοι=the famous stones [of the Parian Marble]) ἡ κρίσις the (last) judgment Mt 12:41. ἡ ἡμέρα the day of decision 1 Cor 3:13; (cp. Mi 4:6 Mt); Hb 10:25. ἡ σωτηρία (our) salvation at the consummation of the age Ro 13:11.
    ב. In its generic use it singles out an individual who is typical of a class, rather than the class itself: ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος Mt 12:35. κοινοῖ τὸν ἄνθρωπον 15:11. ὥσπερ ὁ ἐθνικός 18:17. ὁ ἐργάτης Lk 10:7. ἐγίνωσκεν τί ἦν ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ J 2:25. τὰ σημεῖα τοῦ ἀποστόλου 2 Cor 12:12. ὁ κληρονόμος Gal 4:1. So also in parables and allegories: ὁ οἰκοδεσπότης Mt 24:43. Cp. J 10:11b, 12. The generic art. in Gk. is often rendered in Engl. by the indef. art. or omitted entirely.
    β. The use of the art. w. personal names is varied; as a general rule the presence of the art. w. a personal name indicates that the pers. is known; without the art. focus is on the name as such (s. Dssm., BPhW 22, 1902, 1467f; BWeiss, D. Gebr. des Art. b. d. Eigennamen [im NT]: StKr 86, 1913, 349–89). Nevertheless, there is an unmistakable drift in the direction of Mod. Gk. usage, in which every proper name has the art. (B-D-F §260; Rob. 759–61; Mlt-Turner 165f). The ms. tradition varies considerably. In the gospels the art. is usu. found w. Ἰησοῦς; yet it is commonly absent when Ἰ. is accompanied by an appositive that has the art. Ἰ. ὁ Γαλιλαῖος Mt 26:69; Ἰ. ὁ Ναζωραῖος vs. 71; Ἰ. ὁ λεγόμενος Χριστός 27:17, 22. Sim. Μαριὰμ ἡ μήτηρ τοῦ Ἰ. Ac 1:14. The art. somet. stands before oblique cases of indecl. proper names, apparently to indicate their case (B-D-F §260, 2; Rob. 760). But here, too, there is no hard and fast rule.—HTeeple, NTS 19, ’73, 302–17 (synopt.).
    γ. The art. is customarily found w. the names of countries (B-D-F §261, 4; W-S. § 18, 5 d; Rob. 759f); less freq. w. names of cities (B-D-F §261, 1; 2; Rob. 760; Mlt-Turner 170–72). W. Ἰερουσαλήμ, Ἱεροσόλυμα it is usu. absent (s. Ἱεροσόλυμα); it is only when this name has modifiers that it must have the art. ἡ νῦν Ἰ. Gal 4:25; ἡ ἄνω Ἰ. vs. 26; ἡ καινὴ Ἰ. Rv 3:12. But even in this case it lacks the art. when the modifier follows: Hb 12:22.—Names of rivers have the art. ὁ Ἰορδάνης, ὁ Εὐφράτης, ὁ Τίβερις Hv 1, 1, 2 (B-D-F §261, 8; Rob. 760; Mlt-Turner 172). Likew. names of seas ὁ Ἀδρίας Ac 27:27.
    δ. The art. comes before nouns that are accompanied by the gen. of a pronoun (μοῦ, σοῦ, ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν, αὐτοῦ, ἑαυτοῦ, αὐτῶν) Mt 1:21, 25; 5:45; 6:10–12; 12:49; Mk 9:17; Lk 6:27; 10:7; 16:6; Ro 4:19; 6:6 and very oft. (only rarely is it absent: Mt 19:28; Lk 1:72; 2:32; 2 Cor 8:23; Js 5:20 al.).
    ε. When accompanied by the possessive pronouns ἐμός, σός, ἡμέτερος, ὑμέτερος the noun always has the art., and the pron. stands mostly betw. art. and noun: Mt 18:20; Mk 8:38; Lk 9:26; Ac 26:5; Ro 3:7 and oft. But only rarely so in John: J 4:42; 5:47; 7:16. He prefers to repeat the article w. the possessive following the noun ἡ κρίσις ἡ ἐμή J 5:30; cp. 7:6; 17:17; 1J 1:3 al.
    ζ. Adjectives (or participles), when they modify nouns that have the art., also come either betw. the art. and noun: ἡ ἀγαθὴ μερίς Lk 10:42; τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα 12:10; Ac 1:8; ἡ δικαία κρίσις J 7:24 and oft., or after the noun w. the art. repeated τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον Mk 3:29; J 14:26; Ac 1:16; Hb 3:7; 9:8; 10:15. ἡ ζωὴ ἡ αἰώνιος 1J 1:2; 2:25. τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν Ac 12:10. Only rarely does an adj. without the art. stand before a noun that has an art. (s. B-D-F §270, 1; Rob. 777; Mlt-Turner 185f): ἀκατακαλύπτῳ τῇ κεφαλῇ 1 Cor 11:5. εἶπεν μεγάλῃ τῇ φωνῇ Ac 14:10 v.l.; cp. 26:24. κοιναῖς ταῖς χερσίν Mk 7:5 D.—Double modifier τὸ πῦρ τὸ αἰώνιον τὸ ἡτοιμασμένον τῷ διαβόλῳ Mt 25:41. τὸ θυσιαστήριον τὸ χρυσοῦν τὸ ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου Rv 8:3; 9:13. ἡ πόρνη ἡ μεγάλη ἡ καθημένη 17:1.—Mk 5:36 τὸν λόγον λαλούμενον is prob. a wrong rdg. (B has τὸν λαλ., D τοῦτον τὸν λ. without λαλούμενον).—On the art. w. ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς s. the words in question.
    η. As in the case of the poss. pron. (ε) and adj. (ζ), so it is w. other expressions that can modify a noun: ἡ κατʼ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις Ro 9:11. ἡ παρʼ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη 11:27. ὁ λόγος ὁ τοῦ σταυροῦ 1 Cor 1:18. ἡ ἐντολὴ ἡ εἰς ζωήν Ro 7:10. ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν 1 Th 1:8. ἡ διακονία ἡ εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους 2 Cor 8:4.
    θ. The art. precedes the noun when a demonstrative pron. (ὅδε, οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging with it comes before or after; e.g.: οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρωπος Lk 14:30; J 9:24. οὗτος ὁ λαός Mk 7:6. οὗτος ὁ υἱός μου Lk 15:24. οὗτος ὁ τελώνης 18:11 and oft. ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος Mk 14:71; Lk 2:25; 23:4, 14, 47. ὁ λαὸς οὗτος Mt 15:8. ὁ υἱός σου οὗτος Lk 15:30 and oft.—ἐκείνη ἡ ἡμέρα Mt 7:22; 22:46. ἐκ. ἡ ὥρα 10:19; 18:1; 26:55. ἐκ. ὁ καιρός 11:25; 12:1; 14:1. ἐκ. ὁ πλάνος 27:63 and oft. ἡ οἰκία ἐκείνη Mt 7:25, 27. ἡ ὥρα ἐκ. 8:13; 9:22; ἡ γῆ ἐκ. 9:26, 31; ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκ. 13:1. ὁ ἀγρὸς ἐκ. vs. 44 and oft.—ὁ αὐτός s. αὐτός 3b.
    ι. An art. before a nom. noun makes it a vocative (as early as Hom.; s. KBrugman4-AThumb, Griech. Gramm. 1913, 431; Schwyzer II 63f; B-D-F §147; Rob. 769. On the LXX Johannessohn, Kasus 14f.—ParJer 1:1 Ἰερεμία ὁ ἐκλεκτός μου; 7:2 χαῖρε Βαρούχι ὁ οἰκονόμος τῆς πίστεως) ναί, ὁ πατήρ Mt 11:26. τὸ κοράσιον, ἔγειρε Mk 5:41. Cp. Mt 7:23; 27:29 v.l.; Lk 8:54; 11:39; 18:11, 13 (Goodsp, Probs. 85–87); J 19:3 and oft.
    ⓑ Adjectives become substantives by the addition of the art.
    α. ὁ πονηρός Eph 6:16. οἱ σοφοί 1 Cor 1:27. οἱ ἅγιοι, οἱ πλούσιοι, οἱ πολλοί al. Likew. the neut. τὸ κρυπτόν Mt 6:4. τὸ ἅγιον 7:6. τὸ μέσον Mk 3:3. τὸ θνητόν 2 Cor 5:4. τὰ ἀδύνατα Lk 18:27. τὸ ἔλαττον Hb 7:7. Also w. gen. foll. τὰ ἀγαθά σου Lk 16:25. τὸ μωρόν, τὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 1:25; cp. vs. 27f. τὸ γνωστὸν τοῦ θεοῦ Ro 1:19. τὰ ἀόρατα τοῦ θεοῦ vs. 20. τὸ ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου 8:3. τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς αἰσχύνης 2 Cor 4:2.
    β. Adj. attributes whose noun is customarily omitted come to have substantive force and therefore receive the art. (B-D-F §241; Rob. 652–54) ἡ περίχωρος Mt 3:5; ἡ ξηρά 23:15 (i.e. γῆ). ἡ ἀριστερά, ἡ δεξιά (sc. χείρ) 6:3. ἡ ἐπιοῦσα (sc. ἡμέρα) Ac 16:11. ἡ ἔρημος (sc. χώρα) Mt 11:7.
    γ. The neut. of the adj. w. the art. can take on the mng. of an abstract noun (Thu. 1, 36, 1 τὸ δεδιός=fear; Herodian 1, 6, 9; 1, 11, 5 τὸ σεμνὸν τῆς παρθένου; M. Ant. 1, 1; Just., D. 27, 2 διὰ τὸ σκληροκάρδιον ὑμῶν καὶ ἀχάριστον εἰς αὐτόν) τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ θεοῦ God’s kindness Ro 2:4. τὸ δυνατόν power 9:22. τὸ σύμφορον benefit 1 Cor 7:35. τὸ γνήσιον genuineness 2 Cor 8:8. τὸ ἐπιεικές Phil 4:5 al.
    δ. The art. w. numerals indicates, as in Il. 5, 271f; X. et al. (HKallenberg, RhM 69, 1914, 662ff), that a part of a number already known is being mentioned (Diod S 18, 10, 2 τρεῖς μὲν φυλὰς … τὰς δὲ ἑπτά=‘but the seven others’; Plut., Cleom. 804 [8, 4] οἱ τέσσαρες=‘the other four’; Polyaenus 6, 5 οἱ τρεῖς=‘the remaining three’; Diog. L. 1, 82 Βίας προκεκριμένος τῶν ἑπτά=Bias was preferred before the others of the seven [wise men]. B-D-F §265): οἱ ἐννέα the other nine Lk 17:17. Cp. 15:4; Mt 18:12f. οἱ δέκα the other ten (disciples) 20:24; Mk 10:41; lepers Lk 17:17. οἱ πέντε … ὁ εἷς … ὁ ἄλλος five of them … one … the last one Rv 17:10.
    ⓒ The ptc. w. the art. receives
    α. the mng. of a subst. ὁ πειράζων the tempter Mt 4:3; 1 Th 3:5. ὁ βαπτίζων Mk 6:14. ὁ σπείρων Mt 13:3; Lk 8:5. ὁ ὀλεθρεύων Hb 11:28. τὸ ὀφειλόμενον Mt 18:30, 34. τὸ αὐλούμενον 1 Cor 14:7. τὸ λαλούμενον vs. 9 (Just., D. 32, 3 τὸ ζητούμενον). τὰ γινόμενα Lk 9:7. τὰ ἐρχόμενα J 16:13. τὰ ἐξουθενημένα 1 Cor 1:28. τὰ ὑπάρχοντα (s. ὑπάρχω 1). In Engl. usage many of these neuters are transl. by a relative clause, as in β below. B-D-F §413; Rob. 1108f.
    β. the mng. of a relative clause (Ar. 4, 2 al. οἱ νομίζοντες) ὁ δεχόμενος ὑμᾶς whoever receives you Mt 10:40. τῷ τύπτοντί σε Lk 6:29. ὁ ἐμὲ μισῶν J 15:23. οὐδὲ γὰρ ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον τὸ δεδομένον (ὸ̔ δέδοται) Ac 4:12. τινές εἰσιν οἱ ταράσσοντες ὑμᾶς Gal 1:7. Cp. Lk 7:32; 18:9; J 12:12; Col 2:8; 1 Pt 1:7; 2J 7; Jd 4 al. So esp. after πᾶς: πᾶς ὁ ὀργιζόμενος everyone who becomes angry Mt 5:22. πᾶς ὁ κρίνων Ro 2:1 al. After μακάριος Mt 5:4, 6, 10. After οὐαὶ ὑμῖν Lk 6:25.
    ⓓ The inf. w. neut. art. (B-D-F §398ff; Rob. 1062–68) is used in a number of ways.
    α. It stands for a noun (B-D-F §399; Rob. 1062–66) τὸ (ἀνίπτοις χερσὶν) φαγεῖν Mt 15:20. τὸ (ἐκ νεκρῶν) ἀναστῆναι Mk 9:10. τὸ ἀγαπᾶν 12:33; cp. Ro 13:8. τὸ ποιῆσαι, τὸ ἐπιτελέσαι 2 Cor 8:11. τὸ καθίσαι Mt 20:23. τὸ θέλειν Ro 7:18; 2 Cor 8:10.—Freq. used w. preps. ἀντὶ τοῦ, διὰ τό, διὰ τοῦ, ἐκ τοῦ, ἐν τῷ, ἕνεκεν τοῦ, ἕως τοῦ, μετὰ τό, πρὸ τοῦ, πρὸς τό etc.; s. the preps. in question (B-D-F §402–4; Rob. 1068–75).
    β. The gen. of the inf. w. the art., without a prep., is esp. frequent (B-D-F §400; Mlt. 216–18; Rob. 1066–68; DEvans, ClQ 15, 1921, 26ff). The use of this inf. is esp. common in Lk and Paul, less freq. in Mt and Mk, quite rare in other writers. The gen. stands
    א. dependent on words that govern the gen.: ἄξιον 1 Cor 16:4 (s. ἄξιος 1c). ἐξαπορηθῆναι τοῦ ζῆν 2 Cor 1:8. ἔλαχε τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι Lk 1:9 (cp. 1 Km 14:47 v.l. Σαοὺλ ἔλαχεν τοῦ βασιλεύειν).
    ב. dependent on a noun (B-D-F §400, 1; Rob. 1066f) ὁ χρόνος τοῦ τεκεῖν Lk 1:57. ἐπλήσθησαν αἱ ἡμέραι τοῦ τεκεῖν αὐτήν 2:6. ἐξουσία τοῦ πατεῖν 10:19. εὐκαιρία τοῦ παραδοῦναι 22:6. ἐλπὶς τοῦ σῴζεσθαι Ac 27:20; τοῦ μετέχειν 1 Cor 9:10. ἐπιποθία τοῦ ἐλθεῖν Ro 15:23. χρείαν ἔχειν τοῦ διδάσκειν Hb 5:12. καιρὸς τοῦ ἄρξασθαι 1 Pt 4:17. τ. ἐνέργειαν τοῦ δύνασθαι the power that enables him Phil 3:21. ἡ προθυμία τοῦ θέλειν zeal in desiring 2 Cor 8:11.
    ג. Somet. the connection w. the noun is very loose, and the transition to the consecutive sense (=result) is unmistakable (B-D-F §400, 2; Rob. 1066f): ἐπλήσθησαν ἡμέραι ὀκτὼ τοῦ περιτεμεῖν αὐτόν Lk 2:21. ὀφειλέται … τοῦ κατὰ σάρκα ζῆν Ro 8:12. εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν τοῦ ἀτιμάζεσθαι 1:24. ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν 11:8. τὴν ἔκβασιν τοῦ δύνασθαι ὑπενεγκεῖν 1 Cor 10:13.
    ד. Verbs of hindering, ceasing take the inf. w. τοῦ μή (s. Schwyzer II 372 for earlier Gk; PGen 16, 23 [207 A.D.] κωλύοντες τοῦ μὴ σπείρειν; LXX; ParJer 2:5 φύλαξαι τοῦ μὴ σχίσαι τὰ ἱμάτιά σου): καταπαύειν Ac 14:18. κατέχειν Lk 4:42. κρατεῖσθαι 24:16. κωλύειν Ac 10:47. παύειν 1 Pt 3:10 (Ps 33:14). ὑποστέλλεσθαι Ac 20:20, 27. Without μή: ἐγκόπτεσθαι τοῦ ἐλθεῖν Ro 15:22.
    ה. The gen. of the inf. comes after verbs of deciding, exhorting, commanding, etc. (1 Ch 19:19; ParJer 7:37 διδάσκων αὐτοὺ τοῦ ἀπέχεσθαι) ἐγένετο γνώμης Ac 20:3. ἐντέλλεσθαι Lk 4:10 (Ps 90:11). ἐπιστέλλειν Ac 15:20. κατανεύειν Lk 5:7. κρίνειν Ac 27:1. παρακαλεῖν 21:12. προσεύχεσθαι Js 5:17. τὸ πρόσωπον στηρίζειν Lk 9:51. συντίθεσθαι Ac 23:20.
    ו. The inf. w. τοῦ and τοῦ μή plainly has final (=purpose) sense (ParJer 5:2 ἐκάθισεν … τοῦ ἀναπαῆναι ὀλίγον; Soph., Lex. I 45f; B-D-F §400, 5 w. exx. fr. non-bibl. lit. and pap; Rob. 1067): ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρων τοῦ σπείρειν a sower went out to sow Mt 13:3. ζητεῖν τοῦ ἀπολέσαι = ἵνα ἀπολέσῃ 2:13. τοῦ δοῦναι γνῶσιν Lk 1:77. τοῦ κατευθῦναι τοὺς πόδας vs. 79. τοῦ σινιάσαι 22:31. τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν Ro 6:6. τοῦ ποιῆσαι αὐτά Gal 3:10. τοῦ γνῶναι αὐτόν Phil 3:10. Cp. Mt 3:13; 11:1; 24:45; Lk 2:24, 27; 8:5; 24:29; Ac 3:2; 20:30; 26:18; Hb 10:7 (Ps 39:9); 11:5; GJs 2:3f; 24:1.—The apparently solecistic τοῦ πολεμῆσαι Ro 12:7 bears a Semitic tinge, cp. Hos 9:13 et al. (Mussies 96).—The combination can also express
    ז. consecutive mng. (result): οὐδὲ μετεμελήθητε τοῦ πιστεῦσαι αὐτῷ you did not change your minds and believe him Mt 21:32. τοῦ μὴ εἶναι αὐτὴν μοιχαλίδα Ro 7:3. τοῦ ποιεῖν τὰ βρέφη ἔκθετα Ac 7:19. Cp. 3:12; 10:25.
    ⓔ The art. is used w. prepositional expressions (Artem. 4, 33 p. 224, 7 ὁ ἐν Περγάμῳ; 4, 36 ὁ ἐν Μαγνησίᾳ; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010 recto, 8–12] οἱ ἐν τοῖς πεδίοις … οἱ ἐν τοῖς ὄρεσι καὶ μετεώροις; Tat. 31, 2 οἱ μὲν περὶ Κράτητα … οἱ δὲ περὶ Ἐρατοσθένη) τῆς ἐκκλησίας τῆς ἐν Κεγχρεαῖς Ro 16:1. ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις ταῖς ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ Rv 1:4. τῷ ἀγγέλῳ τῆς ἐν (w. place name) ἐκκλησίας 2:1, 8, 12, 18; 3:1, 7, 14 (on these pass. RBorger, TRu 52, ’87, 42–45). τοῖς ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ to those in the house Mt 5:15. πάτερ ἡμῶν ὁ ἐν τ. οὐρανοῖς 6:9. οἱ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας Hb 13:24. οἱ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ Ro 8:1. οἱ ἐξ ἐριθείας 2:8. οἱ ἐκ νόμου 4:14; cp. vs. 16. οἱ ἐκ τῆς Καίσαρος οἰκίας Phil 4:22. οἱ ἐξ εὐωνύμων Mt 25:41. τὸ θυσιαστήριον … τὸ ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου Rv 8:3; cp. 9:13. On 1:4 s. ref in B-D-F §136, 1 to restoration by Nestle. οἱ παρʼ αὐτοῦ Mk 3:21. οἱ μετʼ αὐτοῦ Mt 12:3. οἱ περὶ αὐτόν Mk 4:10; Lk 22:49 al.—Neut. τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ πλοίου pieces of wreckage fr. the ship Ac 27:44 (difft. FZorell, BZ 9, 1911, 159f). τὰ περί τινος Lk 24:19, 27; Ac 24:10; Phil 1:27 (Tat. 32, 2 τὰ περὶ θεοῦ). τὰ περί τινα 2:23. τὰ κατʼ ἐμέ my circumstances Eph 6:21; Phil 1:12; Col 4:7. τὰ κατὰ τὸν νόμον what (was to be done) according to the law Lk 2:39. τὸ ἐξ ὑμῶν Ro 12:18. τὰ πρὸς τὸν θεόν 15:17; Hb 2:17; 5:1 (X., Resp. Lac. 13, 11 ἱερεῖ τὰ πρὸς τοὺς θεούς, στρατηγῷ δὲ τὰ πρὸς τοὺς ἀνθρώπους). τὰ παρʼ αὐτῶν Lk 10:7. τὸ ἐν ἐμοί the (child) in me GJs 12:2 al.
    ⓕ w. an adv. or adverbial expr. (1 Macc 8:3) τὸ ἔμπροσθεν Lk 19:4. τὸ ἔξωθεν Mt 23:25. τὸ πέραν Mt 8:18, 28. τὰ ἄνω J 8:23; Col 3:1f. τὰ κάτω J 8:23. τὰ ὀπίσω Mk 13:16. τὰ ὧδε matters here Col 4:9. ὁ πλησίον the neighbor Mt 5:43. οἱ καθεξῆς Ac 3:24. τὸ κατὰ σάρκα Ro 9:5. τὸ ἐκ μέρους 1 Cor 13:10.—Esp. w. indications of time τό, τὰ νῦν s. νῦν 2b. τὸ πάλιν 2 Cor 13:2. τὸ λοιπόν 1 Cor 7:29; Phil 3:1. τὸ πρῶτον J 10:40; 12:16; 19:39. τὸ πρότερον 6:62; Gal 4:13. τὸ καθʼ ἡμέραν daily Lk 11:3.—τὸ πλεῖστον at the most 1 Cor 14:27.
    ⓖ The art. w. the gen. foll. denotes a relation of kinship, ownership, or dependence: Ἰάκωβος ὁ τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου Mt 10:2 (Thu. 4, 104 Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου [sc. υἱός]; Plut., Timol. 3, 2; Appian, Syr. 26 §123 Σέλευκος ὁ Ἀντιόχου; Jos., Bell. 5, 5; 11). Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου Lk 24:10. ἡ τοῦ Οὐρίου the wife of Uriah Mt 1:6. οἱ Χλόης Chloë’s people 1 Cor 1:11. οἱ Ἀριστοβούλου, οἱ Ναρκίσσου Ro 16:10f. οἱ αὐτοῦ Ac 16:33. οἱ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Cor 15:23; Gal 5:24. Καισάρεια ἡ Φιλίππου Caesarea Philippi i.e. the city of Philip Mk 8:27.—τό, τά τινος someone’s things, affairs, circumstances (Thu. 4, 83 τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου; Parthenius 1, 6; Appian, Syr. 16 §67 τὰ Ῥωμαίων) τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, τῶν ἀνθρώπων Mt 16:23; 22:21; Mk 8:33; cp. 1 Cor 2:11. τὰ τῆς σαρκός, τοῦ πνεύματος Ro 8:5; cp. 14:19; 1 Cor 7:33f; 13:11. τὰ ὑμῶν 2 Cor 12:14. τὰ τῆς ἀσθενείας μου 11:30. τὰ τοῦ νόμου what the law requires Ro 2:14. τὸ τῆς συκῆς what has been done to the fig tree Mt 21:21; cp. 8:33. τὰ ἑαυτῆς its own advantage 1 Cor 13:5; cp. Phil 2:4, 21. τὸ τῆς παροιμίας what the proverb says 2 Pt 2:22 (Pla., Theaet. 183e τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου; Menand., Dyscolus 633 τὸ τοῦ λόγου). ἐν τοῖς τοῦ πατρός μου in my Father’s house (so Field, Notes 50–56; Goodsp. Probs. 81–83; difft., ‘interests’, PTemple, CBQ 1, ’39, 342–52.—In contrast to the other synoptists, Luke does not elsewhere show Jesus ‘at home’.) Lk 2:49 (Lysias 12, 12 εἰς τὰ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ; Theocr. 2, 76 τὰ Λύκωνος; pap in Mayser II [1926] p. 8; POxy 523, 3 [II A.D.] an invitation to a dinner ἐν τοῖς Κλαυδίου Σαραπίωνος; PTebt 316 II, 23 [99 A.D.] ἐν τοῖς Ποτάμωνος; Esth 7:9; Job 18:19; Jos., Ant. 16, 302. Of the temple of a god Jos., C. Ap. 1, 118 ἐν τοῖς τοῦ Διός). Mt 20:15 is classified here by WHatch, ATR 26, ’44, 250–53; s. also ἐμός b.
    ⓗ The neut. of the art. stands
    α. before whole sentences or clauses (Epict. 4, 1, 45 τὸ Καίσαρος μὴ εἶναι φίλον; Prov. Aesopi 100 P. τὸ Οὐκ οἶδα; Jos., Ant. 10, 205; Just., D. 33, 2 τὸ γὰρ … [Ps 109:4]) τὸ Οὐ φονεύσεις, οὐ μοιχεύσεις κτλ. (quot. fr. the Decalogue) Mt 19:18; Ro 13:9. τὸ Καὶ μετὰ ἀνόμων ἐλογίσθη (quot. fr. Is 53:12) Lk 22:37. Cp. Gal 5:14. τὸ Εἰ δύνῃ as far as your words ‘If you can’ are concerned Mk 9:23. Likew. before indirect questions (Vett. Val. 291, 14 τὸ πῶς τέτακται; Ael. Aristid. 45, 15 K. τὸ ὅστις ἐστίν; ParJer 6:15 τὸ πῶς ἀποστείλης; GrBar 8:6 τὸ πῶς ἐταπεινώθη; Jos., Ant. 20, 28 ἐπὶ πείρᾳ τοῦ τί φρονοῖεν; Pel.-Leg. p. 20, 32 τὸ τί γένηται; Mel., Fgm. 8, 2 [Goodsp. p. 311] τὸ δὲ πῶς λούονται) τὸ τί ἂν θέλοι καλεῖσθαι αὐτό Lk 1:62. τὸ τίς ἂν εἴη μείζων αὐτῶν 9:46. τὸ πῶς δεῖ ὑμᾶς περιπατεῖν 1 Th 4:1. Cp. Lk 19:48; 22:2, 4, 23f; Ac 4:21; 22:30; Ro 8:26; Hs 8, 1, 4.
    β. before single words which are taken fr. what precedes and hence are quoted, as it were (Epict. 1, 29, 16 τὸ Σωκράτης; 3, 23, 24; Hierocles 13 p. 448 ἐν τῷ μηδείς) τὸ ‘ἀνέβη’ Eph 4:9. τὸ ‘ἔτι ἅπαξ’ Hb 12:27. τὸ ‘Ἁγάρ’ Gal 4:25.
    ⓘ Other notable uses of the art. are
    α. the elliptic use, which leaves a part of a sentence accompanied by the art. to be completed fr. the context: ὁ τὰ δύο the man with the two (talents), i.e. ὁ τὰ δύο τάλαντα λαβών Mt 25:17; cp. vs. 22. τῷ τὸν φόρον Ro 13:7. ὁ τὸ πολύ, ὀλίγον the man who had much, little 2 Cor 8:15 after Ex 16:18 (cp. Lucian, Bis Accus. 9 ὁ τὴν σύριγγα [sc. ἔχων]; Arrian, Anab. 7, 8, 3 τὴν ἐπὶ θανάτῳ [sc. ὁδόν]).
    β. Σαῦλος, ὁ καὶ Παῦλος Ac 13:9; s. καί 2h.
    γ. the fem. art. is found in a quite singular usage ἡ οὐαί (ἡ θλῖψις or ἡ πληγή) Rv 9:12; 11:14. Sim. ὁ Ἀμήν 3:14 (here the masc. art. is evidently chosen because of the alternate name for Jesus).
    ⓙ One art. can refer to several nouns connected by καί
    α. when various words, sing. or pl., are brought close together by a common art.: τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ γραμματεῖς Mt 2:4; cp. 16:21; Mk 15:1. ἐν τοῖς προφήταις κ. ψαλμοῖς Lk 24:44. τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ καὶ Σαμαρείᾳ Ac 1:8; cp. 8:1; Lk 5:17 al.—Even nouns of different gender can be united in this way (Aristoph., Eccl. 750; Ps.-Pla., Axioch. 12 p. 37a οἱ δύο θεοί, of Apollo and Artemis; Ps.-Demetr., Eloc. c. 292; PTebt 14, 10 [114 B.C.]; En 18:14; EpArist 109) κατὰ τὰ ἐντάλματα καὶ διδασκαλίας Col 2:22. Cp. Lk 1:6. εἰς τὰς ὁδοὺς καὶ φραγμούς 14:23.
    β. when one and the same person has more than one attribute applied to him: πρὸς τὸν πατέρα μου καὶ πατέρα ὑμῶν J 20:17. ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου Ἰ. Ro 15:6; 2 Cor 1:3; 11:31; Eph 1:3; 1 Pt 1:3. ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ (ἡμῶν) Eph 5:20; Phil 4:20; 1 Th 1:3; 3:11, 13. Of Christ: τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ σωτῆρος 2 Pt 1:11; cp. 2:20; 3:18. τοῦ μεγάλου θεοῦ καὶ σωτῆρος ἡμῶν Tit 2:13 (PGrenf II, 15 I, 6 [139 B.C.] of the deified King Ptolemy τοῦ μεγάλου θεοῦ εὐεργέτου καὶ σωτῆρος [ἐπιφανοῦς] εὐχαρίστου).
    γ. On the other hand, the art. is repeated when two different persons are named: ὁ φυτεύων καὶ ὁ ποτίζων 1 Cor 3:8. ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ ὁ ἡγεμών Ac 26:30.
    ⓚ In a fixed expression, when a noun in the gen. is dependent on another noun, the art. customarily appears twice or not at all: τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 3:16; πνεῦμα θεοῦ Ro 8:9. ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ 2 Cor 2:17; λόγος θεοῦ 1 Th 2:13. ἡ ἡμέρα τοῦ κυρίου 2 Th 2:2; ἡμ. κ. 1 Th 5:2. ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου Mt 8:20; υἱ. ἀ. Hb 2:6. ἡ ἀνάστασις τῶν νεκρῶν Mt 22:31; ἀ. ν. Ac 23:6. ἡ κοιλία τῆς μητρός J 3:4; κ. μ. Mt 19:12.—APerry, JBL 68, ’49, 329–34; MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 93–95.—DELG. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὁ

  • 22 ὄνομα

    ὄνομα, ατος, τό (Hom.+).
    ① proper name of an entity, name
    ⓐ gener. τῶν ἀποστόλων τὰ ὀνόματα ἐστιν ταῦτα Mt 10:2; cp. Rv 21:14. τῶν παρθένων τὰ ὀν. Hs 9, 15, 1. τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ πατρός Lk 1:59. ὄν. μοι, sc. ἐστίν, my name is (Od. 9, 366) Mk 5:9b. τί ὄν. σοι; what is your name? vs. 9a; w. copula Lk 8:30.—The expressions ᾧ (ᾗ) ὄν., οὗ τὸ ὄν., καὶ τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ (αὐτῆς), ὄν. αὐτῷ (parenthetic) are almost always without the copula (B-D-F §128, 3; Rob. 395): ᾧ (ᾗ) ὄν. (Sb 7573, 13 [116 A.D.]; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 5 Jac.; Just., A I, 53, 8 ᾧ ὄν. Λώτ) Lk 1:26, 27a; 2:25; 8:41; 24:13, 18 v.l.; Ac 13:6.—οὗ τὸ ὄν. (without a verb as BGU 344, 1) Mk 14:32. Cp. ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα ἐν βίβλῳ ζωῆς Phil 4:3 (ὧν τὰ ὀν. is a formula [Dssm., LO 95=LAE 121]. S. esp. BGU 432 II, 3 ὧν τὰ ὀν. τῷ βιβλιδίῳ δεδήλωται).—καὶ τὸ ὄν. αὐτῆς Lk 1:5b. καὶ τὸ ὄν. τῆς παρθένου Μαριάμ vs. 27b.—ὄν. αὐτῷ (Demosth. 32, 11 Ἀριστοφῶν ὄνομʼ αὐτῷ; Dionys. Hal. 8, 89, 4; Aelian, NA 8, 2 γυνὴ … Ἡρακληὶς ὄν. αὐτῇ; LXX) J 1:6; 3:1. ὁ καθήμενος ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ (i.e. τοῦ ἵππου), ὄν. αὐτῷ (ὁ) θάνατος Rv 6:8; cp. 9:11a.—W. the copula ἦν δὲ ὄν. τῷ δούλῳ Μάλχος J 18:10 (POxy 465, 12 ὁ δὲ κραταιὸς αὐτοῦ, ὄν. αὐτῷ ἐστιν Νεβύ, μηνύει; Jos., Ant. 19, 332). ἄγγελος …, οὗ τὸ ὄν. ἐστιν Θεγρί Hv 4, 2, 4.—The dat. is quite freq. ὀνόματι named, by name (X., Hell. 1, 6, 29 Σάμιος ὀνόματι Ἱππεύς; Tob 6:11 BA; 4 Macc 5:4; Just., D. 85, 6; 115, 3; B-D-F §160; 197; Rob. 487) ἄνθρωπον ὀν. Σίμωνα Mt 27:32; cp. Mk 5:22; Lk 1:5a; 5:27; 10:38; 16:20; 23:50; 24:18; Ac 5:1, 34; 8:9; 9:10–12, 33, 36; 10:1; 11:28; 12:13; 16:1, 14; 17:34; 18:2, 7, 24; 19:24; 20:9; 21:10; 27:1; 28:7; MPol 4. Also the acc. τοὔνομα (on the crasis s. B-D-F §18; Mlt-H. 63; FPreisigke, Griech. Urkunden des ägypt. Mus. zu Kairo [1911] 2, 6 γυνὴ Ταμοῦνις τοὔνομα; Diod S 2, 45, 4 πόλιν τοὔνομα Θ.; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 3; Philo, Leg. All. 1, 68; Jos., Ant. 7, 344, Vi. 382) named, by name (the acc. as X. et al., also 2 Macc 12:13; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 5 Jac. υἱὸν ὄ. Δάν.—B-D-F §160; Rob. 487) Mt 27:57. (Cp. ὄν. gener. as ‘mode of expression’ εἰ καὶ διάφορα ὀνόματα ἐστιν, ἀλλʼ … οἰκείαν … δέχεται τὴν νόησιν although there are various ways of expressing it, it nevertheless has a definite sense Did., Gen. 86, 22 [of various metaphors and images for the soul].)
    ⓑ used w. verbs
    α. as their obj.: ὄν. ἔχειν Did., Gen. 29, 6 bear the name or as name, be named ὄν. ἔχει Ἀπολλύων Rv 9:11b (in this case the name Ἀ. stands independently in the nom.; B-D-F §143; Rob. 458). καλεῖν τὸ ὄν. τινος w. the name foll. in the acc. (after the Hb.; B-D-F §157, 2; Rob. 459) καλέσεις τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἰησοῦν you are to name him Jesus Mt 1:21; Lk 1:31.—Mt 1:25. καλέσεις τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἰωάννην Lk 1:13. καλέσουσιν τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἐμμανουήλ Mt 1:23 (Is 7:14). διδόναι GJs 6:2. Pass. w. the name in the nom. (cp. GrBar 6:10 Φοῖνιξ καλεῖται τὸ ὄν. μου) ἐκλήθη τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἰησοῦς Lk 2:21; cp. Rv 19:13. Also τὸ ὄν. τοῦ ἀστέρος λέγεται ὁ ῎ Αψινθος Rv 8:11.—ἐπιθεῖναι ὄν. τινι w. acc. of the name Mk 3:16f; cp. 12:8f; κληρονομεῖν ὄν. receive a name Hb 1:4=1 Cl 36:2. κληροῦσθαι τὸ αὐτὸ ὄν. obtain the same name (s. κληρόω 2) MPol 6:2.—τὰ ὀν. ὑμῶν ἐγγέγραπται ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς Lk 10:20.—Rv 13:8; 17:8. ἐξαλείψω τὸ ὄν. αὐτῶν 1 Cl 53:3 (Dt 9:14); Rv 3:5a (perh. to be placed in 4 below); s. ἐξαλείφω.
    β. in another way (εἰ δέ τις ὀνόματι καλέσει but if anyone is so named Hippol., Ref. 6, 20, 2): ὸ̔ς καλεῖται τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ who is so named Lk 1:61. ἀνὴρ ὀνόματι καλούμενος Ζακχαῖος a man whose name was Zacchaeus 19:2. καλεῖν τι (i.e. παιδίον) ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί τινος name someone after someone 1:59. Cp. IMg 10:1. This leads to
    ⓒ used w. prepositions: ἐξ ὀνόματος (Ctesias, Ind. p. 105 M.: Diod S 13, 15, 1; 37, 15, 2; Appian, Mithrid. 59, §243, Bell. Civ. 3, 21 §77; 4, 73 §310; PGM 4, 2973; Jos., Ant. 2, 275) by name, individually, one by one (so that no one is lost in the crowd) ἐξ ὀν. πάντας ζήτει IPol 4:2. ἀσπάζομαι πάντας ἐξ ὀνόματος 8:2. πάντες ἐξ ὀν. συνέρχεσθε (parallel to κατʼ ἄνδρα) IEph 20:2.—κατʼ ὄν. by name, individually (Diod S 16, 44, 2; Gen 25:13; EpArist 247; Jos., Bell. 7, 14) J 10:3 (New Docs 3, 77f; animals called individually by name: Ps.-Aristot., Mirabil. 118.—HAlmqvist, Plut. u. das NT ’46, 74). Esp. in greetings (BGU 27, 18 [II A.D.] ἀσπάζομαι πάντας τοὺς φιλοῦντάς σε κατʼ ὄν.; POxy 1070, 46; pap in Dssm., LO 160/1, ln. 14f [LAE 193, ln. 15, note 21]; New Docs 3, 77f) 3J 15; ISm 13:2b. ῥάβδους ἐπιγεγραμμένας ἑκάστης φυλῆς κατʼ ὄν. staffs, each one inscribed with the name of a tribe 1 Cl 43:2b.
    ⓓ used in combination with God and Jesus. On the significance of the Divine Name in history of religions s. FGiesebrecht, Die atl. Schätzung des Gottesnamens 1901; Bousset, Rel.3 309ff; ADieterich, Eine Mithrasliturgie 1903, 110ff; FConybeare, JQR 8, 1896; 9, 1897, esp. 9, 581ff; JBoehmer, Das bibl. ‘im Namen’ 1898, BFCT V 6, 1901, 49ff, Studierstube 2, 1904, 324ff; 388ff; 452ff; 516ff; 580ff; BJacob, Im Namen Gottes 1903;WHeitmüller, ‘Im Namen Jesu’ 1903; WBrandt, TT 25, 1891, 565ff; 26, 1892, 193ff; 38, 1904, 355ff; RHirzel, Der Name: ASG 36, 2, 1918; Schürer III4 409–11; HObbink, De magische betekenis van den naam inzonderheid in het oude Egypte 1925; OGrether, Name u. Wort Gottes im AT ’34; HHuffman, Name: 1148–52.—The belief in the efficacy of the name is extremely old; its origin goes back to the most ancient times and the most primitive forms of intellectual and religious life. It has exhibited an extraordinary vitality. The period of our lit. also sees—within as well as without the new community of believers—in the name someth. real, a piece of the very nature of the personality whom it designates, expressing the person’s qualities and powers. Accordingly, names, esp. holy names, are revered and used in customary practices and ritual (σέβεσθαι θεῶν ὀνόματα Theoph. Ant., 1, 9 [p. 76, 7]), including magic. In Israelite tradition the greatest reverence was paid to the holy name of God and to its numerous paraphrases or substitutes; the names of angels and patriarchs occupied a secondary place. The syncretistic practices of the period revered the names of gods, daemons, and heroes, or even magic words that made no sense at all, but had a mysterious sound. The Judeo-Christians revere and use the name of God and, of course, the name of Jesus. On magic in Jewish circles, s. Schürer III 342–79; for the NT period in general s. MSmith, Clement of Alexandria and a Secret Gospel of Mark ’73, 195–230.—The names of God and Jesus
    α. in combination w. attributes: διαφορώτερον ὄν. a more excellent name Hb 1:4=1 Cl 36:2 (διάφορος 2). ἅγιον τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Lk 1:49 (cp. Ps 110:9; Lev 18:21; 22:2; PGM 3, 570; 627; 4, 1005; 3071; 5, 77; 13, 561 μέγα κ. ἅγιον). τὸ μεγαλοπρεπὲς καὶ ἅγιον ὄν. αὐτοῦ 1 Cl 64; τὸ μέγα καὶ ἔνδοξον ὄν. Hv 4, 1, 3; 4, 2, 4 (on ἔνδοξον ὄν., cp. EPeterson, Εἷ θεός 1926, 282.—ὄν. μέγα κ. ἅγ. κ. ἔνδ.: PGM 13, 183f; 504f). τὸ μέγα καὶ θαυμαστὸν καὶ ἔνδοξον ὄν. Hs 9, 18, 5; τὸ πανάγιον καὶ ἔνδοξον ὄν. 1 Cl 58:1a; τοῦ παντοκράτορος καὶ ἐνδόξου ὄν. Hv 3, 3, 5; τὸ πανάρετον ὄν. 1 Cl 45:7; τῷ παντοκράτορι καὶ ἐνδόξῳ ὀνόματι 60:4; τὸ ὁσιώτατον τῆς μεγαλωσύνης αὐτοῦ ὄν. 58:1b. τὸ ὄν. μου θαυμαστὸν ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσι D 14:3 (cp. Mal 1:14). The words ὄν. θεοπρεπέστατον IMg 1:2 are difficult to interpret (s. Hdb. ad loc.; θεοπρεπής b).
    β. in combination w. verbs: ἁγιάζειν τὸ ὄν. Mt 6:9 (AFridrichsen, Helligt vorde dit naun: DTT 8, 1917, 1–16). Lk 11:2; D 8:2 (ἁγιάζω 3). βλασφημεῖν (q.v. bγ) τὸ ὄν. Rv 13:6; 16:9; pass. βλασφημεῖται τὸ ὄν. (Is 52:5) Ro 2:24; 2 Cl 13:1f, 4; ITr 8:2. βλασφημίας ἐπιφέρεσθαι τῷ ὀν. κυρίου bring blasphemy upon the name of the Lord 1 Cl 47:7. πφοσέθηκαν κατὰ ὄν. τοῦ κυρίου βλασφημίαν Hs 6, 2, 3; βεβηλοῦν τὸ ὄν. 8, 6, 2 (s. βεβηλόω). ἀπαγγελῶ τὸ ὄν. τ. ἀδελφοῖς μου Hb 2:12 (cp. Ps 21:23). ὅπως διαγγελῇ τὸ ὄν. μου ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ Ro 9:17 (Ex 9:16). δοξάζειν τὸ ὄν. (σου, τοῦ κυρίου, τοῦ θεοῦ etc.) Rv 15:4; 1 Cl 43:6; IPhld 10:1; Hv 2, 1, 2; 3, 4, 3; 4, 1, 3; Hs 9, 18, 5 (s. δοξάζω 1; cp. GJs 7:2; 12:1[w. ref. to name of Mary]). ὅπως ἐνδοξασθῇ τὸ ὄν. τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ 2 Th 1:12. ἐλπίζειν τῷ ὀν. Mt 12:21 (vv.ll. ἐν or ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν.; the pass. on which it is based, Is 42:4, has ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν.). ἐπικαλεῖσθαι τὸ ὄν. κυρίου (as PsSol 6:1) or αὐτοῦ, σου etc. (w. ref. to God or Christ) call on the name of the Lord Ac 2:21 (Jo 3:5); 9:14, 21; 22:16; Ro 10:13 (Jo 3:5); 1 Cor 1:2. ψυχὴ ἐπικεκλημένη τὸ μεγαλοπρεπὲς καὶ ἅγιον ὄν. αὐτοῦ a person who calls upon his exalted and holy name 1 Cl 64.—Pass. πάντα τὰ ἔθνη ἐφʼ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄν. μου ἐπʼ αὐτούς Ac 15:17 (Am 9:12). τὸ καλὸν ὄν. τὸ ἐπικληθὲν ἐφʼ ὑμᾶς Js 2:7 (on καλὸν ὄν. cp. Sb 343, 9 and the Pompeian graffito in Dssm., LO 237 [LAE 276]). πάντες οἱ ἐπικαλούμενοι τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ all those who are called by (the Lord’s) name Hs 9, 14, 3; cp. οἱ κεκλημένοι τῷ ὀν. κυρίου those who are called by the name of the Lord 8, 1, 1. ἐπαισχύνεσθαι τὸ ὄν. κυρίου τὸ ἐπικληθὲν ἐπʼ αὐτούς be ashamed of the name that is named over them 8, 6, 4. ὁμολογεῖν τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ praise his name Hb 13:15 (cp. PsSol 15:2 ἐξομολογήσασθαι τῷ ὀνόματι σου). ὀνομάζειν τὸ ὄν. κυρίου 2 Ti 2:19 (Is 26:13). ψάλλειν τῷ ὀν. σου Ro 15:9 (Ps 17:50). οὐ μὴ λάβῃς ἐπὶ ματαίῳ τὸ ὄν. κυρίου 19:5 (Ex 20:7; Dt 5:11).—Although in the preceding examples the name is oft. practically inseparable fr. the being that bears it, this is perh. even more true of the foll. cases, in which the name appears almost as the representation of the Godhead, as a tangible manifestation of the divine nature (Quint. Smyrn. 9, 465 Polidarius, when healing, calls on οὔνομα πατρὸς ἑοῖο ‘the name of his father’ [Asclepius]; τοσοῦτον … δύναται τὸ ὄ. τοῦ Ἰησοῦ κατὰ τῶν δαιμόνων Orig., C. Cels. 1, 56, 11; Dt 18:7; 3 Km 8:16; Ps 68:37; Zech 13:2 ἐξολεθρεύσω τὰ ὀν. τῶν εἰδώλων; Zeph 1:4; PsSol 7:6; Just., D. 121, 3 ὑποτάσσεσθαι αὐτοῦ ὀν.): the ‘name’ of God is ἀρχέγονον πάσης κτίσεως 1 Cl 59:3. Sim. τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ μέγα ἐστὶ καὶ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον βαστάζει Hs 9, 14, 5. λατρεύειν τῷ παναρέτῳ ὀν. αὐτοῦ worship the most excellent name (of the Most High) 1 Cl 45:7. ὑπακούειν τῷ παναγίῳ καὶ ἐνδόξῳ ὀν. αὐτοῦ be obedient to his most holy and glorious name 58:1a. ὑπήκοον γενέσθαι τῷ παντοκρατορικῷ καὶ παναρέτῳ ὀν. 60:4. κηρύσσειν τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ Hs 9, 16, 5. ἐπιγινώσκειν τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ 9, 16, 7. φοβεῖσθαι τὸ ὄν. σου Rv 11:18. φανεροῦν τινι τὸ ὄν. σου J 17:6. γνωρίζειν τινὶ τὸ ὄν. σου vs. 26. πιστεύειν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ believe in the name of (God’s) son 1J 3:23. Also πιστεύειν εἰς τὸ ὄν. (s. γב below and s. πιστεύω 2aβ).—Of the name borne by followers of Jesus Christ (cp. Theoph. Ant. 1, 1 [p. 58, 13]): κρατεῖς τὸ ὄν. μου you cling to my name Rv 2:13. The same mng. also holds for the expressions: λαμβάνειν τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ Hs 9, 12, 4; 8; 9, 13, 2a; 7. τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄν. μου ἐνώπιον ἐθνῶν to bear my name before (the) Gentiles Ac 9:15. τὸ ὄν. ἡδέως βαστάζειν bear the name gladly Hs 8, 10, 3; cp. 9, 28, 5b. τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ φορεῖν 9, 13, 3; 9, 14, 5f; 9, 15, 2; cp. 9, 13, 2b. Christians receive this name at their baptism: πρὶν φορέσαι τὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ νεκρός ἐστιν before a person bears the name of God’s Son (which is given the candidate at baptism), he is dead 9, 16, 3. Of dissemblers and false teachers ὄν. μὲν ἔχουσιν, ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς πίστεως κενοί εἰσιν they have the (Christian) name, but are devoid of faith 9, 19, 2. Of Christians in appearance only ἐν ὑποκρίσει φέροντες τὸ ὄν. τοῦ κυρίου who bear the Lord’s name in pretense Pol 6:3. δόλῳ πονηρῷ τὸ ὄν. περιφέρειν carry the name about in wicked deceit (evidently of wandering preachers) IEph 7:1. τὸ ὄν. ἐπαισχύνονται τοῦ κυρίου αὐτῶν they are ashamed of their Lord’s name Hs 9, 21, 3. More fully: ἐπαισχύνονται τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ φορεῖν 9, 14, 6.
    γ. used w. prepositions
    א. w. διά and the gen. διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματός μου πιστεύειν PtK 3 p. 15 ln. 12; σωθῆναι διὰ τοῦ μεγάλου καὶ ἐνδόξου ὀν. be saved through the great and glorious name Hv 4, 2, 4. εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν διὰ τοῦ ὀν. τοῦ υἱοῦ (τοῦ θεοῦ) Hs 9, 12, 5. ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν λαβεῖν διὰ τοῦ ὀν. αὐτοῦ Ac 10:43 (cp. Just., D. 11, 4 al.). σημεῖα … γίνεσθαι διὰ τοῦ ὀν. … Ἰησοῦ by the power of the name 4:30. Differently παρακαλεῖν τινα διὰ τοῦ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου appeal to someone by the name (= while calling on the name) of the Lord 1 Cor 1:10.—W. διά and the acc. μισούμενοι … διὰ τὸ ὄν. μου hated on account of my name (i.e., because you bear it) Mt 10:22; 24:9; Mk 13:13; Lk 21:17 (Just., A I, 4, 2 al.). ποιεῖν τι εἴς τινα διὰ τὸ ὄν. μου J 15:21. ἀφέωνται ὑμῖν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι διὰ τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ your sins are forgiven on account of (Jesus’) name 1J 2:12. βαστάζειν διὰ τὸ ὄν. μου bear (hardship) for my name’s sake Rv 2:3 (s. βαστάζω 2bβ). πάσχειν διὰ τὸ ὄν. (also w. a gen. like αὐτοῦ) Pol 8:2; Hv 3, 2, 1b; Hs 9, 28, 3.
    ב. w. εἰς: somet. evidently as rendering of rabb. לְשֵׁם with regard to, in thinking of δέχεσθαί τινα εἰς ὄν. Ἰ. Χρ. receive someone in deference to Jesus Christ IRo 9:3. δύο ἢ τρεῖς συνηγμένοι εἰς τὸ ἐμὸν ὄν. two or three gathered and thinking of me, i.e., so that I am the reason for their assembling Mt 18:20; but here the other mng. (s. ג below) has had some influence: ‘while naming’ or ‘calling on my name’. τῆς ἀγάπης ἧς ἐνεδείξασθε εἰς τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ (i.e. θεοῦ) Hb 6:10 is either the love that you have shown with regard to him, i.e. for his sake, or we have here the frequently attested formula of Hellenistic legal and commercial language (s. Mayser II/2 p. 415; Dssm. B 143ff, NB 25, LO 97f [BS 146f; 197; LAE 121]; Heitmüller, op. cit. 100ff; FPreisigke, Girowesen im griech. Ägypt. 1910, 149ff. On the LXX s. Heitmüller 110f; JPsichari, Essai sur le Grec de la Septante 1908, 202f): εἰς (τὸ) ὄν. τινος to the name=to the account (over which the name stands). Then the deeds of love, although shown to humans, are dedicated to God.—The concept of dedication is also highly significant, in all probability, for the understanding of the expr. βαπτίζειν εἰς (τὸ) ὄν. τινος. Through baptism εἰς (τὸ) ὄν. τ. those who are baptized become the possession of and come under the dedicated protection of the one whose name they bear. An additional factor, to a degree, may be the sense of εἰς τὸ ὄν.=‘with mention of the name’ (cp. Herodian 2, 2, 10; 2, 13, 2 ὀμνύναι εἰς τὸ ὄν. τινος; Cyranides p. 57, 1 εἰς ὄν. τινος; 60, 18=εἰς τὸ ὄν. τ.; 62, 13. Another ex. in Heitmüller 107): Mt 28:19; Ac 8:16; 19:5; D 7:1, (3); 9:5; Hv 3, 7, 3; cp. 1 Cor 1:13, 15. S. βαπτίζω 2c and Silva New, Beginn. I/5, ’33, 121–40.—πιστεύειν εἰς τὸ ὄν. τινος believe in the name of someone i.e. have confidence that the person’s name (rather in the sense of a title, cp. Phil 2:9) is rightfully borne and encodes what the person really is J 1:12; 2:23; 3:18; 1J 5:13.
    ג. with ἐν: ἐν ὀνόματι of God or Jesus means in the great majority of cases with mention of the name, while naming or calling on the name (PsSol 11:8; JosAs 9:1; Just., D. 35, 2 al.; no corresponding use has been found in gener. Gk. lit.; but cp. ἐν ὀν. τοῦ μεγάλου καὶ ὑψίστου θεοῦ Hippol., Ref. 9, 15, 6.—Heitmüller p. 13ff, esp. 44; 49). In many pass. it seems to be a formula. ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ ἐκβάλλειν δαιμόνια Mk 9:38; 16:17; Lk 9:49. τὰ δαιμόνια ὑποτάσσεται ἡμῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. σου the demons are subject to us at the mention of your name 10:17. ποιεῖν τι ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ac 4:7; cp. Col 3:17. Perh. J 10:25 (but s. below). ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ … οὗτος παρέστηκεν ὑγιής Ac 4:10. ὄν. … ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς vs. 12. παραγγέλλω σοι ἐν ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. 16:18; cp. 2 Th 3:6; IPol 5:1. σοὶ λέγω ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου Ac 14:10 D. Peter, in performing a healing, says ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ Χρ. περιπάτει 3:6 (s. Heitmüller 60). The elders are to anoint the sick w. oil ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου while calling on the name of the Lord Js 5:14.—Of prophets λαλεῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. κυρίου 5:10. παρρησιάζεσθαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ speak out boldly in proclaiming the name of Jesus Ac 9:27f. βαπτίζεσθαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰ. Χ. be baptized or have oneself baptized while naming the name of Jesus Christ Ac 2:38 v.l.; 10:48. At a baptism ἐν ὀν. χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ AcPl Ha 3, 32. αἰτεῖν τὸν πατέρα ἐν τῷ ὀν. μου (=Ἰησοῦ) ask the Father, using my name J 15:16; cp. 14:13, 14; 16:24, 26. W. the latter pass. belongs vs. 23 (ὁ πατὴρ) δώσει ὑμῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. μου (the Father) will give you, when you mention my name. τὸ πνεῦμα ὸ̔ πέμψει ὁ πατὴρ ἐν τῷ ὀν. μου the Spirit, whom the Father will send when my name is used 14:26. To thank God ἐν ὀν. Ἰησοῦ Χρ. while naming the name of Jesus Christ Eph 5:20. ἵνα ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ πᾶν γόνυ κάμψῃ that when the name of Jesus is mentioned every knee should bow Phil 2:10. χαίρετε, υἱοί, ἐν ὀν. κυρίου greetings, my sons, as we call on the Lord’s name 1:1. ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀν. κυρίου whoever comes, naming the Lord’s name (in order thereby to give evidence of being a Christian) D 12:1. ἀσπάζεσθαι ἐν ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. greet, while naming the name of J. Chr. w. acc. of pers. or thing greeted IRo ins; ISm 12:2. Receive a congregation ἐν ὀν. θεοῦ IEph 1:3. συναχθῆναι ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου Ἰ. meet and call on the name of the Lord Jesus=as a Christian congregation 1 Cor 5:4. μόνον ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. only (it is to be) while calling on the name of J. Chr. ISm 4:2.—Not far removed fr. these are the places where we render ἐν τῷ ὀν. with through or by the name (s. ἐν 4c); the effect brought about by the name is caused by its utterance ἀπελούσασθε, ἡγιάσθητε, ἐδικαιώθητε ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου Ἰ. Χρ. 1 Cor 6:11. ζωὴν ἔχειν ἐν τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ (=Ἰησοῦ) J 20:31. τηρεῖν τινα ἐν τῷ ὀν. (θεοῦ) 17:11f.—ἐν τῷ ὀν. at the command (of), commissioned by ἔργα ποιεῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ πατρός J 10:25 (but s. above). ἔρχεσθαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ πατρός 5:43a; in contrast ἔρχ. ἐν τῷ ὀν. τῷ ἰδίῳ vs. 43b. εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀν. κυρίου 12:13 (Ps 117:26). The Ps-passage prob. has the same sense (despite Heitmüller 53f) in Mt 21:9; 23:39; Mk 11:9; Lk 13:35; 19:38.—OMerlier, Ὄνομα et ἐν ὀνόματι dans le quatr. Év.: RevÉtGr 47, ’34, 180–204; RBratcher, BT 14, ’63, 72–80.
    ד. w. ἕνεκα (and the other forms of this word; s. ἕνεκα 1): of persecutions for one’s Christian faith ἀπάγεσθαι ἐπὶ βασιλεῖς ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀν. μου Lk 21:12. πάσχειν or ὑποφέρειν εἵνεκα τοῦ ὀνόματος Hv 3, 1, 9; 3, 2, 1; Hs 9, 28, 5. ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀν. (τοῦ) κυρίου v 3, 5, 2; Hs 9, 28, 6. ἀφιέναι οἰκίας … ἕνεκεν τοῦ ἐμοῦ ὀν. for my name’s sake Mt 19:29. ἔκτισας τὰ πάντα ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀν. σου you created all things for your name’s sake, i.e. that God’s name might be praised for the benefits which the works of creation bring to humankind D 10:3.
    ה. w. ἐπί and the dat.: ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. τινος when someone’s name is mentioned or called upon, or mentioning someone’s name (LXX; En 10:2; Just., D. 39, 6; Ath. 23, 1; s. Heitmüller 19ff; 43ff; s. also 47ff; 52ff; 87ff) in the NT only of the name of Jesus, and only in the synoptics and Ac. ἐλεύσονται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου they will come using my name Mt 24:5; Mk 13:6; Lk 21:8. κηρύσσειν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ μετάνοιαν 24:47. λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. τούτῳ to speak using this name Ac 4:17; 5:40. διδάσκειν 4:18; 5:28. ποιεῖν δύναμιν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου Mk 9:39. ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. σου ἐκβάλλειν δαιμόνια Lk 9:49 v.l. ἐπὶ τῷ σῷ ὀν. τὰς θεραπείας ἐπετέλουν GJs 20:2 (codd.). Of the (spiritual) temple of God: οἰκοδομηθήσεται ναὸς θεοῦ ἐνδόξως ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. κυρίου the temple of God will be gloriously built with the use of the Lord’s name 16:6f, 8 (quot. of uncertain orig.). βαπτίζεσθαι ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. Ac 2:38. Baptism is also referred to in καλεῖσθαι ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ receive a name when the name of God’s son is named Hs 9, 17, 4. The words δέχεσθαι (παιδίον) ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου can also be classed here receive (a child) when my name is confessed, when I am called upon Mt 18:5; Mk 9:37; Lk 9:48 (s. Heitmüller 64); but s. also 3 below.—ἐπί w. acc.: πεποιθέναι ἐπὶ τὸ ὁσιώτατον τῆς μεγαλωσύνης αὐτοῦ ὄν. have confidence in (the Lord’s) most sacred and majestic name 1 Cl 58:1b; ἐλπίζειν ἐπὶ τὸ ὄν. hope in the name (of the Lord) 16:8b.
    ו. w. περί and the gen.: εὐαγγελίζεσθαι περὶ τοῦ ὀν. Ἰ. Χ. bring the good news about the name of J. Chr. Ac 8:12.—(W. acc.: ἔχομεν δέος τὸ ὄ. τοῦ θεοῦ Orig., C. Cels. 4, 48, 34).
    ז. w. πρός and acc.: πρὸς τὸ ὄν. Ἰησοῦ … πολλὰ ἐναντία πρᾶξαι do many things in opposing the name of Jesus Ac 26:9.
    ח. w. ὑπέρ and gen.: ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀν. (Ἰησοῦ) ἀτιμασθῆναι Ac 5:41. πάσχειν 9:16; Hs 9, 28, 2. Cp. Ac 15:26; 21:13. The activity of the apostles takes place ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀν. αὐτοῦ to the honor of (Jesus’) name Ro 1:5. Cp. 3J 7. Of thankful praying at the Lord’s Supper εὐχαριστοῦμεν σοι … ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἁγίου ὀν. σου, οὗ κατεσκήνωσας ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν we thank you … for your holy name, which you caused to dwell in our hearts D 10:2.
    δ. ὄν. w. ref. to God or Christ not infreq. stands quite alone, simply the Name: Ac 5:41; Phil 2:9 (cp. Diod S 3, 61, 6); 3J 7; 2 Cl 13:1, 4; IEph 3:1; 7:1; IPhld 10:1; Hv 3, 2, 1; Hs 8, 10, 3; 9, 13, 2; 9, 28, 3; 5.
    ② a person (Phalaris, Ep. 128; POxy 1188, 8 [13 A.D.]; BGU 113, 11; Jos., Ant. 14, 22; other exx. in Dssm., NB 24f [BS 196f]; LXX) τὸ ποθητόν μοι ὄν. my dear friend: Alce ISm 13:2; IPol 8:3; Crocus IRo 10:1. Pl. (PThéad 41, 10; PSI 27, 22; Num 1:18 al.) people Ac 1:15; Rv 3:4. ὀνόματα ἀνθρώπων 11:13 (cp. Ael. Aristid. 50, 72 K.=26 p. 523 D.: ὀνόματα δέκα ἀνδρῶν). This is prob. the place for περὶ λόγου καὶ ὀνομάτων καὶ νόμου about teaching and persons and (the) law Ac 18:15.
    ③ the classification under which one belongs, noted by a name or category, title, category (cp. Cass. Dio 38, 44; 42, 24 καὶ ὅτι πολλῷ πλείω ἔν τε τῷ σχήματι καὶ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τῷ τῆς στρατηγίας ὢν καταπράξειν ἤλπιζε=he hoped to effect much more by taking advantage of his praetorial apparel and title; ins: Sb 7541, 5 [II A.D.] Νύμφη ὄνομʼ ἐστί σοι; POxy 37 I, 17 [49 A.D.] βούλεται ὀνόματι ἐλευθέρου τὸ σωμάτιον ἀπενέγκασθαι=she claims to have carried off the infant on the basis of its being free-born; Jos., Ant. 12, 154 φερνῆς ὀνόματι; 11, 40; Just., A II, 6, 4 καὶ ἀνθρώπου καὶ σωτῆρος ὄνομα. Other exx. in Heitmüller 50); the possibility of understanding ὄν. as category made it easier for Greeks to take over rabb. לְשֵׁם (s. 1dγב above) in the sense with regard to a particular characteristic, then simply with regard to, for the sake of ὁ δεχόμενος προφήτην εἰς ὄν. προφήτου whoever receives a prophet within the category ‘prophet’, i.e. because he is a prophet, as a prophet Mt 10:41a; cp. vss. 41b, 42.—ὸ̔ς ἂν ποτίσῃ ὑμᾶς ἐν ὀνόματι, ὄτι Χριστοῦ ἐστε whoever gives you a drink under the category that you belong to Christ, i.e. in your capacity as a follower of Christ Mk 9:41. εἰ ὀνειδίζεσθε ἐν ὀν. Χριστοῦ if you are reviled for the sake of Christ 1 Pt 4:14. δοξαζέτω τὸν θεὸν ἐν τῷ ὀν. τούτῳ let the person praise God in this capacity (=ὡς Χριστιανός) vs. 16. δέδεμαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. I am imprisoned for the sake of the Name IEph 3:1.—δέχεσθαι (παιδίον) ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου for my (name’s) sake Mt 18:5; Mk 9:37; Lk 9:48 (cp. Heitmüller 113. But s. 1dγה above).
    ④ recognition accorded a person on the basis of performance, (well-known) name, reputation, fame (Hom. et al.; 1 Ch 14:17; 1 Macc 8:12) φανερὸν ἐγένετο τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ his fame was widespread Mk 6:14. ὄν. ἔχειν (Pla., Apol. 38c, Ep. 2, 312c) w. ὅτι foll. have the reputation of Rv 3:1 perh. also 3:5 (s. 1bα; JFuller, JETS 26, ’83, 297–306).
    ⑤ name in terms of office held, office (POxy 58, 6) στασιαζουσῶν τ. φυλῶν, ὁποία αὐτῶν εἴη τῷ ἐνδόξῳ ὀνόματι κεκοσμημένη when the tribes were quarreling as to which one of them was to be adorned with that glorious office 1 Cl 43:2. τὸ ὄν. τῆς ἐπισκοπῆς the office of supervision 44:1.—B. 1263f. OEANE IV 91–96 on Mesopotamian practices. Schmidt, Syn. I 113–24. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὄνομα

  • 23 ζάω

    ζάω contr. ζῶ (Hom.+) impf. ἔζων (Ro 7:9 B ἔζην; on this form s. Schwyzer I 675; B-D-F §88; Mlt-H. 194, both w. ref.); fut. ζήσω (uniformly attested Ro 6:2; Hb 12:9); the later (since Hippocr. VII p. 536 L.; LXX; AscIs 3:9; Jos., Ant. 1, 193 al.) form ζήσομαι (B-D-F §77; Rob. 356) is more common (on the fut. forms s. JLee, NovT 22, ’80, 289–98; GKilpatrick, ibid. 25, ’83, 146–51); 1 aor. ἔζησα. On the LXX usage s. Thackeray 269; for forms in pap, Gignac II 370.
    ① to be alive physically, live
    ⓐ of physical life in contrast to death
    α. gener. Ac 22:22; Ro 7:1, 2, 3; 14:8ac; 1 Cor 7:39; 2 Cor 5:15a; 6:9; Hb 9:17. ψυχὴ ζῶσα a living soul (Gen 1:20 al.; Just., D. 6, 1 ζῇ ψυχῇ) 1 Cor 15:45 (Gen 2:7); Rv 16:3 v.l. ὅσα ἔτη ζῇ as many years as he lives B 10:6 (cp. SIG 663, 6; Sb 173, 6 Αὐρήλιος ζήσας ἔτη νε´; En 10:10). τὸ ζῆν life (Attic wr., ins, pap, LXX) ὥστε ἐξαπορηθῆναι ἡμᾶς καὶ τοῦ ζῆν so that we even despaired of life 2 Cor 1:8. διὰ παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν during the whole lifetime Hb 2:15 (cp. Diod S 1, 74, 3 διατελεῖν πάντα τὸν τοῦ ζῆν χρόνον; 4, 46, 4). ἔτι ζῶν while he was still living= before his death Mt 27:63 (CB I/2 660 no. 618 Ζώσιμος ἔτι ζῶν κατεσκεύασεν; 3 Km 12:6). ζῶντες ἐβλήθησαν … εἰς τὴν λίμνην τοῦ πυρός they were thrown alive into the lake of fire Rv 19:20. ζῶσα τέθνηκεν though alive she is dead 1 Ti 5:6 (cp. Sextus 7). ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες we during our (earthly) life 2 Cor 4:11; the same phrase= we who are still living 1 Th 4:15, 17. Here the opp. is νεκροί, as in Mt 22:32; Mk 12:27; Lk 20:38a. ζῶντες καὶ νεκροί the living and the dead Ac 10:42; Ro 14:9b; 2 Ti 4:1; 1 Pt 4:5; 2 Cl 1:1; B 7:2.—Occasionally the contrast betw. νεκρός and ζῆν is used fig. with ref. to the realm of religion and ethics Lk 15:24 v.l., 32.
    β. of dead persons who return to life become alive again: of humans in general (3 Km 17:23) Mt 9:18; Ac 9:41; 20:12; Rv 20:4, 5; AcPl Ha 11, 7. Of Jesus Mk 16:11; Lk 24:5, 23; Ac 1:3; 25:19; Ro 14:9a; 2 Cor 13:4a; Rv 1:18b; 2:8 (Just., D. 69, 6 νεκροὺς … ζῆν ποιήσας).
    γ. of sick persons, if their illness terminates not in death but in recovery be well, recover (Artem. 4, 4 ἔζησεν ὁ παῖς=became well; 5, 71; 72; PGM 1, 188; 4 Km 1:2; 8:8 εἰ ζήσομαι ἐκ τῆς ἀρρωστίας μου ταύτης; Jos., Vi. 421) Mk 5:23; J 4:50, 51, 53.—Of removal of anxiety 1 Th 3:8.
    δ. also of healthy persons live on, remain alive (X., An. 3, 2, 39 ὅστις δὲ ζῆν ἐπιθυμεῖ πειράσθω νικᾶν; Ep. 56 of Apollonius of Tyana [Philostrat. I 359, 14]; ApcMos 31 διὰ τί σὺ ἀποθνῄσκεις καγὼ ζῶ;) Ac 25:24; 28:4. ἐὰν ὁ κύριος θελήσῃ ζήσομεν Js 4:15. ὸ̓ς ἔχει τὴν πληγὴν τῆς μαχαίρης καὶ ἔζησεν Rv 13:14.
    ε. of beings that in reality, or as they are portrayed, are not subject to death: of Melchizedek Hb 7:8 (opp. ἀποθνῄσκοντες ἄνθρωποι). Jesus as everlasting high priest πάντοτε ζῶν 7:25.—In this sense it is most comprehensively applied to God (s. CBurchard, Untersuch. zu JosAs p. 103) (ὁ) θεὸς (ὁ) ζῶν (cp. 4 Km 19:4, 16; Is 37:4, 17; Hos 2:1; Da 6:21 Theod.; 3 Macc 6:28; TestAbr A 17 p. 99, 10 [Stone p. 46]; TestJob 37:2; JosAs 49:3 al.; SibOr 3, 763; POxy 924, 11 [IV A.D., Gnostic]; PGM 4, 1038 ὁ μέγας ζῶν θεός; 7, 823; 12, 79; Philo, Decal. 67 ὁ ζῶν ἀεὶ θεός; Orig., C. Cels. 8, 59, 18.—The phrase ‘the living God’ is not found in Joseph.) Mt 16:16; 26:63; J 6:69 v.l.; Ac 14:15; Ro 9:26 (Hos 2:1); 2 Cor 3:3; 6:16; 1 Th 1:9; 1 Ti 3:15; 4:10; 6:17 v.l.; Hb 3:12; 9:14; 10:31; 12:22; Rv 1:18a; 4:10; 7:2; 10:6; 2 Cl 20:2; GJs 20:1; AcPl Ha 2, 32; also ὁ ζῶν πατήρ J 6:57. W. the addition εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων Rv 15:7; cp. 4:9 (cp. Tob 13:2; Sir 18:1). God takes a sovereign oath in the words ζῶ ἐγώ as surely as I live (Num 14:28 al.) Ro 14:11 (Is 49:18; classical parallels GStählin, NovT 5, ’62, 142 n. 2). ζῇ κύριος ὁ θεός [μου] as surely as the Lord my God lives GJs 4:1; 6:1; 13:3; 15:3; 19:3 (Judg 8:19; 1 Km 25:34 al; GrBar 1:7; cp. ApcEsdr 2:7); in expanded form καὶ ζῇ ὁ Χριστὸς αὐτοῦ 15:4 (s. deStrycker ad loc.).—Christ lives διὰ τὸν πατέρα because of the Father J 6:57b (s. Bultmann, comm. ad loc.).
    ⓑ w. mention of that upon which life depends ἐπί τινι on the basis of someth. (Andoc. 1, 100; Isocr. 10, 18; Ael. Aristid. 28, 103 K.=49 p. 525 D.) ζ. ἐπʼ ἄρτῳ live on bread Mt 4:4; Lk 4:4 (both Dt 8:3). ζ. ἔκ τινος obtain one’s living fr. someth. (Aristoph., Eccl. 591; Demosth. 57, 36; POxy 1117, 19; 1557, 12; TestJob 47:1f) 1 Cor 9:14.
    ⓒ w. more precise mention of the sphere (Artem. 3, 62 ἐν ἀγορᾷ ζ.=spend his life in the marketplace) ζ. ἐν σαρκί live in the flesh in contrast to the heavenly life Phil 1:22; Gal 2:20c; ζ. ἐν κόσμῳ live in the world Col 2:20. ζ. ἐν θεῷ, live in God (as the Being who penetrates and embraces everything) Ac 17:28 (s. κινέω 3). For AcPl Ha 1, 15 s. 2a end.
    ② to live in a transcendent sense, live, of the sanctified life of a child of God (ζῆν in the sense of a higher type of life than the animal: X., Mem. 3, 3, 11; Cass. Dio 69, 19: after years of public service, Similis retires and prepares this epitaph: Σίμιλις ἐνταύθα κεῖται βιοὺς μὲν ἔτη τόσα, ζήσας δὲ ἔτη ἑπτά=Here lies Similis, existing for so many years, but alive for only seven.).
    ⓐ in the world ἐγὼ ἔζων χωρὶς νόμου ποτέ I was once (truly) alive without law (this has been interpr. to mean when no law existed; Paul is then regarded as speaking fr. the viewpoint of humanity in paradise before the command Gen 2:16 f; 3:3. Another interpr. thinks of Paul as referring to the period in his life when he was not conscious of the existence and significance of the law. In view of Paul’s climactic affirmation in Ro 7:25, Paul probably illustrates in the first person the perils of a Christian who succumbs to the illusion that moral action is connected with law rather than with the ‘spirit of life in Christ’ Ro 8:2) Ro 7:9. Even now those who listen to the voice of the Son of God enjoy this life J 5:25; cp. 11:26; likew. those who receive him into their being ὁ τρώγων τὸν ἄρτον 6:57c; cp. Ro 6:11, 13 (ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας); Gal 2:19; Rv 3:1. This heavenly life on earth is a ζ. πνεύματι Gal 5:25 or a life not of mere human achievement, but of Christ who lives in Christians 2:20ab. Also of the superhuman power of the apostle ζήσομεν σὺν αὐτῷ ἐκ δυνάμεως θεοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς we shall live with him (Christ) through God’s power in our dealings with you 2 Cor 13:4. ὁ κύριος βούλεται ζῆν ἡμᾶς ἐν θεῷ=the Lord wills that we live under God’s direction AcPl Ha 1, 15 (opp. ἀποθανεῖν ἐν ἁμαρτίαις; s. 1c end)
    ⓑ in the glory of the life to come (Sir 48:11; cp. Dt 4:1; 8:1; 30:16).
    α. abs. Lk 10:28; J 11:25; 14:19; Ro 8:13b; Hb 12:9. ἐμοὶ τ. ζῆν Χριστός= life is possible for me only where Christ is (hence death is gain) Phil 1:21 (s. OSchmitz, GHeinrici Festschr. 1914, 155–69). Another common interpr. is for me to live is Christ, i.e. while I am alive I experience real life in connection with Christ; w. death comes life in all fullness in the presence of Jesus.
    β. More specifically εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα have eternal life (Ps.-Lucian, Philopatr. 17 ζῆν εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα; PsSol 14:2) J 6:51, 58 (in J the blessed life which the follower of Jesus enjoys here and now in the body is simply continued in the heavenly life of the future. In other respects also the dividing line betw. the present and the future life is somet. nonexistent or at least not discernible); B 6:3; 8:5; 9:2; 11:10f; ἅμα σὺν αὐτῷ (i.e. Χριστῷ) ζ. live together with Christ 1 Th 5:10; ζ. διʼ αὐτοῦ (i.e. Chr.) 1J 4:9; ζ. κατὰ θεὸν πνεύματι live, as God (lives), in the Spirit 1 Pt 4:6. ὁ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται (cp. Hab 2:4) he that is just through faith will have life Ro 1:17 (AFeuillet, NTS 6, ’59, 52–80; but s. Fitzmyer, Ro [AB] ad loc.); Gal 3:11; Hb 10:38. This life is τὸ ἀληθινὸν ζῆν ITr 9:2; IEph 11:1. Christ is called τὸ ἀδιάκριτον ἡμῶν ζῆν our unshakable or inseparable life 3:2. τὸ διὰ παντὸς ἡμῶν ζῆν our total life 1 Mg 1:2—The law-directed pers. believes concerning legal performance: ὁ ποιήσας αὐτὰ ζήσεται ἐν αὐτοῖς (Lev 18:5) Gal 3:12; cp. Ro 10:5 (cp. Dio Chrys. 58 [75], 1 οἱ τοῦτον [= τ. νόμον] φυλάττοντες ἔχονται τῆς σωτηρίας=those who observe law have a firm grip on security).
    ③ to conduct oneself in a pattern of behavior, live (Hom. et al.)
    ⓐ used w. adverbs or other modifiers: adv. (Sallust. 19 p. 34, 25 κακῶς ζῆν [Just., A I, 4, 7]; SIG 889, 13ff; Wsd 14:28; Philo; Jos., Ant. 12, 198; Ath. 3, 1 δίκην θηρίων) ἀσώτως Lk 15:13. ἐθνικῶς and ἰουδαϊκῶς Gal 2:14. εὐσεβῶς 2 Ti 3:12. πανούργως Hm 3, 3. σωφρόνως κ. δικαίως κ. εὐσεβῶς Tit 2:12 (Plut., Mor. 1108c ζῆν σωφρόνως κ. δικαίως; cp. Diog. L. 10, 132; 140; Ar. 15, 10).—Φαρισαῖος live as a Pharisee Ac 26:5. ἐν πίστει Gal 2:20d. ἐν ἁμαρτίᾳ Ro 6:2; ζ. ἐν τούτοις live in these (sins) Col 3:7. κατὰ ἀλήθειαν in keeping w. the truth IEph 6:2 (cp. Philo, Post. Cai. 73 κατὰ βούλημα τὸ τοῦ θεοῦ ζ.; Jos., Ant. 4, 302 κατὰ τ. νόμους ζ.; Just., D. 47, 4 κατὰ τὸν νόμον; Orig., C. Cels. 7, 12, 7 κατὰ τὰς θείας γραφάς). κατὰ θεόν 8:1 (cp. SIG 910 A and B). κατὰ Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν IPhld 3:2. κατὰ Χριστιανισμόν live in accordance w. (our) commitment to Christ IMg 10:1. κατὰ σάρκα Ro 8:12f; Dg 5:8; κατὰ κυριακὴν ζ. (opp. σαββατίζειν) include the observance of the Lord’s day in one’s life IMg 9:1. Of a married woman ζ. μετὰ ἀνδρός live w. her husband Lk 2:36 (for the added acc. of extent of time cp. Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 332 D.; Pr 28:16; ἥτις ἔζησεν καλῶς μετʼ ἐμοῦ ἔτη 28, μῆνας 4, ἡμέρας 5: SEG II, 384, 6–8 [restored]; s. also FDanker, Jesus and the New Age ’88, 71).
    ⓑ τινί live for someone or someth., for the other’s benefit (Hom. et al.; Demosth. 7, 17 οἳ οὐκ αἰσχύνονται Φιλίππῳ ζῶντες καὶ οὐ τῇ ἑαυτῶν πατρίδι; Dionys. Hal. 3, 17 … παῖδες, τῷ πατρὶ ζῶντες) ζ. τῷ θεῷ (4 Macc 7:19; 16:25; Philo, Mut. Nom. 13, Rer. Div. Her. 111; s. SAalen, NTS 13, ’67, 10) Lk 20:38b (cp. Soph., Ajax 970); Ro 6:10, 11; Gal 2:19; Hm 3:5; AcPl Ha 10, 7; τῷ κυρίῳ Ro 14:8b (cp. Plut., Cleom. 819 [31, 5]). For Christ 2 Cor 5:15; τῷ ἐμῷ βασιλεῖ AcPl Ha 9, 26 (restored after Aa I 112, 14) τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ ζ. 1 Pt 2:24; ἑαυτῷ ζ. live for oneself (Menand., Fgm. 646 Kö. οὐχ ἑαυτῷ ζῆν μόνον; Diod S 10, 33, 2 ζ. ἑαυτοῖς=live for themselves) Ro 14:7.
    ④ to be full of vitality, be lively the ptc. is used fig. w. respect to things (cp. τῶν δένδρων τῶν ζῶντων ParJer 9:3), of spring water in contrast w. cistern water ὕδωρ ζῶν (Gen 26:19; Lev 14:5; Jer 2:13 v.l.; Zech 14:8.—Stagnant water is called ὕ. νεκρόν: Synes., Ep. 114, 254d) J 4:10f (Hdb. exc. on J 4:14); 7:38; D 7:1f (Wengst p. 77 n. 57). ζώσας πηγάς Rv 7:17 v.l.
    ⑤ to be life-productive, offer life ptc. used w. respect to things (SIG 1173 [138 A.D.], 5 ζῶσαι ἀρεταὶ ἐγένοντο=miracles full of divine life occurred) λόγια ζῶντα words that meant life Ac 7:38. λόγος ζῶν θεοῦ 1 Pt 1:23; cp. Hb 4:12. ὁδὸς ζῶσα a living way 10:20. ἐλπὶς ζῶσα a living hope 1 Pt 1:3.—ζ. is also used of things which serve as descriptions of pers. who communicate divine life: of Christ ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ζῶν J 6:51a. λίθος ζῶν 1 Pt 2:4. Of Christians: θυσία ζῶσα a living sacrifice Ro 12:1. λίθοι ζῶντες 1 Pt 2:5.—τὰ παρὰ ζώσης φωνῆς καὶ μενούσης the (words) of a living and abiding voice Papias (2:4) (opp. ἐκ τῶν βιβλίων).—Lit. s. ζωή end. DELG s.v. ζώω.M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ζάω

  • 24 ἔχω

    ἔχω (Hom.+) impf. εἶχον, 1 pl. εἴχαμεν and 3 pl. εἶχαν (both as vv.ll.; Mlt-H. 194; B-D-F §82) Mk 8:7; Rv 9:8 or εἴχοσαν (B-D-F §84, 2; Mlt-H. 194; Kühner-Bl. II p. 55) J 15:22, 24; 2 aor. ἔσχον; mixed aor. forms include ἔσχαν Hv 3, 5, 1, ἔσχοσαν 1 Esdr 6:5; 1 Macc 10:15 (ἔσχον, εἴχον vv.ll.); pf. ἔσχηκα; plpf. ἐσχήκειν.—In the following divisions: act. trans. 1–9; act. intr. 10; mid. 11.
    ① to possess or contain, have, own (Hom.+)
    ⓐ to possess someth. that is under one’s control
    α. own, possess (s. esp. TestJob 9f) κτήματα πολλά own much property Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22. πρόβατα Lk 15:4; J 10:16. θησαυρόν Mt 19:21; Mk 10:21b. βίον living Lk 21:4; 1J 3:17. δραχμὰς δέκα Lk 15:8. πλοῖα Rv 18:19. κληρονομίαν Eph 5:5. θυσιαστήριον Hb 13:10a; μέρος ἔ. ἔν τινι have a share in someth. Rv 20:6. Gener. μηδὲν ἔ. own nothing (SibOr 3, 244) 2 Cor 6:10. ὅσα ἔχεις Mk 10:21; cp. 12:44; Mt 13:44, 46; 18:25. τί ἔχεις ὸ̔ οὐκ ἔλαβες; what do you have that you have not been given? 1 Cor 4:7. The obj. acc. is often used w. an adj. or ptc.: ἔ. ἅπαντα κοινά have everything in common Ac 2:44 (cp. Jos., Ant. 15, 18). ἔ. πολλὰ ἀγαθὰ κείμενα have many good things stored up Lk 12:19.—Hb 12:1. Abs. ἔ. have (anything) (Soph.et al.; Sir 13:5; 14:11) Mt 13:12a; Mk 4:25a; Lk 8:18a. ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν in accordance w. what you have 2 Cor 8:11. ἔ. εἰς ἀπαρτισμόν have (enough) to complete Lk 14:28. W. neg. ἔ. have nothing Mt 13:12b; Mk 4:25b; Lk 8:18b.—ὁ ἔχων the one who has, who is well off (Soph., Aj. 157; Eur., Alc. 57; X., An. 7, 3, 28; Ar. 15:7). πᾶς ὁ ἔχων everyone who has (anything) Mt 25:29a; Lk 19:26a. ὁ μὴ ἔχων the one who has nothing (X., An. 7, 3, 28; 1 Esdr 9:51, 54; 2 Esdr 18:10) Mt 25:29b; Lk 19:26b; 1 Cor 11:22.
    β. have = hold in one’s charge or keeping ἔ. τὰς κλεῖς hold the keys Rv 1:18; cp. 3:7. τὸ γλωσσόκομον the money-box J 12:6; 13:29.
    ⓑ to contain someth. have, possess, of the whole in relation to its parts
    α. of living beings, of parts of the body in men and animals μέλη Ro 12:4a; cp. 1 Cor 12:12. σάρκα καὶ ὀστέα Lk 24:39 (Just., A I, 66, 2 καὶ σάρκα καὶ αἷμα) ἀκροβυστίαν Ac 11:3. οὖς Rv 2:7, 11. ὦτα Mt 11:15; Mk 7:16; Lk 8:8. χεῖρας, πόδας, ὀφθαλμούς Mt 18:8f; Mk 9:43, 45, 47. Of animals and animal-like beings ἔ. πρόσωπον Rv 4:7. πτέρυγας vs. 8. κέρατα 5:6. ψυχάς 8:9. τρίχας 9:8. κεφαλάς 12:3 (TestAbr B 14 p. 118, 19 [Stone p. 84]) al. ἔχοντες ὑγιῆ τὴν σάρκα AcPlCor 2:32 (Just., D. 48, 3 σάρκα ἔχων). Of plants (TestAbr B 3 p. 107, 6 [Stone p. 62] εὗρον δένδρον … ἔχον κλάδους) ῥίζαν ἔ. Mt 13:6; Mk 4:6.
    β. of inanimate things: of cities τ. θεμελίους ἔ. Hb 11:10; cp. Rv 21:14. Of a head-covering χαρακτῆρα ἔχει βασιλικόν has a royal emblem GJs 2:2.
    ⓒ to have at hand, have at one’s disposal have ἄρτους Mt 14:17; cp. 15:34; J 21:5, where the sense is prob. ‘Did you catch any fish for breakfast?’. οὐκ ἔχω ὸ̔ παραθήσω αὐτῷ I have nothing to set before him Lk 11:6. μὴ ἐχόντων τί φάγωσι since they had nothing to eat Mk 8:1; cp. Mt 15:32 (Soph., Oed. Col. 316 οὐκ ἔχω τί φῶ). οὐκ ἔχω ποῦ συνάξω I have no place to store Lk 12:17. ἄντλημα a bucket J 4:11a. οἰκίας ἔ. have houses (at one’s disposal) 1 Cor 11:22. Of pers.: have (at one’s disposal) (PAmh 92, 18 οὐχ ἕξω κοινωνόν and oft. in pap) Moses and the prophets Lk 16:29. παράκλητον an advocate, a helper 1J 2:1. οὐδένα ἔ. ἰσόψυχον Phil 2:20. ἄνθρωπον οὐκ ἔ. J 5:7.
    ⓓ to have within oneself have σύλλημα ἔχει ἐκ πνεύματος ἁγίου she has something conceived through the Holy Spirit GJs 18:1. Var. constr. w. ἐν: of women ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ. be pregnant (γαστήρ 2) Mt 1:18, 23 (Is 7:14); 24:19; Mk 13:17; Lk 21:23; 1 Th 5:3; Rv 12:2. ἔ. τινὰ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ have someone in one’s heart Phil 1:7 (Ovid, Metam. 2, 641 aliquem clausum pectore habere). ἔ. τι ἐν ἑαυτῷ (Jos., Ant. 8, 171; cp. TestAbr A 3 p. 80, 14 [Stone p. 8] ἔκρυψεν τὸ μυστήριον, μόνος ἔχων ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ): ζωήν J 5:26. τὴν μαρτυρίαν 1J 5:10; τὸ ἀπόκριμα τοῦ θανάτου have a sentence of death within oneself 2 Cor 1:9.
    ⓔ to have with oneself or in one’s company have μεθʼ ἑαυτοῦ (X., Cyr. 1, 4, 17) τινά someone Mt 15:30; 26:11; Mk 2:19; 14:7; J 12:8; AcPl Ha 8, 35; σὺν αὐτῷ 4:18.—The ptc. w. acc. = with (Diod S 12, 78, 1 ἔχων δύναμιν with a [military] force; 18, 61, 1 ὁ θρόνος ἔχων τὸ διάδημα the throne with the diadem; JosAs 27:8 ἔχοντες ἐσπασμένας τὰς ῥομφαίας ‘with their swords drawn’) ἀνέβησαν ἔχοντες αὐτόν they went up with him Lk 2:42 D.
    ② to stand in a close relationship to someone, have, have as
    ⓐ of relatives πατέρα ἔ. J 8:41. ἀδελφούς Lk 16:28. ἄνδρα (Aristot., Cat. 15b, 27f λεγόμεθα δὲ καὶ γυναῖκα ἔχειν καὶ ἡ γυνὴ ἄνδρα; Tob 3:8 BA) be married (of the woman) J 4:17f; 1 Cor 7:2b, 13; Gal 4:27 (Is 54:1). γυναῖκα of the man (cp. Lucian, Tox. 45; SIG 1160 γυναικὸς Αἴ., τῆς νῦν ἔχει; PGM 13, 320; 1 Esdr 9:12, 18; Just., D. 141, 4 πολλὰς ἔσχον γυναίκας. As early as Od. 11, 603 Heracles ἔχει Ἥβην) 1 Cor 7:2a, 12, 29 (for the wordplay cp. Heliod. 1, 18, 4 in connection w. the handing over of a virgin: σὺ ἔχων οὐκ ἕξεις; Crates, 7th Ep. [p. 58, 8 Malherbe] πάντʼ ἔχοντες οὐδὲν ἔχετε). τέκνα Mt 21:28; 22:24; 1 Ti 3:4; 5:4; Tit 1:6. υἱούς (Artem. 5, 42 τὶς τρεῖς ἔχων υἱούς; cp. θυγατέρα TestAbr B 10 p. 114, 17 [Stone p.76]) Lk 15:11; Gal 4:22. σπέρμα have children Mt 22:25. W. acc. as obj. and in predicate (Ar. 8, 4 τούτους συνηγόρους ἔχοντες τῆς κακίας; 11, 3 ἔσχε μοιχὸν τὸν Ἄρην; Ath. 7, 2 ἔχομεν προφήτας μάρτυρας) ἔ. τινὰ πατέρα have someone as father Mt 3:9. ἔ. τινὰ γυναῖκα (w. γυναῖκα to be understood fr. the context) 14:4; cp. Mk 6:18; ὥστε γυναῖκά τινα τοῦ πατρὸς ἔ. that someone has taken his father’s wife (as his own wife: the simple ἔχειν in this sense as Plut., Cato Min. 21, 3; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 10 §34; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 147. Perh. an illicit relationship is meant, as Longus 4, 17; Hesychius Miles. [VI A.D.], Viri Ill. 4 JFlach [1880] ἔχω Λαί̈δα) 1 Cor 5:1 (Diod S 20, 33, 5 of a man who had illicit relations with his stepmother: ἔχειν λάθρᾳ τοῦ πατρὸς τὴν Ἀλκίαν).
    ⓑ more gener. φίλον have a friend Lk 11:5. ἀσθενοῦντας have sick people Lk 4:40 and χήρας widows 1 Ti 5:16 to care for; παιδαγωγοὺς ἔ. 1 Cor 4:15. δοῦλον Lk 17:7. οἰκονόμον 16:1; κύριον ἔ. have a master, i.e. be under a master’s control Col 4:1; δεσπότην ἔ. 1 Ti 6:2; βασιλέα J 19:15. ἀρχιερέα Hb 4:14; 8:1. ποιμένα Mt 9:36. ἔχων ὑπʼ ἐμαυτὸν στρατιώτας I have soldiers under me Lk 7:8. W. direct obj. and predicate acc. ἔ. τινὰ ὑπηρέτην have someone as an assistant Ac 13:5 (Just., A I, 14, 1) ἔ. τινὰ τύπον have someone as an example Phil 3:17.—Of the relation of Christians to God and to Jesus ἔ. θεόν, τὸν πατέρα, τὸν υἱόν have God, the Father, the Son, i.e. be in communion w. them 1J 2:23; 2J 9; AcPl Ha 4, 7.—HHanse, at end of this entry.
    ③ to take a hold on someth., have, hold (to), grip
    ⓐ of holding someth. in one’s hand ἔ. τι ἐν τῇ χειρί have someth. in one’s hand (since Il. 18, 505) Rv 1:16; 6:5; 10:2; 17:4. Of holding in the hand without ἐν τῇ χειρί (Josh 6:8; JosAs 5:7) ἔ. κιθάραν 5:8. λιβανωτὸν χρυσοῦν 8:3, cp. vs. 6; 14:17 and s. ἀλάβαστρον Mt 26:7 and Mk 14:3.
    ⓑ of keeping someth. safe, a mina (a laborer’s wages for about three months) in a handkerchief keep safe Lk 19:20.
    ⓒ of holding fast to matters of transcendent importance, fig. τὴν μαρτυρίαν Rv 6:9; 12:17; 19:10; the secret of Christian piety 1 Ti 3:9; an example of sound teaching 2 Ti 1:13; keep (Diod S 17, 93, 1 τὴν βασιλείαν ἔχειν=keep control) Mk 6:18.
    ⓓ of states of being hold, hold in its grip, seize (Hom. et al.; PGiss 65a, 4 παρακαλῶ σε κύριέ μου, εἰδότα τὴν ἔχουσάν με συμφορὰν ἀπολῦσαί μοι; Job 21:6; Is 13:8; Jos., Ant. 3, 95 δέος εἶχε τοὺς Ἑβρ.; 5, 63; Just., D. 19, 3) εἶχεν αὐτὰς τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις trembling and amazement had seized them Mk 16:8.
    ④ to carry/bear as accessory or part of a whole, have on, wear, of clothing, weapons, etc. (Hom. et al.; LXX; TestAbr B p. 114, 22 [Stone p. 76]) τὸ ἔνδυμα Mt 3:4; 22:12 (cp. ἔνδυσιν TestJob 25:7). κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων w. τὶ to be supplied while he wears (a covering) on his head 1 Cor 11:4. ἔ. θώρακας Rv 9:9, 17. ἔ. μάχαιραν wear a sword (Jos., Ant. 6, 190) J 18:10. Sim. of trees ἔ. φύλλα have leaves Mk 11:13 (ApcSed. 8:8).
    ⑤ be in a position to do someth., can, be able, ἔ. w. inf. foll. (Hom. et al.; cp. Eur., Hec. 761; Hdt. 1, 49; Pla., Phd. p. 76d; Demosth., Ep. 2, 22; Theocr. 10, 37 τὸν τρόπον οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν=I cannot specify the manner; Lucian, Dial. Mort. 21, 2, Hermot. 55; Epict. 1, 9, 32; 2, 2, 24 al.; Ael. Aristid. 51, 50 K.=27 p. 546 D.: οὐκ ἔχω λέγειν; PPetr II, 12, 1, 16; PAmh 131, 15; Pr 3:27; ApcEsdr 2:24; 3:7; 6:5; TestAbr A 8, p. 86, 13 [Stone p. 20]; Jos., Ant. 1, 338; 2, 58; Just., A I, 19, 5, D. 4, 6 οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν) ἔ. ἀποδοῦναι be able to pay Mt 18:25a; Lk 7:42; 14:14. μὴ ἔ. περισσότερον τι ποιῆσαι be in a position to do nothing more 12:4. οὐδὲν ἔ. ἀντειπεῖν be able to make a reply Ac 4:14; cp. Tit 2:8. ἔ. κατηγορεῖν αὐτοῦ J 8:6 (cp. 9a below, end). ἀσφαλές τι γράψαι οὐκ ἔχω I have nothing definite to write Ac 25:26a; cp. 26b. ἔ. μεταδιδόναι Eph 4:28a. ἔ. τὴν τούτων μνήμην ποιεῖσθαι be able to recall these things to mind 2 Pt 1:15. κατʼ οὐδενὸς εἶχεν μείζονος ὀμόσαι he could swear by no one greater Hb 6:13. In the same sense without the actual addition of the inf., which is automatically supplied fr. context (X., An. 2, 1, 9) ὸ̔ ἔσχεν (i.e. ποιῆσαι) ἐποίησεν she has done what she could Mk 14:8.
    ⑥ to have an opinion about someth., consider, look upon, view w. acc. as obj. and predicate acc. (POxy 292, 6 [c. 25 A.D.] ἔχειν αὐτὸν συνεσταμένον=look upon him as recommended; 787 [16 A.D.]; PGiss 71, 4; Job 30:9; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 16, 19; Ath. 32, 3 τοὺς μὲν υἱοὺς … νοοῦμεν, τοὺς δὲ ἀδελφούς ἔχομεν) ἔχε με παρῃτημένον consider me excused (= don’t expect me to come) Lk 14:18b, 19 (cp. Martial 2, 79 excusatum habeas me). τινὰ ἔντιμον ἔ. hold someone in honor Phil 2:29. ἔ. τινὰ ὡς προφήτην consider someone a prophet Mt 14:5; 21:26, 46 v.l. (cp. GNicod 5 [=Acta Pilati B 5 p. 297 Tdf.] ἔχειν [Jannes and Jambres] ὡς θεούς; Just., D. 47, 5 τὸν μετανοοῦντα … ὡς δίκαιον καὶ ἀναμάρτητον ἔχει). ἔ. τινὰ εἰς προφήτην consider someone a prophet Mt 21:46 (cp. Duris [III B.C.]: 76 Fgm. 21 Jac. ὸ̔ν εἰς θεοὺς ἔχουσιν). εἶχον τ. Ἰωάννην ὄντως ὅτι προφήτης ἦν they thought that John was really a prophet Mk 11:32.
    ⑦ to experience someth., have (freq. in auxiliary capacity CTurner, JTS 28, 1927, 357–60)
    ⓐ of all conditions of body and soul (Hom. et al.; LXX)
    α. of illness, et al. (ApcMos 6 νόσον καὶ πόνον ἔχω; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 305) ἀσθενείας have sicknesses/diseases Ac 28:9. μάστιγας physical troubles Mk 3:10. πληγὴν τῆς μαχαίρης Rv 13:14. θλῖψιν J 16:33b; 1 Cor 7:28; Rv 2:10. Esp. of possession by hostile spirits: δαιμόνιον ἔ. be possessed by an evil spirit Mt 11:18; Lk 7:33; 8:27; J 7:20; 8:48f, 52; 10:20. Βεελζεβούλ Mk 3:22. πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον vs. 30; 7:25; Ac 8:7. πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου Lk 4:33. πνεῦμα πονηρόν Ac 19:13. πνεῦμα ἄλαλον Mk 9:17. πνεῦμα ἀσθενείας spirit of sickness Lk 13:11. τὸν λεγιῶνα (the evil spirit called) Legion Mk 5:15.
    β. gener. of conditions, characteristics, capabilities, emotions, inner possession: ἀγάπην ἔ. have love (cp. Diod S 3, 58, 3 φιλίαν ἔχειν; Just., D. 93, 4 φιλίαν ἢ ἀγάπην ἔχοντε) J 5:42; 13:35; 15:13; 1J 4:16; 1 Cor 13:1ff; 2 Cor 2:4; Phil 2:2; 1 Pt 4:8. ἀγνωσίαν θεοῦ fail to know God 1 Cor 15:34. ἁμαρτίαν J 9:41; 15:22a. ἀσθένειαν Hb 7:28. γνῶσιν 1 Cor 8:1, 10 (Just., A II, 13, 1; D. 28, 4). ἐλπίδα Ac 24:15; Ro 15:4; 2 Cor 3:12; 10:15; Eph 2:12; 1J 3:3 (Ath. 33, 1). ἐπιθυμίαν Phil 1:23. ἐπιποθίαν Ro 15:23b; ζῆλον ἔ. have zeal Ro 10:2. Have jealousy Js 3:14. θυμόν Rv 12:12. λύπην (ApcMos 3 p. 2, 16 Tdf.) J 16:21f; 2 Cor 2:3; Phil 2:27; μνείαν τινὸς ἔ. remember someone 1 Th 3:6. παρρησίαν Phlm 8; Hb 10:19; 1J 2:28; 3:21; 4:17; 5:14. πεποίθησιν 2 Cor 3:4; Phil 3:4. πίστιν Mt 17:20; 21:21; Mk 4:40; Ac 14:9; Ro 14:22; 1 Cor 13:2; 1 Ti 1:19 al. (Just., A I, 52, 1). προφητείαν have the gift of prophecy 1 Cor 13:2. σοφίαν (X., Mem. 2, 3, 10) Rv 17:9. συνείδησιν ἁμαρτιῶν Hb 10:2. καλὴν συνείδησιν 13:18; ἀγαθὴν ς. 1 Ti 1:19; 1 Pt 3:16; ἀπρόσκοπον ς. Ac 24:16; ὑπομονήν Rv 2:3. φόβον 1 Ti 5:20. χαράν Phlm 7. χάριν ἔ. τινί be grateful to someone Lk 17:9; 1 Ti 1:12; 2 Ti 1:3; σιγὴν ἔ. be silent Hs 9, 11, 5. ἀνάγκην ἔσχον I felt it necessary Jd 3 (HKoskenniemi, Studien zur Idee und Phraseologie des Griechischen Briefes bis 400 n. Chr. ’56, 78–87).
    γ. of advantages, benefits, or comforts that one enjoys: ἔ. τὰ αἰτήματα to have been granted the requests 1J 5:15; ἀνάπαυσιν ἔ. have rest Rv 4:8; 14:11; ἀπόλαυσιν τινος ἔ. enjoy someth. Hb 11:25. βάθος γῆς Mt 13:5b; Mk 4:5b; γῆν πολλήν Mt 13:5a; Mk 4:5a. τὴν προσέλευσιν τὴν πρὸς τὸν κύριον AcPl Ha 8, 22f; εἰρήνην Ro 5:1. ἐλευθερίαν Gal 2:4. S. ἐξουσία, ἐπαγγελία, ἔπαινος, ζωή, ἰκμάς, καιρός, καρπός, καύχημα, καύχησις, λόγος, μισθός, νοῦς, πνεῦμα, προσαγωγή, πρόφασις, τιμή, χάρις (=favor), χάρισμα.
    δ. of a sense of obligation in regard to someth.—W. dir. object have = have someth. over one, be under someth.: ἀνάγκην ἔχειν be under necessity 1 Cor 7:37a; w. inf. foll. have a need (ἀνάγκη 1) Lk 14:18; 23:16 v.l.; Hb 7:27; χρείαν ἔ. be in need abs. Eph 4:28b; τινός need someth. (Aeschyl. et al.; SIG 333, 20; 421, 35 al.; PPetr III, 42 G 9, 7 [III B.C.] ἐάν τινος χρείαν ἔχῃς; Ath. 13, 2 ποίας ἔτι χρείαν ἑκατόμβης ἔχει;) Mt 6:8; 9:12a; Mk 11:3; Lk 19:31, 34; J 13:29; 1 Cor 12:21; Hb 10:36 al.; w. inf. foll. (TestSol 13:2) Mt 3:14; 14:16; J 13:10; 1 Th 1:8; 4:9; 5:1. νόμον J 19:7. ἐπιταγήν 1 Cor 7:25. ἐντολήν (SIG 559, 9 ἔ. τὰς ἰντολάς; 1 Esdr 4:52; 2 Macc 3:13; Jos., Bell. 1, 261) Hb 7:5; 1J 2:7; 4:21; 2J 5; cp. J 14:21. διακονίαν 2 Cor 4:1. ἀγῶνα Phil 1:30; Col 2:1. πρᾶξιν Ro 12:4b. ἔγκλημα Ac 23:29. κόλασιν ApcPt Bodl. (ApcEsdr 1:22 p. 25, 17 Tdf.).
    ε. of a sense of inevitability in respect to some action.—W. inf. foll. one must (Ps.-Callisth. 2, 1, 3 καθαιρεθῆναι ἔχεις=you must be deposed; Porphyr., Against the Christians 63 Harnack [ABA 1916] παθεῖν; Gen 18:31; Jos., Ant. 19, 348 τοῦ τεθνάναι; TestSol 5:12 σίδηρα ἔχεις φορέσαι; TestAbr A 18 p. 100, 22 [Stone p. 48] τοῦ βίου τοῦτου ἀπαλλάξαι εἶχες; Just., D. 51, 2 ἔργῳ πεισθήναι ὑμῶν ἐχόντων) βάπτισμα ἔχω βαπτισθῆναι I must undergo a baptism Lk 12:50. ἔχω σοί τι εἰπεῖν I have someth. to say to you (Lucian, Philops. 1 ἔχεις μοι εἰπεῖν. Without dat. Aelian, VH 2, 23; Jos., Ant. 16, 312) 7:40. καινόν σοι θέαμα ἔχω ἐξηγήσασθαι I have a wonderful new thing to tell you=‘I must tell you about something wonderful that I’ve just seen’ GJs 19:3. ἀπαγγεῖλαι Ac 23:17, 19; cp. vs. 18. πολλὰ γράφειν 2J 12; 3J 13.
    ⓑ of temporal circumstances w. indications of time and age: πεντήκοντα ἔτη οὔπω ἔχεις you are not yet fifty years old J 8:57 (cp. Jos., Ant. 1, 198). τριάκοντα κ. ὀκτὼ ἔτη ἔχων ἐν τῇ ἀσθενείᾳ αὐτοῦ who had been sick for 38 years 5:5 (Cyranides p. 63, 25 πολὺν χρόνον ἔχων ἐν τῇ ἀρρωστίᾳ. W. cardinal numeral TestJob 26:1 δέκα ἑπτὰ ἔτη ἔχω ἐν ταῖς πληγαῖς; POxy 1862, 17 τέσσαρες μῆνας ἔχει. Mirac. S. Georgii 44, 7 [JAufhauser 1913] ἔσχεν … ἔτη ἑπτά); cp. Mt 9:20 v.l. τέσσαρας ἡμέρας ἔ. ἐν τῷ μνημείῳ have lain in the grave for four days J 11:17 (Jos., Ant. 7, 1 αὐτοῦ δύο ἡμέρας ἔχοντος ἐν τῇ Σεκέλλᾳ). πολὺν χρόνον ἔ. be (somewhere or in a certain condition) for a long time 5:6. ἡλικίαν ἔχειν be of age (Pla., Euthyd. 32, 306d; Plut., Mor. 547a; BGU 168 τοῖς ἀτελέσι ἔχουσι τὴν ἡλικίαν) 9:21, 23. τέλος ἔχειν have an end, be at an end (Lucian, Charon 17; UPZ 81 III, 20 [II A.D.] τέλος ἔχει πάντα; Ar. 4:2 ἀρχὴν καὶ τέλος) Mk 3:26; Lk 22:37 (on the latter pass. s. τέλος 2); cp. Hb 7:3.
    ⑧ as connective marker, to have or include in itself, bring about, cause w. acc. (Hom. et al.; Wsd 8:16) of ὑπομονή: ἔργον τέλειον Js 1:4. Of πίστις: ἔργα 2:17. Of φόβος: κόλασιν 1J 4:18. Of παρρησία: μεγάλην μισθαποδοσίαν Hb 10:35. Of πολυτέλεια: λύπην, χαράν Hs 1, 10. ἐσχάτην εὐλογίαν, ἥτις διαδοχὴν οὐκ ἔχει ultimate blessing, which has no successor GJs 6:2.
    ⑨ special combinations
    ⓐ w. prep. ἐν: τὸν θεὸν ἔ. ἐν ἐπιγνώσει acknowledge God Ro 1:28 (cp. ἐν ὀργῇ ἔ. τινά=‘be angry at someone’, Thu. 2, 18, 5; 2, 21, 3; ἐν ὀρρωδίᾳ ἔ. τ. 2, 89, 1; ἐν ἡδονῇ ἔ. τ.=‘be glad to see someone’ 3, 9, 1; ἐν εὐνοίᾳ ἔ. Demosth. 18, 167). ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔ. 2 Cor 10:6 (ἕτοιμος b). ἐν ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἔχει οὐδέν he has no hold on me J 14:30 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 32 §125 ἔχειν τι ἔν τινι=have someth. [hope of safety] in someone). κατά τινος: on 1 Cor 11:4 s. above 4. ἔ. τι κατά τινος have someth. against someone Mt 5:23; Mk 11:25; w. ὅτι foll. Rv 2:14. ἔ. κατά τινος w. sim. mng. Hm 2:2; Hs 9, 23, 2; w. ὅτι foll. Rv 2:4, 20. ἔ. τινὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον meet someone face to face Ac 25:16. μετά: ἔ. τι μετά τινος have someth. w. someone κρίματα lawsuits 1 Cor 6:7. περί: ἔ. περί τινος have (a word, a reference, an explanation) about someth. B 12:1; with adv. τελείως 10:10. πρός τινα have someth. against someone (Ps.-Callisth. 2, 21, 21 ὅσον τις ὑμῶν ἔχει πρὸς ἕτερον) Ac 24:19. ζητήματα ἔ. πρός τινα have differences w. someone (on points in question) 25:19. λόγον ἔ. πρός τινα 19:38. πρᾶγμα (=Lat. causa, ‘lawsuit’: BGU 19 I, 5; 361 II, 4) ἔ. πρός τινα (POxy 743, 19 [2 B.C.] εἰ πρὸς ἄλλους εἶχον πρᾶγμα; BGU 22:8) 1 Cor 6:1. ἵνα ἔχωσιν κατηγορίαν αὐτοῦ J 8:4 D (cp. 5 above). πρός τινα ἔ. μομφήν have a complaint against someone Col 3:13.
    ⓑ τοῦτο ἔχεις ὅτι you have this (in your favor), that Rv 2:6. ἔ. ὁδόν be situated (a certain distance) away (cp. Peripl. Eryth. 37: Ὡραία ἔχουσα ὁδὸν ἡμερῶν ἑπτὰ ἀπὸ θαλάσσης) of the Mt. of Olives ὅ ἐστιν ἐγγὺς Ἰερουσαλὴμ σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν Ac 1:12.—ἴδε ἔχεις τὸ σόν here you have what is yours Mt 25:25. ἔχετε κουστωδίαν there you have a guard (=you can have a guard) 27:65 (cp. POxy 33 III, 4).
    ⑩ to be in some state or condition, act. intr. (spatially: Ath. 25, 1 οἱ ἄγγελοι … περὶ τόν ἀέρα ἔχοντες καὶ τὴν γῆν) w. adv. (Hom. et al.; ins, pap, LXX).
    ⓐ impers. it is, the situation is (Himerius, Or. 48 [=Or. 14], 10 πῶς ὑμῖν ἔχειν ταῦτα δοκεῖ; =how does this situation seem to you? Just., D. 3, 5 τὸ … ὡσαύτως ἀεὶ ἔχων) ἄλλως 1 Ti 5:25. οὕτως (Antig. Car. 20; Cebes 4, 1; POxy 294, 11 [22 A.D.] εἰ ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει; TestSol 20:8; Jos., Ant. 15, 261; Just., D. 3:5 οὐχ οὕτως ἔχει) Ac 7:1; 12:15; 17:11; 24:9. τὸ καλῶς ἔχον what is right 1 Cl 14:2 (Michel 543, 12 [c. 200 B.C.] καλῶς ἔχον ἐστὶ τιμᾶσθαι τοὺς εὔνους ἄνδρας). τὸ νῦν ἔχον for the present Ac 24:25 (cp. Plut., Mor. 749a; Lucian, Anachars. 40, Catapl. 13 τὸ δὲ νῦν ἔχον μὴ διάτριβε; Tob 7:11).
    ⓑ pers. be (in a certain way) πῶς ἔχουσιν how they are Ac 15:36 (cp. Gen 43:27; Jos., Ant. 4, 112). ἑτοίμως ἔ. be ready, hold oneself in readiness w. inf. foll. (BGU 80, 17 [II A.D.] ἡ Σωτηρία ἑτοίμως ἔχουσα καταγράψαι; Da 3:15 LXX; Jos., Ant. 13, 6; Just., D. 50, 1) 21:13; 2 Cor 12:14; 1 Pt 4:5. Also ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔ. 2 Cor 10:6 (s. ἕτοιμος b end). εὖ ἔ. be well-disposed πρός τινα toward someone Hs 9, 10, 7 (cp. Demosth. 9, 63 ἥδιον ἔχειν πρός τινα; SIG 1094, 4 φιλανθρώπως ἔχει πρὸς πάντας). κακῶς ἔ. be sick (Aristoph. et al.; POxy 935, 15; Ezk 34:4) Mt 4:24; 8:16; 9:12b; 17:15 v.l. (see πάσχω 2). καλῶς ἔ. be well, healthy (Epict. 1, 11, 4; PGen 54, 8; PFlor 230, 24) Mk 16:18; ἐσχάτως ἔ. (s. ἐσχάτως) 5:23; κομψότερον ἔ. feel better (κομψῶς ἔ.: Epict. 2, 18, 14; 3, 10, 13; PParis 18; PTebt 414, 10 ἐὰν κομψῶς σχῶ) J 4:52.
    ⑪ to be closely associated, in a variety of renderings, hold fast, be next to, be next, mid. (Hom. et al.) in NT only ptc.
    ⓐ of proper situation or placement, esp. of inner belonging hold fast, cling to. The ‘to’ of belonging and the ‘with’ of association are expressed by the gen. (Theognis 1, 32 ἀεὶ τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἔχεο=ever hold fast to the good people; X., Oec. 6, 1; Pla., Leg. 7, 811d; Lucian, Hermot. 69 ἐλπίδος οὐ μικρᾶς ἐχόμενα λέγεις; Sallust. 14 p. 26, 24 τ. θεῶν; Philo, Agr. 101 τὰ ἀρετῆς ἐχόμενα; Jos., Ant. 10, 204 οὐδὲν ἀνθρωπίνης σοφίας ἐχόμενον, C. Ap. 1, 83 παλαιᾶς ἱστορίας ἐχόμενον; Just., A I, 68, 1 λόγου καὶ ἀληθείας ἔχεσθαι; Tat. 33, 1 μανίας ἔχεται πολλῆς; Ath., R. 48, 3 λόγῳ … ἀληθείας ἐχομένῳ) τὰ ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας things that belong to salvation Hb 6:9.
    ⓑ of proximity
    α. spatial, to be next to someth: ἐχόμενος neighboring (Isocr. 4, 96 νῆσος; Hdt. 1, 134 al. οἱ ἐχόμενοι=‘the neighbors’; Diod S 5, 15, 1; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 71 §294; Arrian, Peripl. 7, 2; PParis 51, 5 and oft. in pap; 1 Esdr 4:42; Jos., Ant. 6, 6 πρὸς τὰς ἐχομένας πόλεις; 11, 340) κωμοπόλεις Mk 1:38.
    β. temporal, to be next, immediately following (Thu. 6, 3, 2 τ. ἐχομένου ἔτους al.; SIG 800, 15; PRev 34, 20; PAmh 49, 4; PTebt 124, 43; LXX) τῇ ἐχομένῃ (sc. ἡμέρᾳ, as Polyb. 3, 112, 1; 5, 13, 9; 2 Macc 12:39; Jos., Ant. 6, 235; 7, 18 al.; cp. εἰς τὴν ἐχομένην [i.e. ἡμέραν] PMich 173, 16 [III B.C.]) on the next day Lk 13:33 (v.l. ἐρχομένῃ); Ac 20:15; w. ἡμέρᾳ added (PAmh 50, 17) 21:26. τῷ ἐχομένῳ σαββάτῳ 13:44 v.l. (for ἐρχομένῳ; cp. 1 Macc 4:28, where the witnesses are similarly divided).—On the whole word HHanse, ‘Gott Haben’ in d. Antike u. im frühen Christentum ’39.—B. 641; 740. EDNT. M-M. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἔχω

  • 25 τίς

    B Interrog. Pron. τίς, Elean and [dialect] Lacon. τίρ (q.v.), τί:—gen. [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion.

    τέο Il.2.225

    , Herod.8.1, etc., or

    τεῦ Od.15.509

    , Hdt.5.106, etc.; Trag. and [dialect] Att.

    τοῦ A.Pr. 614

    , Ar.Nu. 1223, etc.; [dialect] Ion., Trag., and [dialect] Att.

    τίνος Simon.154

    , Hdt.6.80, A.Pr. 563 (anap.), S.Aj. 892, Ar Ach. 588, etc.; dat. [dialect] Ion.

    τέῳ Hdt.1.11

    , al. (as fem., 4.155); no dat. in Hom. or Hes.; Trag. and [dialect] Att.

    τῷ S.Ant. 401

    , D.19.60, etc.; [dialect] Aeol.

    τίῳ Sapph.104

    ; τίνι first in Pi.N.7.57, A.Pers. 715 (troch.), S.OT10, Ar. Ach. 919, Hdt.3.38, Th.1.80, D.20.115, etc.; acc.

    τίνα Il.5.703

    , etc.; neut.

    τί 1.362

    , etc.: dual τίνε (elided) Ar.Av. 107: pl.. nom.

    τίνες Od. 1.172

    , etc.; neut.

    τίνα Pl.Phd. 102a

    , Aeschin.2.81, Hipparch.1.1.4, Gem.17.12, Ep.Hebr.5.12; gen. [dialect] Ep.

    τέων Il.24.387

    , Od.20.192, and as monosyll. 6.119, 13.200; Trag. and [dialect] Att.

    τίνων S.El. 1476

    , OC 2, Ar.Nu. 1089, etc.; dat. τίσι first in S.OT 1126, Ar.Ra. 1455, Pl.R. 332d, etc. (no dat. in Hom. or Hes.); also

    τοῖσι S.Tr. 984

     (anap.); [dialect] Ion.

    τέοισι Hdt.1.37

    , cf. 2.82 (v.l. ὁτέοισι); [dialect] Aeol.

    τίοισι Sapph.168

    ; acc.

    τίνας S.OC 115

    , Ar.Av. 370 (troch.); neut.

    τίνα Arr.Epict.1.30.3

    ; [dialect] Boeot. τά Pi.O.1.82 (Adv.); Megar.

    σά Ar.Ach. 757

    , 784 (Adv.): of the pl. Hom. uses only nom. τίνες with gen. τέων; ποῖος (what? which?) is sts. preferred (esp. in neut. pl.) to the Adj. τίς, e.g. τὰ ποῖα ταῦτα χρήματα; Ar.Nu. 1270, cf. 1337, Th. 621, Pl.Cra. 391e, 395d, 406d; v. ποῖος 1.3 and IV:
    I in direct questions, who? which? neut. what? which? ὦ ξεῖνοι, τίνες ἐστέ; Od.9.252; τί νύ μοι μήκιστα γένηται; 5.299; τίς δαίμων τόδε πῆμα προσήγαγε; 17.446; τίς ἀχώ, τίς ὀδμὰ προσέπτα μ' ἀφεγγής; A.Pr. 115 (lyr.), cf. 561 (anap.), etc.; properly at the beginning of the sentence; but this position may be varied,
    b for emphasis, ἃ δ' ἐννέπεις, κλύουσα τοῦ λέγεις; S.OC 412, cf. El. 1191; πόλις τε ἀφισταμένη τίς πω.. τούτῳ ἐπεχείρησε; Th.3.45; esp. when the Verb begins the sentence, δράσεις δὲ δὴ τί; E.HF 1246; ἦλθες δὲ κατὰ τί; Ar.Nu. 239; διαφέρει δὲ τί; D.18.205.--The person freq. follows in gen. pl., as τίς θεῶν; Il.18.182, etc.; and of things or conditions, τί is freq. with the genit. sg., of all genders, πρὸς τί χρείας; S.OT 1174; ἐλπίδων ἐς τί; Id.OC 1749 codd. (lyr.);

    κἀνήρετ' ἐν τῷ πράγματος κυροῖ ποτε Id.Aj. 314

    , etc.
    2 sts. as the predicate, τίς ὀνομάζεται; what is he named? E.Ph. 123; so also may be expld. the union of τίς with a demonstr. or possess. Pron., or with a Noun preceded by the Art., τί τοῦτ' ἔλεξας; S.Ph. 1173 (lyr.); τί ἐστι τουτί; τίς ὁ τρόπος τοῦ τάγματος; Id.Ichn.114; also with Pron. in pl., τί ταῦτα; E.Ph. 382, Andr. 548, etc.; τί γὰρ τάδ' ἐστίν; Ar.Nu. 200; τί ποτ' ἐστίν, ἂ διανοούμεθα; Pl.Tht. 154e; τί ποτ' ἐστὶ ταῦτα; ib. 155c;

    σκεπτέον τί τὰ συμβαίνοντα Id.Grg. 508b

    ; so τί is used as predicate of a masc. or fem. subject, τί νιν προσείπω; A.Ch. 983(997); τί σοι φαίνεται ὁ νεανίσκος; Pl.Chrm. 154d:—also τίς δ' ὅδε Ναυσικάᾳ ἕπεται; who is this that follows N.? Od.6.276; τίς δ' οὗτος ἔρχεαι; Il.10.82, cf. Alc.84.1, S.El. 328, 388, Ant.7, 218, E.Hec. 501, Pl.Cri. 43c; and in the reverse order, τήνδε τίνα λεύσσω.. ; who is this I see? E.IA 821; τίνι οὖν τοιούτῳ φίλους ἂν θηρῴην; with what means of such kind.. ? X.Mem.3.11.9; τί τοσοῦτον νομίζοντες ἠδικῆσθαι; Id.Smp.4.53; τί με τὸ δεινὸν ἐργάσῃ; what is the dreadful thing which.. ? E.Ba. 492, cf. S.OC 598, 1488, etc.; τίν' ὄψιν σὴν προσδέρκομαι; what face is this I see of thine? E.Hel. 557; παρὰ τίνας τοὺς ὑμᾶς; who are 'you' to whom [I am to come]? Pl.Ly. 203b:—the Art. is exceptionally added to τίς, when it leads up to a word which requires the Art., ληφθήσει.. Πανήμου εἰκάδι· καὶ Λῴου τῇ--τίνι; τῇ δεκάτῃ on the twentieth of the month Panemus and of Loüs on the -- what day? the tenth, Call.Epigr.46:—in Com.also τὸ τί; what is that? Ar.Nu. 775, Pax 696, Av. 1039, Pl. 902, etc.; τοῦ τίνος χάριν; UPZ6.29 (ii B.C.); and with pl. Art., τὰ τί; Ar. Pax 693.
    3 with prop. names treated as appellatives (v. τις indef. 11.6b), τίς ἆρα Κύπρις ἢ τίς Ἵμερος; S.Fr. 874; τίς σε Θηρικλῆς ποτε ἔτευξε; Eub.43; τίς.. Χίμαιρα πύρπνοος; Anaxil.22.3.
    4 τίς ἂν θεῶν.. δοίη; like πῶς ἄν, would that some one.., S.OC 1100, cf. A.Ag. 1448 (lyr.).
    5 a question with τίς often amounts to a strong negation, τῶν δ' ἄλλων τίς κεν οὐνόματ' εἴποι; Il.17.260; τίς ἂν ἐξεύροι ποτ' ἄμεινον; Ar.Pl. 498; τίνες ἂν δικαιότερον.. μισοῖντο; Th.3.64, etc.
    6 sts. two questions are asked in one clause by different cases of τίς; ἡ τίσιν τί ἀποδιδοῦσα τέχνη δικαιοσύνη ἂν καλοῖτο; Pl.R. 332d;

    τί λαβόντα τί δεῖ ποιεῖν D.4.36

    :—a like doubling of the question lies in the union of τίς with other interrog. words, τίς πόθεν εἰς ( εἶς codd.) ἀνδρῶν; Od.1.170, cf. S.Tr. 421.
    7 τίς with Particles:— τίς γάρ; why who? who possibly? τίς γάρ σε θεῶν.. ἧκεν; Il.18.182; v. infr. 8 f.
    b τίς δέ; ὦ κοῦραι, τίς δ' ὔμμιν.. πωλεῖται; h.Ap. 169.
    c τίς δή; who then?

    τίς δή κεν βροτὸς.. ἅζοιτ' ἀθανάτους Thgn.747

    ; τίς δῆτα; S.Aj. 518.
    8 the usages of the neut. τί; are very various:
    a τί; alone, as a simple question, what? τί γάρ; A.Th. 336 (lyr.):—on ὅτι τί; ὅτι τί δή; ὅτι δὴ τί; v. ὅτι B. 1b; on ὡς τί; v. ὡς F.1.
    b τί τοῦτο; τί ταῦτα; v. supr. 2.
    c τί μοι; τί σοι; what is it to me? to thee? S.Ph.753, etc.; c. gen., τί μοι ἔριδος καὶ ἀρωγῆς; what have I to do with.. ? Il.21.360; τί δέ σοι ταῦτα; Ar.Lys.514, cf. Ec.521 (where the answerer repeats the question in indirect form, ὅ τί μοι τοῦτ' ἔστιν;) ; ἀλλὰ δὴ τί τοῦτ' ἐμοί; Diph.32.18; τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί; what have I to do with thee? LXX Jd.11.12, Arr.Epict.2.19.19, Ev.Jo.2.4; τί σοὶ καὶ εἰρήνῃ; LXX 4 Ki.9.18, cf. Ho.14.9; τί πρὸσσέ; M.Ant.8.44, cf.Ev.Matt.27.4; σοὶ δὲ καὶ τούτοισι τοῖσι πρήγμασι τί ἐστι; what have you to do with these matters? Hdt.5.33; τί τῷ νόμῳ καὶ τῇ βασάνῳ; D.29.36:—folld. by a clause, τί δὲ τίν, εἰ κωτίλαι εἰμές; Theoc.15.89; or with inf., τί γάρ μοι τοὺς ἔξω κρίνειν; 1 Ep.Cor.5.12:—v. εἰμί c.111.2.
    d τίμαθών; τί παθών; v. μανθάνω v,

    πάσχω 111.4

    .
    e τί; also often stands abs. as Adv. how? why? wherefore? Il.1.362, etc.; so too in [dialect] Att., Pl.Cri. 43c, etc.; δόμων γὰρ ζῶσι τῶνδε δεσπόται. Answ. τί ζῶσιν; how do you mean

    ζῶσι ζῶσι

     forsooth!

    E.Alc. 806

    ; Κιθαιρὼν--Answ. τί Κιθαιρών; what aboutK.? Id.Ba. 1177 codd., cf. 1182 (both lyr.); cf. τίη.
    f τί with Particles: - τί γάρ; why not? how else? and so it came to mean of course, no doubt, A.Ag. 1239, Ch. 880, Eu. 678, etc.; used in affirmative answers, Pl.Phdr. 258d, Tht. 209b, al.; to introduce an argument, Arist.Pol. 1281a14; v. γάρ 1.4:— τί δαί; v. δαί:— τί δέ; serving to pass on quickly to a fresh point, Pl.Hp.Ma. 288c, al.; τί δέ, εἰ.. ; but what, if.. ? E.Hel. 1043; τί δ' ἄν, εἰ.. ; Ar.Th. 773; τί δ' ἢν.. ; Id.Nu. 1444; τί δέ, εἰ μὴ.. ; what else but.. ? X.Oec.9.1, cf. S.OT 941, Ph. 421; so τί δὲ δή; τί δή; τί δή ποτε; why ever? why in the world? what do you mean? Pl.R. 470e, Grg. 469a, Sph. 241d, S.El. 1184:—so also τί δῆτα; how, pray? τί δῆτ' ἄν, εἰ.. ; Ar.Nu. 154:— ( τί μή; f.l. in S.Aj. 668):— τί μήν; i.e. yes certainly, much like τί γάρ; Pl.Tht. 162e, etc., prob. in S.Aj. 668:— τί μὴν οὔ; in reply to a question, Id.El. 1280 (lyr.):— τί νυ; why now? Il.1.414, etc.:— τί δ' οὔ; parenthetic, why not? as an affirmative answer, S.Ant. 460; τί οὐ καλοῦμεν; i.e. let us call, Ar.Lys. 1103; τί οὐ βαδίζομεν; etc., Pl.Prt. 310e, etc.:— τί οὖν; how so? making an objection, A.Th. 208; but τί οὖν ἔτ' ἂν σαίνοιμεν.. μόρον; ib. 704; τί οὖν οὐκ ἐρωτᾷς; Pl.Ly. 211d:— τί ποτε; v. τίπτε;
    g with Conjunctions following:—τί ὅτι.. ; why is it that.. ? Stratt.62 (f.l.), LXX Ge. 3.1, Ev.Luc.2.49, etc.:—with Conjunctions preceding, ἵνα τί; v. ἵνα B. 11.3 c.
    h with Preps.:— διὰ τί; wherefore? Ar.Pl. 1111, etc.:— ἐκ τίνος; from what cause? X.An.5.8.4:— ἐς τί; to what point? how long? Il.5.465; but also, to what end? S.Tr. 403, cf. OC 524 (lyr.):— κατὰ τί; for what purpose? Ar.Nu. 239:— πρὸς τί; wherefore? S.OT 766, 1027, etc.
    II τίς is sts. used for ὅστις in indirect questions,

    εἰρώτα δὴ ἔπειτα τίς εἴη καὶ πόθεν ἔλθοι Od.15.423

    , cf. 17.368;

    δεῖξον τίς ἔσται τῇ ταλαιπώρῳ χρόνος A.Pr. 623

    ; οὐδ' ἔχω τίς ἂν γενοίμαν ib. 905 (lyr.);

    οὐκ ἔχω τί φῶ Id.Ch.91

    , cf. S.OC48, etc.;

    ἐπισκεψώμεθα τίνες πέπανται σφενδόνας X.An.3.3.18

    ; εἰπὲ τίνα γνώμην ἔχεις ib.2.2.10; freq. in later Gr., where ὅστις is very rare,

    εἰς τὸ λογιστήριον γράφων.. τί ὀφείλεται PHib.1.29.42

     (iii B.C.), cf. PCair.Zen. 21.40, al. (iii B.C.); οὐθεὶς ἐσήμηνεν παρὰ τί ἂν τοῖς προστεταγμένοις.. οὐ κατηκολούθησαν nobody indicated why they should not have obeyed orders, PTeb.72.160, cf. 61 (b). 227 (ii B.C.); ὅστις and τίς are sts. combined,

    ὡς πύθοιθ' ὅ τι δρῶν ἢ τί φωνῶν ῥυσαίμην S.OT71

    , cf. A.Pr. 489 sq., 617, 623:—later with inf., τί πράττειν οὐκ ἔχω I do not know what to do, Aesop.67, cf. Ps.-Luc.Philopatr.29.
    b sts. not in indirect questions, whoever, whatever,

    αἰτοῦ τί χρῄζεις ἕν E.Fr.773.2

    ; ταῦτα οὐκ ἀπέστελλον πάντα, ἀλλ' ἐκλεγόμενοι τίνων αἱ τιμαὶ ἐπετέταντο whatever things had risen in price, D.56.24; τίνα δ' ἁ Κύπρις οὐκ ἐφίλησεν whomsoever K. has not loved, AP5.169 (Noss.); τίνι ἡ τύχη δίδωσι, λαβέτω Antiochusap.Ptol.Euerg.3 J.;

    λαμβανέτω τί θέλει AP12.219

     (Strat.);

    τὰν ὀνάλαν κίς κε γινύειτει IG 9(2).517.22

     (Larissa, iii B.C.); καὶ τί ἂν εἶ ( = ᾖ) λοιπόν ib.5(1).1390.50 (Andania, i B.C., nisi leg. καἴ τι ἂν, v. supr.A. 111.2e);

    τίς ἂν δὲ χεῖρα προσαγάγῃ Epigr.Gr.376a

     ([place name] Aezani);

    τίς σοφός, αὐτῷ προσκολλήθητι LXXSi.6.34

    ;

    οὐ τί ἐγὼ θίλω, ἀλλὰ τί σύ Ev.Marc.14.36

    ; τίς σοφίῃ πάντων πρῶτος, τούτου τρίποδ' αὐδῶ Orac. ap. D.S.9.3 et ap.D.L. 1.28 codd. (ὃς Cobet from Sch.Ar.Pl.9);

    χαῖρε καὶ σύ, τίς ποτ' εἶ IG9

     (2).953 ([place name] Larissa), cf. CIG 1982 ([place name] Thessalonica); in other places, as S.El. 1176, Tr. 339, OT 1144, E. Ion 324, this constr. cannot be admitted.
    c τίς = ὅστις after a neg., μή τίς ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν ἀνὴρ ἢ γυνὴ.., τίνος ἡ διάνοια ἐξέκλινεν κτλ.; LXX De.29.18.
    d = ὅς or

    ὅσπερ, τέων.. Ζεὺς ἐπὶ σαλπίγγων ἱρὰ βοῇ δέχεται Κᾶρες ὁμοῦ Λελέγεσσι Call.Aet.3.1.60

    , cf. Del. 185, Epigr.30.2, Nic.Al.2;

    Δωροθέαν, τίς τὸν ἐμὸν ἄνδρα εἶχε Tab.Defix.Aud.10.4

     (Cnidus, ii/i B.C.), cf. 5.2,8;

    τίνας ἱερεωσύνας εἶχον ἐπενεγύων SIG705.43

    , cf. 56 (Senatus consultum, Delph., ii B.C.);

    τίνα με ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι, οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ Act.Ap. 13.25

    ; τίς ἔζησεν ἔτη β who lived.., IG14.1560 ([place name] Rome), cf. 1391 (ibid.);

    εὗρον γεωργόν, τίς αὐτὰ ἑλκύσῃ BGU822.5

     (ii/iii A.D.).
    2 τίς; τί; in direct or indirect questions may be construed with a part., σὺ δὲ τίς ὢν ταῦτα λέγεις; being who, i.e. who are you that.. ? Pl.Grg. 452a;

    ἐπειρέσθαι.. τίνες ἐόντες ἄνθρωποι.. ταῦτα προαγορεύουσι Hdt.1.153

    ; καταμεμάθηκας.. τοὺς τί ποιοῦντας τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο ἀποκαλοῦσι; X.Mem.2.2.1; or in a subordinate clause, ἀλλ' ὅταν τί ποιήσωσι, νομιεῖς αὐτοὺς σοῦ φροντίζειν; ib.1.4.14; νῦν δ' ἐπειδὴ τίνος τέχνης ἐπιστήμων ἐστί, τίνα ἂν καλοῦντες αὐτὸν ὀρθῶς καλοῖμεν; Pl. Grg. 448c.
    III = πότερος; X.Cyr.1.3.17, Pl.Phlb. 52d, Ev.Matt. 27.21, Ev.Luc.5.23.
    IV τί as exclamatory Adv., how.. !

    τί ὡραιώθησαν σιαγόνες σου ὡς τρυγόνες LXX Ca.1.10

    , cf. 4.10; τί θέλω how I wish! Ev.Luc.12.49; τί στενή v.l. in Ev.Matt.7.14.
    C Prosody: τις and τίς keep [pron. full] ῐ in all cases (digamma operates in Il.6.462, etc.).
    II τί was never elided; but hiatus is allowed after τί in [dialect] Ep. τί ἢ (v. τίη), also in Com., as τί οὐ; Ar.Av. 149; τί οὖν; Id.Pl.94; τί ἔστι; Id.Nu.82, Av. 1036; τί, ὦ πάτερ; Id.Nu. 80:—a licence which is rarer in Trag., τί ἔστιν; S.Ph. 733; τί οὖν; A.Th. 208, 704, Eu. 902, S.Aj. 873 (lyr.), Ph. 100, etc.; τί εἶπας; Id.Tr. 1203, Ph. 917.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τίς

  • 26 ἀπό

    ἀπό, [dialect] Aeol., Thess., Arc., Cypr. [full] ἀπύ Sapph.44, cf. 78, Alc.33, Theoc.28.16,IG12(2).6.45 (Mytil.), ἀπυδόμεναι ib.9(2).594 ([place name] Larissa), 5(2).6 ([place name] Tegea), etc.:—Prep. usually with Gen. but v. infr. B. (Cf. Skt.
    A ápa, Lat. ab, Umbr. ap-ehtre 'ab extra', Goth. af, OE. af, cef, of, etc.) Orig. sense, from. [ ᾰπο?ἀπόX: where ἀπο ¯ is found in [dialect] Ep. before v or liquids (as

    ἀπὸ ἕθεν Il.6.62

    ,

    ἀπὸ νευρῆς 11.664

    , Hes. Sc. 409) ἀπαί was sometimes written in later texts, cf. Eust. 625.11:— [pron. full] ᾱ metri gr. in [dialect] Ep. compds., such as ἀπονέεσθαι.]
    I OF PLACE, the earliest, and in Hom. the prevailing sense:
    1 of Motion, from, away from,

    ἐσσεύοντο νεῶν ἄπο καὶ κλισιάων Il.2.208

    ; pleonastic, ἀ. Τροίηθεν ib.24.492;

    ἀπ' οὐρανόθεν 8.365

     (later with Advbs.,

    ἀπὸ ἔμπροσθεν LXX Ec.1.10

    , etc.); strengthd.,

    ἐκτὸς ἀ. κλισιης Il.10.151

    ; also ἀπ' αἰῶνος νέος ὤλεο, implying departure from life, ib.24.725; opp. ἐξ, of relatively superficial motion,

    λαμβάνομεν οὔτε ἐκ τῆς γῆς οὐδέν, οὔτ' ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν X.Mem.2.7.2

    ; similarly of the cause or ground,

    ἐξ ὧν προηγώνισθε καὶ ἀφ' ὧν εἰκάζω Th.4.126

    :— freq. of warriors fighting from chariots, etc.,

    οἱ μὲν ἀφ' ἵππων, οἱ δ' ἀ. νηῶν.. μάχοντο Il.15.386

    ;

    ἀφ' ἵππων μάρνασθαι Od.9.49

    ; so

    ἡ μάχη ἦν ἀφ' ἵππων Hdt.1.79

    ; λαμπὰς ἔσται ἀφ' ἵππων on horseback, Pl.R. 328a;

    ἀφ' ἵππου θηρεύειν X.An.1.2.7

    ;

    ἀ. νεῶν πεζομαχεῖν Th. 7.62

    ;

    ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶν αἰρόμενος τοὺς ἱστοὺς ἀ. τούτων ἐσκοπεῖτο X.HG 6.2.29

    ; ὀμμάτων ἄπο.. κατέσταζον γένυν, of tears, E.Hec. 240: joined with

    ἐκ, ἐκ Κορίνθου ἀ. τοῦ στρατοπέδου Pl.Tht. 142a

    .
    2 of Position, away from, far from,

    μένων ἀ. ἧς ἀλόχοιο Il.2.292

     (cf. ἀπ' ἀνδρὸς εἶναι to live apart from a man or husband, Plu.CG4);

    κεκρυμμένος ἀπ' ἄλλων Od.23.110

    ;

    μοῦνος ἀπ' ἄλλων h.Merc. 193

    ; ἀπ' ὀφθαλμῶν, ἀπ' οὔατος, far from sight or hearing, Il.23.53, 18.272, cf. 22.454;

    ἀ. θαλάσσης ᾠκίσθησαν Th.1.7

    , cf. 46;

    αὐλίζεσθαι ἀ. τῶν ὅπλων Id.6.64

    ;

    ἀπ' οἴκου εἶναι Id.1.99

    ; σπεύδειν ἀ. ῥυτῆρος far from, i.e. without using the rein, S.OC 900; in Hom. freq. strengthd., τῆλε ἀ..., νόσφιν ἀ..., Il.23.880, 5.322; in measurement of distances,

    ὅσον ιέ στάδια ἀ. Φυλῆς X.HG2.4.4

    , etc.; but later the numeral follows

    ἀ., πηγὰς ἔχων ἀ. μ σταδίων τῆς θαλάσσης D.S.4.56

    ;

    ἀ. σταδίων κ τῆς πόλεως Plu.Phil.4

    ; κατεστρατοπέδευσεν ἀ. ν σταδίων fifty stades away, Id.Oth.11, cf. D.Chr.17.17.
    3 of the mind, ἀ. θυμοῦ away from, i. e. alien from, my heart, Il.1.562;

    ἀ. δόξης 10.324

    ;

    οὐ.. ἀ. σκοποῦ οὐδ' ἀ. δόξης Od.11.344

    ;

    ἀ. τοῦ ἀνθρωπείου τρόπου Th.1.76

    ; οὐδὲν ἀ. τρόπου not without reason, Pl.R. 470b; οὐκ ἀ. σκοποῦ, καιροῦ, Id.Tht. 179c, 187e;

    οὐκ ἀ. γνώμης S. Tr. 389

    ;

    οὐκ ἀ. τοῦ πράγματος D.24.6

    ;

    μάλα πολλὸν ἀπ' ἐλπίδος ἔπλετο A.R.2.863

    .
    4 in pregnant sense, with Verbs of rest, previous motion being implied (cf. ἐκ)

    , ἀνὰ δ' ἐβόασεν.. ἀ. πέτρας σταθείς E.Tr. 523

    ; ἀ.τῆς ἐμῆς κεφαλῆς τὴν [ἐκείνου] κεφαλὴν ἀναδήσω, i. e. taking the chaplet off my head, and placing it on his, Pl.Smp. 212e: with Verbs of hanging, where ἐκ is more common,

    ἁψαμένη βρόχον ἀ. μελάθρου Od.11.278

    .
    5 with the Article, where the sense of motion often disappears, οἱ ἀ. τῶν οἰκιῶν φεύγουσιν, i.e. οἱ ἐν ταῖς οἰκίαις φεύγουσιν ἀπ' αὐτῶν, X.Cyr.7.5.23; οἱ ἀ. τῶν πύργων.. ἐπαρήξουσι ib.6.4.18;

    αἴρειν τὰ ἀ. τῆς γῆς Pl.Cra. 410b

    ; αἱ ἵπποι αἱ ἀ. τοῦ ἅρματος v.l. in Hdt.4.8;

    ὁ Ἀθηναῖος ὁ ἀ. τοῦ στρατεύματος X.An.7.2.19

    ;

    τὸν ἀ. γραμμᾶς κινεῖ λίθον Theoc.6.18

    .
    6 partitive, λαχὼν ἀ. ληΐδος αἶσαν part taken from the booty, a share of it, Od.5.40;

    αἴρεσθαι ἀ. τῶν καλπίδων Ar. Lys. 539

    ;

    ἀ. ἑκατὸν καὶ εἴκοσι παίδων εἷς μοῦνος Hdt.6.27

    ;

    ὀλίγοι ἀ. πολλῶν Th.7.87

    , cf. A.Pers. 1023.
    7 Math., of figures described upon a base,

    κῶνον ἀναγράφειν ἀ. κύκλου Archim.Sph.Cyl.1.19

    , etc.; τὸ ἀ. τῆς AB τετράγωνον the square on AB, Euc.1.47, cf. 48; εἴδεα ἀ. .. Archim.Spir.10,11.
    8 ἀ. ἀνθρώπου ἕως γυναικός man and woman, LXX1 Es.9.40; ἀ. ἀρσενικοῦ ἕως θηλυκοῦib.Nu.5.3.
    9 from being, instead of,

    ἀθανάταν ἀ. θνατᾶς.. ἐποίησας Βερενίκαν Theoc.15.106

    .
    10 privative, free from, without,

    ἀ. πάσης ἀκαθαρσίας PLips.16.19

     (ii A. D.);

    ἀ. ζημίας PTeb420.4

     (iii A. D.).
    II OF TIME, from, after, Hom. only in Il.8.54 ἀ. δείπνου θωρήσσοντο rising up from, i.e. after, cf. Hdt.1.133; ἀ. δείπνου εἶναι or γενέσθαι, Id.1.126, 2.78, 5.18, al.;

    ἀ. τοῦ σιτίου πίνειν Hp.Salubr.5

    ;

    ἀ. τῶν σίτων διαπονεῖσθαι X.Lac. 5.8

    ; in narrative, τὸ ἀ. τούτου or το̄δε, from this point onwards, Hdt.1.4,2.99;

    ἀ. τούτου τοῦ χρόνου Id.1.82

    , X.An.7.5.8;

    τὸ ἀπ' ἐκείνου Luc.Tox.25

    ;

    ἡμέρῃ δεκάτῃ ἀφ' ἧς.. Hdt.3.14

    , etc.;

    δευτέρῃ ἡμέρῃ ἀ. τῆς ἐμπρήσιος Id.8.55

    , cf. X.An.1.7.18, etc.;

    ἀφ' οὗ χρόνου Id.Cyr. 1.2.13

    ; more often ἀπ' or ἀφ' οὗ, Hdt.2.44, Th.1.18, etc.;

    ἀφ' οὗπερ A.Pers. 177

    ;

    ἀφ' ἧς Plu.Pel.15

    ; εὐθὺς ἀ. παλαιοῦ, ἀ. τοῦ πάνυ ἀρχαίου, of olden time, Th.1.2,2.15;

    ἀπ' ἀρχᾶς Pi.P.8.25

    , etc.;

    ἀ. γενεᾶς X. Cyr.1.2.8

    ; ἀφ' ἑσπέρας from the beginning of evening, i.e. at eventide, Th.7.29; ἀ. πρώτου ὕπνου ib.43;

    ἀ. μέσων νυκτῶν Ar.V. 218

    ; ἀπ' ἀγροῦ fresh from field-work, Ev.Marc.15.21, cf. 7.4;

    ἀ. νουμηνίας X.An.5.6.23

    ; χρονίζειν ἀ. τοῦ καιροῦ tarry beyond the time, LXX2 Ki. 20.5; ἀ. τέλους ἐννέα μηνῶν at the end of.., ib.24.8;

    γενόμενος ἀ. τῆς ἀρχῆς Plu.Caes.5

    : hence ἀ. ἀγωνοθετῶν an εχ-ἀγωνοθέτης, IG3.398;

    ἀ. λογιστῶν POxy.1103.3

     (iv A. D.); οἱ ἀ. ὑπατείας, = consulares, Hdn.7.1.9, etc.; but ἀ. τινος the freedman of.., IG5(2).50.59(Tegea, ii A. D.), cf.ib.5(1).1391 ([place name] Andania), 1473.
    III OF ORIGIN, CAUSE, etc.:
    1 of that from which one is born, οὐ γὰρ ἀ. δρυός ἐσσι οὐδ' ἀ. πέτρης not sprung from oak or rock, Od.19.163;

    γίγνονται δ' ἄρα ταί γ' ἔκ τε κρηνέων ἀ. τ' ἀλσέων 10.350

    , cf. S.OT 415, OC 571, etc.: sts. ἀπό denotes remote, and ἐκ immediate, descent,

    τοὺς μὲν ἀ. θεῶν, τοὺς δ' ἐξ αὐτῶν τῶν θεῶν γεγονότας Isoc.12.81

    , cf. Hdt.7.150;

    πέμπτη ἀπ' αὐτοῦ γέννα A.Pr. 853

    ; τρίτος ἀ. Διός third in descent from Zeus, Pl.R. 391c; οἱ ἀ. γένους τινός his descendants, Plu. Them.32;

    Περσέως ἀφ' αἵματος E.Alc. 509

    : of the place one springs from,

    ἵπποι.. ποταμοῦ ἄπο Σελλήεντος Il.2.839

    . cf. 849;

    Ἡρακλεῖδαι οἱ ἀ. Σπάρτης Hdt.8.114

    , cf. Th.1.89, etc.;

    τοὺς ἀ. Φρυγίας X.Cyr.2.1.5

    , etc.:hence,
    b metaph. of things,

    Χαρίτων ἄπο κάλλος ἔχουσαι Od.6.18

    ; θεῶν ἄπο μήδεα εἰδώς ib.12;

    γάλα ἀ. βοός A.Pers. 611

    ;

    μῆνις ἀφ' ἡμῶν Id.Eu. 314

    ;

    ἡ ἀφ' ὑμῶν τιμωρία Th.1.69

    ; ὁ ἀ. τῶν πολεμίων φόβος fear inspired by the enemy, X.Cyr.3.3.53.
    c of persons, οἱ ἀ. τῆς χώρας, τῆς πόλεως, country folk, townsfolk, Plb.2.6.8, 5.70.8; and so of connexion with the founder or leader of a sect,

    οἱ ἀ. Πυθαγόρου Luc.Herm.14

    ;

    οἱ ἀ. Πλάτωνος Plu.Brut.2

    ; οἱ ἀ. τοῦ περιπάτου, ἀ. τῆς Στοᾶς, etc., Luc.Cont. 6; generally οἱ ἀ. φιλοσοφίας καὶ λόγων philosophers and learned men, ibid.; οἱ ἀ. σκηνῆς καὶ θεάτρου stage players, Plu.Sull.2;

    οἱ ἀ. τῆς βουλῆς Id.Caes.10

    , etc.; ὁ ἀφ' ἑστίας παῖς, v. ἑστία; ἀπ' ἐξωμίδος with only an ἐξωμίς, S.E.P.1.153.
    2 of the material from or of which a thing is made,

    εἵματα ἀ. ξύλου πεποιημένα Hdt.7.65

    ;

    ἀπ' ὄμφακος τεύχειν οἶνον A.Ag. 970

    , cf. S.Tr. 704;

    ὅσσα ἀ. γλυκερῶ μέλιτος Theoc.15.117

    ;

    ἔνδυμα ἀ. τριχῶν καμήλου Ev.Matt.3.4

    : hence στέφανος ἀ. ταλάντων ἑξήκοντα of or weighing 60 talents, Decr. ap. D. 18.92, cf. Plb.24.1.7, IG2.555.10, al.: hence of value,

    θύεν αἶγα ἀ. δραχμᾶν εἴκοσι GDI3707

     ([place name] Cos);

    κρᾶσις ἀ. τε τῆς ἡδονῆς συγκεκραμένη καὶ ἀ. τῆς λύπης Pl.Phd. 59a

    ; so, by an extension of this use, εἰδεχθής τις ἀ. τοῦ προσώπου ugly of countenance, Thphr.Char.28.4;

    θῆλυν ἀ. χροιῆς Theoc.16.49

    ;

    σεμνὸς ἀ. τοῦ σχήματος Luc.DMort.10.8

    .
    3 of the instrument from or by which a thing is done, τοὺς.. πέφνεν ἀπ' ἀργυρέοιο βιοῖο by arrow shot from silver bow, Il.24.605;

    τόξου ἄπο κρατεροῦ ὀλέκοντα φάλαγγας 8.279

    ;

    ἐμῆς ἀπὸ χειρός 10.371

    , 11.675; so

    ἀ. χειρὸς ἐργάζεσθαι μεγάλα Luc.Hist.Conscr.29

    ; γυμνάζεσθαι ἀ. σκελῶν, χειρῶν, τραχήλου, X.Lac.5.9;

    μάχεσθαι ἀ. ἄκοντος Str.17.3.7

    ;

    ἡ ἀ. τοῦ ξίφους μάχη D.S.5.29

    ;

    βάπτειν τὸν δάκτυλον ἀ. τοῦ αἵματος LXX Le.4.7

    .
    4 of the person from whom an act comes, i.e. by whom it is done,

    οὐδὲν μέγα ἔργον ἀπ' αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο Hdt.1.14

    ;

    ζήτησιν ἀ. σφέων γενέσθαι Id.2.54

    ;

    ἐπράχθη οὐδὲν ἀπ' αὐτῶν ἔργον ἀξιόλογον Th.1.17

    , cf. 6.61;

    ἀ. τινος ὄνασθαι Pl.R. 528a

    , etc.; so τἀπ' ἐμοῦ, τἀπὸ σοῦ, E.Tr.74, S.OC 1628;

    τὰ ἀ. τῶν Ἀθηναίων Th.1.127

    ; in later Greek freq. of the direct agent, Plb.1.34.8, Str.5.4.12, D.H.9.12, Ev.Luc.9.22, J.AJ20.8.10, etc.; in codd. this may sts. be due to confusion with ὑπό, but cf. PMag.Par.1.256, BGU 1185.26(Aug.), SIG820.8(Ephesus, i A. D.), etc.
    5 of the source from which life, power, etc., are sustained,

    ζῆν ἀπ' ὕλης ἀγρίης Hdt.1.203

    ; ἀ. κτήνεων καὶ ἰχθύων ib. 216;

    ἀ. πολέμου Id.5.6

    ;

    ἀπ' ἐλαχίστων χρημάτων X.Mem.1.2.14

    ;

    ἀ. τῆς ἀγορᾶς Id.An.6.1.1

    ;

    τρέφειν τὸ ναυτικὸν ἀ. τῶν νήσων Id.HG4.8.9

    , cf. Th.1.99;

    ἀ. τῶν κοινῶν πλουτεῖν Ar.Pl. 569

    , cf. D.24.124;

    ἀ. μικρῶν εὔνους.. γεγένησαι Ar.Eq. 788

    , cf. D.18.102;

    ἀφ' ὥρας ἐργάζεσθαι

     quaestum corpore facere,

    Plu. Tim.14

    .
    6 of the cause, means, or occasion from, by, or because of which a thing is done,

    ἀ. τούτου κριοπρόσωπον τὤγαλμα τοῦ Διὸς ποιεῦσι Hdt.2.42

    ; ἀ. τινος ἐπαινεῖσθαι, θαυμάζεσθαι, ὠφελεῖσθαι, Th.2.25,6.12, X.Cyr.1.1.2;

    ἀ. τῶν ξυμφορῶν διαβάλλεσθαι Th.5.17

    ;

    τὴν ἐπωνυμίαν ἔχειν ἀ. τινος Id.1.46

    ;

    ἀ. λῃστείας τὸν βίον ἔχειν X.An. 7.7.9

    ;

    ἀπ' αὐτῶν τῶν ἔργων κρίνειν D.2.27

    ; ἀ. τοῦ πάθους in consequence of.., Th.4.30;

    βλάπτειν τινὰ ἀ. τινος Id.7.29

    ;

    κατασκευάσαντα τὸ πλοῖον ἀφ' ὧν ὑπελάμβανε σωθήσεσθαι D.18.194

    ; τρόπαιον ἀ. τινος εἱστήκει on occasion of his defeat, Id.19.320; τλήμων οὖσ' ἀπ' εὐτόλμου

    φρενός A.Ag. 1302

    , cf. 1643; ἀ. δικαιοσύνης by reason of it (v. l. for ὑπό), Hdt.7.164; ἀ. τῶν αὐτῶν λημμάτων on the same scale of profits, D.3.34, etc.; for ὅσον ἀ. βοῆς ἕνεκα, v. ἕνεκα: hence in half adverbial usages, ἀ. σπουδῆς in earnest, eagerly, Il.7.359; ἀ. τοῦἴσου, ἀ. τῆς ἴσης, or ἀπ' ἴσης, equally, Th.1.99,15, D.14.6, etc.;

    ἀπ' ὀρθῆς καὶ δικαίας τῆς ψυχῆς Id.18.298

    ;

    ἀ. ἀντιπάλου παρασκευῆς Th.1.91

    ; ἀ. τοῦ προφανοῦς openly, ib.35; ἀ. τοῦ εὐθέος straightforwardly, Id.3.43; ἀ. τοῦ αὐτομάτου of free-will, Pl.Prt. 323c; ἀ. γλώσσης by word of mouth, Hdt.1.123 (but also, from hearsay, A.Ag. 813);

    ἀ. στόματος Pl.Tht. 142d

    ; ἀπ' ὄψεως at sight, Lys.16.19; ἀ. χειρὸς λογίζεσθαι on your fingers, Ar.V. 656;

    πεύθομαι δ' ἀπ' ὀμμάτων νόστον A.Ag. 988

    ; ὀμμάτων ἄπο in the public gaze, E.Med. 216;

    ἀ. τοῦ κυάμου ἄρχοντας καθίστασθαι X.Mem.1.2.9

    ;

    ἡ βουλὴ ἡ ἀ. τοῦ κυάμου Th.8.66

    , cf. IG1.9;

    τοὺς ἀ. τοῦ κυάμου δισχιλίους ἄνδρας Arist.Ath.24.3

    ; τριηράρχους αἱρεῖσθαι ἀ. τῆς οὐσίας Decr. ap. D.18.106; ἀφ' ἑαυτοῦ from oneself, on one's own account, Th.8.6, etc.;

    ἀφ' ἑαυτοῦ γνώμης Id.4.68

    ; ἀ. συνθήματος, ἀ. παραγγέλματος, by agreement, by word of command, Hdt.5.74, Th.8.99; ἀ. σάλπιγγος by sound of trumpet, X.Eq.Mag.3.12 (s.v.l.); ἐπίτροπος ἀ. τῶν λόγων, = Lat. procurator a rationibus, Ann.Epigr..1913.143a (Ephesus, ii A. D.).
    7 of the object spoken of, τὰ ἀ. τῆς νήσου οἰκότα ἐστί the things told from or of the island.., Hdt.4.195, cf. 54, 7.195;

    νόμος κείμενος ἀ. τῶν τεχνῶν Ar.Ra. 762

    .
    B in Arc., Cypr., ἀπύ takes dat., ἀπὺ τᾷ [ἁμέρᾳ] IG5(2).6 ([place name] Tegea);

    ἀπὺ τᾷ ζᾷ Inscr.Cypr.135.8

     H. ([place name] Idalion).
    2 in later Greek ἀπό is found c. acc., PLond.1.124.30 (iv/v A. D.).
    C in Hom. frequent with Verbs in tmesi, as Il.5.214, etc., and sts. in Prose, as Hdt.8.89.
    1 asunder, as ἀποκόπτω, ἀπολύω, ἀποτέμνω: and hence, away, off, as ἀποβάλλω, ἀποβαίνω; denoting, remoual of an accusation, as ἀπολογέομαι, ἀποψηφίζομαι.
    2 finishing off, completing, ἀπεργάζομαι, ἀπανδρόω, ἀπανθρωπίζω, ἀπογλαυκόω.
    3 ceasing from, leaving off, as ἀπαλγέω, ἀποκηδεύω, ἀπολοφύρομαι, ἀποζέω, ἀπανθίζω, ἀφυβρίζω.
    4 back again, as ἀποδίδωμι, ἀπολαμβάνω, ἀπόπλους: also, in full, or what is one's own, as ἀπέχω, ἀπολαμβάνω: freq. it only strengthens the sense of the simple.
    5 by way of abuse, as in ἀποκαλέω.
    6 almost = ἀ- priv.; sts. with Verbs, as ἀπαυδάω, ἀπαγορεύω; more freq. with Adjectives, as ἀποχρήματος, ἀπότιμος, ἀπόσιτος, ἀπόφονος.
    E ἄπο, by anastrophe for ἀπό, when it follows its Noun, as

    ὀμμάτων ἄπο S.El. 1231

    , etc.; never in Prose.
    2 ἄπο for ἄπεστι, Semon.1.20, Timocr.9.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἀπό

  • 27 τεύχω

    τεύχω, Il.1.110, S.Tr. 756, etc.: [tense] fut.
    A

    τεύξω Od.1.277

    : [tense] aor.

    ἔτευξα Il.14.338

    , etc.; [dialect] Ep.

    τεῦξα 18.609

    , Od.8.276: [tense] pf.

    τέτευχα AP6.40

     (Maced.), 9.202 (Leo Phil.), intr. once in Hom. (v. infr. 1.3); in correct writers τέτευχα is the [tense] pf. of τυγχάνω (for in Il.13.346 ἡρώεσσι τετεύχατον or τετεύχετον is f.l. for ἐτεύχετον):—[voice] Med., [tense] fut. τεύξομαι in act. sense, Il.19.208 (dub. l. here and in A.Ag. 1230), but prob. pass. in Il.5.653 (elsewh. [tense] fut. of τυγχάνω): [tense] aor. inf.

    τεύξασθαι h.Ap.76

    , 221: redupl. [tense] aor. τετῠκεῖν, -έσθαι, v. infr. 1.1:—[voice] Pass., 3 [tense] fut.

    τετεύξομαι Il.21.322

    , 585: [tense] aor.

    ἐτύχθην 4.470

    , A.Eu. 353 (lyr.);

    ἐτεύχθην Hp.Decent.17

     (v.l.), AP6.207 (Arch.), etc. (but this belongs equally to τυγχάνω): [tense] pf. τέτυγμαι, [tense] plpf. ἐτετύγμην, freq. in Hom., etc., v. infr.; [ per.] 3pl. τετεύχαται, ἐτετεύχατο, τετεύχατο, Il.13.22, 11.808, 18.574: (v. τυγχάνω):—make ready, make, freq. in [dialect] Ep. and Lyr.; also in A., but rare in S. and E. (once in Com., Eub.43); never in Prose.
    I produce by work or art; esp. of material things, make, build, δώματα, θάλαμον, νηόν, etc., Il.6.314, 14.166, Od.12.347, etc.; of a worker in metal,

    τὸ μὲν [σκῆπτρον] Ἥφαιστος κάμε τεύχων Il.2.101

    ;

    θώρηκα, τὸν Ἥφαιστος κάμε τεύχων 8.195

    ; τρίποδας.. ἔτευχεν [Ἥφαιστος] 18.373; τ. δόλον, of the net which Hephaestus wrought, Od.8.276;

    τέκτονος υἱόν,.. ὃς χερσὶν ἐπίστατο δαίδαλα πάντα τεύχειν Il.5.61

    ; of women's handiwork, εἵματα τ. Od.7.235; of a cook, δεῖπνον τετυκεῖν dress or prepare a meal, 15.77,94 (so in [voice] Med., prepare a meal or have it prepared, of those who are to eat it, 20.390;

    τετύκοντό τε δαῖτα Il.1.467

    , 2.430;

    τεύχοντο δαῖτα Od.10.182

    ;

    τεύξεσθαι δόρπον Il.19.208

    ;

    δόρπον τετύκοντο Od.12.307

    , cf. 283, al. (the [dialect] Ep. [tense] aor. τετυκεῖν, τετυκέσθαι is used in this sense only)); also

    τεῦχε κυκειῶ Il.11.624

    ; ἄλφιτα τεύχουσαι preparing meal (by grinding the grain), Od.20.108; αὐτὰρ ὁ εἴδωλον τεῦξ' formed, created it, Il5.449: so also in Pi. and A.,

    θεὸς ὁ τὰ πάντα τεύχων βροτοῖς Pi.Fr. 141

    , cf. O.1.30;

    δαῖτ'.. ἔτευξεν A.Ag. 731

     (lyr.); φάρμακον τεύχουσα ib. 1261; ὦ γαῖα κεραμί, τίς σε Θηρικλῆς ποτε ἔτευξε; Eub. l.c.:—[voice] Pass.,

    δώματα τετεύχαται Il.13.22

    ;

    ἐν βήσσῃσι τετυγμένα δώματα Od.10.210

    , 252, cf. 21.215;

    θεῶν ἐτετεύχατο βωμοί Il. 11.808

    ;

    βωμὸς.. τέτυκτο Od.17.210

    ;

    νηός γε τέτυκτο Il.5.446

    ; οἱ.. σῆμα τετεύξεται for him a tomb shall be built, 21.322;

    εἵματα.. τετυγμένα χερσὶ γυναικῶν 22.511

    ; ἱμάντα.., ᾧ ἔνι πάντα τετεύχαται in which all are wrought, are to be found, 14.220: τετύχθαι τινός to be made of..,

    βόες χρυσοῖο τετεύχατο κασσιτέρου τε 18.574

    ;

    περόνη χρυσοῖο τέτυκτο Od.19.226

    , cf. Hes.Sc. 208: c. dat. rei, τετυγμένα δώματα.. ξεστοῖσιν λάεσσι built with or of.., Od.10.210;

    αἱ μὲν γὰρ [πύλαι] κεράεσσι τετεύχαται, αἱ δ' ἐλέφαντι 19.563

    ; but δόμον.. αἰθούσῃσι τετυγμένον built or furnished with.., Il.6.243.
    2 [tense] pf. part. τετυγμένος freq. has the sense of an Adj., = τυκτός, well=made, well-wrought, τεῖχος, βωμὸς τετ., Il.14.66, Od.22.335, al.; σάκος, δέπας, κρητήρ, Il.14.9, 16.225, 23.741, al.;

    ἄγγεα Od.9.223

    ;

    δῶρα 16.185

    ; ἀγρός wrought, tilled, 24.206: metaph., νόος ἐν στήθεσσι τετυγμένος a ready, constant mind, 20.366.
    3 [tense] pf. part. [voice] Act. occurs once in pass. sense, ῥινοῖο τετευχώς made of hide, 12.423.
    II of natural phenomena. actions, events, etc., cause, bring to pass, τ. ὄμβρον ἠὲ χάλαζαν, of Zeus, Il.10.6;

    αἱ δὲ [πύλαι] πετασθεῖσαι τεῦξαν φάος 21.538

    ; παλίωξιν τ. 15.70, cf. Hes.Sc. 154 ([voice] Pass.);

    βοὴν διὰ ἄστεος Od.10.118

    ;

    γέλω δ' ἑτάροισιν ἔτευχε 18.350

    ; γάμον τ. 1.277;

    τ. πομπήν 10.18

    , cf. Pi.P.4.164;

    τ. πόλεμον καὶ φύλοπιν Od.24.476

    ;

    θάνατόν τινι 20.11

    ; ἄλγεα, κήδεά τινι, work one woe, Il.1.110, Od. 1.244;

    ἐν δ' ἄρα οἱ στήθεσσι.. αἱμυλίους τε λόγους καὶ ἐπίκλοπον ἦθος τεῦξε Hes.Op.79

    , cf. 265, Th. 570;

    τ. ξείνια Pi.P.4.129

    ; τ. μέλος ib.12.19; τ. γέρας, τιμάν τινι, get him honour, Id.I.1.14,67;

    τ. κακά A.Eu. 125

    ; τ. στάσιν ἐν ἀλλήλαισι, i.e. to quarrel, Id.Pers. 189;

    τ. φόβον Id.Pr. 1090

     (anap.);

    σφαγάς S.Tr. 756

    ;

    τάφον E.Rh. 959

    ;

    φίλοις ἔριν Id.Andr. 644

    ;

    κρυπτὸν δόλον Call.

     in PSI11.1218a6:— [voice] Pass., to be caused, and so, arise, occur,

    ἔργον ἐτύχθη ἀργαλέον Il. 4.470

    , cf. 2.320;

    οὐ γὰρ ἔτ' ἀνσχετὰ ἔργα τετεύχαται Od.2.63

    , cf. Il.14.53, 22.450;

    τὰ δ' οὐ ἴσαν, ὡς ἐτέτυκτο Od.4.772

    , cf. 392;

    ἡμῖν νεῖκος ἐτύχθη Il.11.671

    ;

    πὰρ Διὸς ἀθανάτοισι χόλος καὶ μῆνις ἐτύχθη 15.122

    ;

    Ἀργείοισι.. νόστος ἐτύχθη 2.155

    ; ὅμαδος ἐτ. 12.471, etc.; τετεύξεται αἰπὺς ὄλεθρος ib. 345, cf. 5.653; εἰ δή μοι ὁμοίη μοῖρα τέτυκται is ordained, 18.120;

    ὁπποτέρῳ θάνατος καὶ μοῖρα τέτυκται 3.101

    ; φόνος υἷι τέτ. Od.4.771;

    φίλοισι δὲ κήδεα.. τετεύχαται 14.138

    , cf. Il.21.585; ἐν βροτοῖς γέρων λόγος τέτυκται there exists, A.Ag. 751 (lyr.), cf. E.El. 457 (lyr.).
    III c. acc. pers., make so and so,

    ὄφρα μιν.. ἄγνωστον τεύξειεν Od.13.191

    , cf. 397; τ. τινὰ ἰσοδαίμονα, μέγαν, εὐδαίμονα, Pi.N.4.84, A.Eu. 668, E.Heracl. 614 (lyr.): of things,

    οὐδέ κεν ἄλλως οὐδὲ θεὸς τεύξειε Od.8.177

    : c. dupl. acc., ὦ πούς, τί σε.. τεύξω; what shall I make of thee? S.Ph. 1189 (lyr.):—hence in [tense] pf. and [tense] plpf. [voice] Pass. simply for γίγνεσθαι or

    εἶναι, Ζεὺς ταμίης πολέμοιο τέτυκται Il.4.84

    ; [Ὠκεανὸς] γένεσις πάντεσσι τέτ. 14.246;

    ὅς ῥα Σκαμάνδρου ἀρητὴρ ἐτετυκτο 5.78

    , cf. 16.605; οὐ μὲν γάρ τι καταθνητός γ' ἐτ. 5.402, cf. 16.622; νόον ἐν πρώτοισι.. ἐτ. was among the first in mind, 15.643; γυναικὸς ἄρ' ἀντὶ τέτυξο thou was like a woman, 8.163;

    ἀντὶ κασιγνήτου ξεῖνός θ' ἱκέτης τε τέτυκται Od.8.546

    ;

    Νύμφαις, ταὶς Δίος ἐξ αἰγιόχω φαῖσι τετυγμέναις Alc.85

    : also of things, τόδε σῆμα τετύχθω let this be the sign, Od.21.231, cf. Il.22.30: in [tense] aor. 1,

    πέπλων ἅκληρος ἐτύχθην A.Eu. 353

     (lyr.), cf. Supp.87 (lyr.).

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τεύχω

  • 28 θεός

    θεός, οῦ (Hom.+; Herm. Wr.; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph.) ὁ and ἡ, voc. θεέ (Pisidian ins [JHS 22, 1902, 355] θέ; PGM 4, 218 θεὲ θεῶν; 7, 529 κύριε θεὲ μέγιστε; 12, 120 κύριε θεέ; 13, 997; LXX [Thackeray 145; PKatz, Philo’s Bible ’50, 152f]; ApcMos 42; Jos., Ant. 14, 24 ὦ θεὲ βασιλεῦ τ. ὅλων; SibOr 13, 172 βασιλεῦ κόσμου θεέ) Mt 27:46, more frequently (s. 2 and 3c, h below) ὁ θεός (LXX; ParJer 6:12; ApcEsdr 7:5; ApcMos 32; B-D-F §147, 3m; JWackernagel, Über einige antike Anredeformen 1912; Mlt-H. 120). On the inclusion or omission of the art. gener. s. W-S. §19, 13d; B-D-F §254, 1; 268, 2; Rob. 758; 761; 780; 786; 795; Mlt-Turner 174; BWeiss, D. Gebr. des Artikels bei den Gottesnamen, StKr 84, 1911, 319–92; 503–38 (also published separately). The sg. article freq. suggests personal claim on a deity. ‘God, god’.
    ① In the Gr-Rom. world the term θεός primarily refers to a transcendent being who exercises extraordinary control in human affairs or is responsible for bestowal of unusual benefits, deity, god, goddess (s. on θεά) Ac 28:6; 2 Th 2:4 (cp. SibOr 5, 34 ἰσάζων θεῷ αὐτόν; Ar. 4, 1 οὐκ εἰσὶ θεοί; Tat. 10, 1 θεὸς … κύκνος γίνεται …; Ath. 18, 3 θεός τις δισώματος); θεὸς Ῥαιφάν Ac 7:43 (Am 5:26; s. entry Ῥαιφάν). οὐδεὶς θεὸς εἰ μὴ εἷς there is no god but one 1 Cor 8:4 (cp. AcPl Ha 1, 17 restored). θεοῦ φωνὴ καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώπου Ac 12:22.—ἡ θεός the (female) god, goddess (Att., later more rarely; Peripl. Eryth. c. 58; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 17, 2; SIG 695, 28; ins, one of which refers to Artemis, in Hauser p. 81f; Jos., Ant. 9, 19; Ar. 11, 2 [Artemis]; Ath. 29, 2 [Ino]) Ac 19:37.—Pl. Ac 7:40 (Ex 32:1). Cp. 14:11; 19:26; PtK 2 p. 14, 21. εἴπερ εἰσὶν λεγόμενοι θεοί even if there are so-called gods 1 Cor 8:5a; s. vs. 5b (on θεοὶ πολλοί cp. Jos., Ant. 4, 149.—Maximus Tyr. 11, 5a: θ. πολλοί w. εἷς θ. πατήρ). οἱ φύσει μὴ ὄντες θεοί those who by nature are not really gods Gal 4:8b (cp. Ar. 4, 2 μὴ εἶναι τὸν οὐρανὸν θεόν al.). θεοὶ … λίθινοι etc. AcPl Ha 1, 18 (cp. JosAs 10:13 τοὺς χρυσοῦς καὶ ἀργυροῦς). Of the devil μὴ ὢν θεός AcPlCor 2:15.
    ② Some writings in our lit. use the word θ. w. ref. to Christ (without necessarily equating Christ with the Father, and therefore in harmony w. the Shema of Israel Dt 6:4; cp. Mk 10:18 and 4a below), though the interpretation of some of the pass. is in debate. In Mosaic and Gr-Rom. traditions the fundamental semantic component in the understanding of deity is the factor of performance, namely saviorhood or extraordinary contributions to one’s society. Dg. 10:6 defines the ancient perspective: ὸ̔ς ἃ παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ λάβων ἔχει, ταῦτα τοῖς ἐπιδεομένοις χορηγῶν, θεὸς γίνεται τῶν λαμβανάντων one who ministers to the needy what one has received from God proves to be a god to the recipients (cp. Sb III, 6263, 27f of a mother). Such understanding led to the extension of the mng. of θ. to pers. who elicit special reverence (cp. pass. under 4 below; a similar development can be observed in the use of σέβομαι and cognates). In Ro 9:5 the interpr. is complicated by demand of punctuation marks in printed texts. If a period is placed before ὁ ὢν κτλ., the doxology refers to God as defined in Israel (so EAbbot, JBL 1, 1881, 81–154; 3, 1883, 90–112; RLipsius; HHoltzmann, Ntl. Theol.2 II 1911, 99f; EGünther, StKr 73, 1900, 636–44; FBurkitt, JTS 5, 1904, 451–55; Jülicher; PFeine, Theol. d. NTs6 ’34, 176 et al.; RSV text; NRSV mg.). A special consideration in favor of this interpretation is the status assigned to Christ in 1 Cor 15:25–28 and the probability that Paul is not likely to have violated the injunction in Dt 5:7.—If a comma is used in the same place, the reference is to Christ (so BWeiss; EBröse, NKZ 10, 1899, 645–57 et al.; NRSV text; RSV mg. S. also εἰμί 1.—Undecided: THaering.—The transposition by the Socinian scholar JSchlichting [died 1661] ὧν ὁ=‘to whom belongs’ was revived by JWeiss, D. Urchristentum 1917, 363; WWrede, Pls 1905, 82; CStrömman, ZNW 8, 1907, 319f). In 2 Pt 1:1; 1J 5:20 the interpretation is open to question (but cp. ISmyrna McCabe.0010, 100 ὁ θεὸς καὶ σωτὴρ Ἀντίοχος). In any event, θ. certainly refers to Christ, as one who manifests primary characteristics of deity, in the foll. NT pass.: J 1:1b (w. ὁ θεός 1:1a, which refers to God in the monotheistic context of Israel’s tradition. On the problem raised by such attribution s. J 10:34 [cp. Ex 7:1; Ps 81:6]; on θεός w. and without the article, acc. to whether it means God or the Logos, s. Philo, Somn. 1, 229f; JGriffiths, ET 62, ’50/51, 314–16; BMetzger, ET 63, ’51/52, 125f), 18b. ὁ κύριός μου καὶ ὁ θεός μου my Lord and my God! (nom. w. art.=voc.; s. beg. of this entry.—On a resurrection as proof of divinity cp. Diog. L. 8, 41, who quotes Hermippus: Pythagoras returns from a journey to Hades and appears among his followers [εἰσέρχεσθαι εἰς τὴν ἐκκλησίαν], and they consider him θεῖόν τινα) J 20:28 (on the combination of κύριος and θεός s. 3c below). Tit 2:13 (μέγας θ.). Hb 1:8, 9 (in a quot. fr. Ps 44:7, 8). S. TGlasson, NTS 12, ’66, 270–72. Jd 5 P72. But above all Ignatius calls Christ θεός in many pass.: θεὸς Ἰησοῦς Χριστός ITr 7:1; Χριστὸς θεός ISm 10:1. ὁ θεὸς ἡμῶν IEph ins; 15:3; 18:2; IRo ins (twice); 3:3; IPol 8:3; τὸ πάθος τοῦ θεοῦ μου IRo 6:3. ἐν αἵματι θεοῦ IEph 1:1. ἐν σαρκὶ γενόμενος θεός 7:2. θεὸς ἀνθρωπίνως φανερούμενος 19:3. θεὸς ὁ οὕτως ὑμᾶς σοφίσας ISm 1:1.—Hdb. exc. 193f; MRackl, Die Christologie d. hl. Ign. v. Ant. 1914. ὁ θεός μου Χριστὲ Ἰησοῦ AcPl Ha 3, 10; Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ θ[εός] 6, 24; cp. ln. 34 (also cp. Just., A I, 63, 15, D. 63, 5 al.; Tat. 13, 3; Ath. 24, 1; Mel., P. 4, 28 al.).—SLösch, Deitas Jesu u. antike Apotheose ’33. Cp. AWlosk, Römischer Kaiserkult ’78.
    ③ God in Israelite/Christian monotheistic perspective, God the predom. use, somet. with, somet. without the art.
    ⓐ ὁ θεός Mt 1:23; 3:9; 5:8, 34; Mk 2:12; 10:18; 13:19 (cp. TestJob 37:4); Lk 2:13; J 3:2b; Ac 2:22b; Gal 2:6 al. With prep. εἰς τὸν θ. Ac 24:15. ἐκ τοῦ θ. J 8:42b, 47; 1J 3:9f; 4:1ff, 6f; 5:1, 4; 2 Cor 3:5; 5:18 al.; ἐν τῷ θ. Ro 5:11; Col 3:3 (Ath. 21, 1). ἔναντι τοῦ θ. Lk 1:8; ἐπὶ τὸν θ. Ac 15:19; 26:18, 20 (Just., D. 101, 1); ἐπὶ τῷ θ. Lk 1:47 (Just., D. 8, 2); παρὰ τοῦ θ. J 8:40 (Ar. 4, 2; Just., A I, 33, 6 al.; without art. Just., D. 69, 6 al.). παρὰ τῷ θ. Ro 2:13; 9:14 (Just., A I, 28, 3; Tat. 7, 1; Ath. 31, 2 al.); πρὸς τὸν θ. J 1:2; Ac 24:16; AcPl Ha 3, 8 (Just., D. 39, 1 al.; Mel., HE 4, 26, 13 al.); τὰ πρὸς τὸν θ. Hb 2:17; 5:1; Ro 15:17 is acc. of respect: with respect to one’s relation to God or the things pert. to God, in God’s cause (s. B-D-F §160; Rob. 486. For τὰ πρὸς τ. θ. s. Soph., Phil. 1441; X., De Rep. Lac. 13, 11; Aristot., Pol. 1314b, 39; Lucian, Pro Imag. 8; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 109, 3 [III B.C.] εὐσεβὴς τὰ πρὸς θεούς; Ex 4:16; 18:19; Jos., Ant. 9, 236 εὐσεβὴς τὰ πρὸς τ. θεόν). τὰ πρὸς τ[ὸν] θεὸν ἐτήρουσαν, when they were observant of matters pert. to God AcPl Ha 8, 13 (=τα π̣ρος θ̣̄ν̄| ἐτήρουσαν Ox 1602, 10f=BMM recto 16 restored after the preceding).
    ⓑ without the art. Mt 6:24; Lk 2:14; 20:38; J 1:18a; Ro 8:8, 33b; 2 Cor 1:21; 5:19; Gal 2:19; 4:8f; 2 Th 1:8; Tit 1:16; 3:8; Hb 3:4; AcPl Ha 8, 20=BMM recto 25 (s. also HSanders’ rev. of Ox 1602, 26, in HTR 31, ’38, 79, n. 2, Ghent 62 verso, 6); AcPlCor 1:15; 2:19, 26. W. prep. ἀπὸ θεοῦ J 3:2a; 16:30 (Just., A II, 13, 4 τὸν … ἀπὸ ἀγεννήτου … θεοῦ λόγον). εἰς θεόν IPhld 1:2. ἐκ θεοῦ (Pind., O. 11, 10, P. 1, 41; Jos., Ant. 2, 164; Just., A I, 22, 2; Mel., P. 55, 404) Ac 5:39; 2 Cor 5:1; Phil 3:9. ἐν θεῷ J 8:21; Ro 2:17; Jd 1; AcPl Ha 1, 15; 2, 35. ἐπὶ θεόν AcPl Ha 2, 29 (cp. πρὸς θεόν Just., D. 138, 2). κατὰ θεόν acc. to God’s will (Appian, Iber. 19 §73; 23 §88; 26 §101, Liby. 6 §25, Bell. Civ. 4, 86 §364) Ro 8:27; 2 Cor 7:9ff; IEph 2:1. ἡ κατὰ θ. ἀγάπη godly love IMg 1:1; cp. 13:1; ITr 1:2. παρὰ θεῷ (Jos., Bell. 1, 635) Mt 19:26; Lk 2:52.
    ⓒ w. gen. foll. or w. ἴδιος to denote a special relationship: ὁ θ. Ἀβραάμ Mt 22:32; Mk 12:26; Lk 20:37; Ac 3:13; 7:32 (all Ex 3:6). ὁ θ. (τοῦ) Ἰσραήλ (Ezk 44:2; JosAs 7:5) Mt 15:31; Lk 1:68; cp. Ac 13:17; 2 Cor 6:16; Hb 11:16. ὁ θ. μου Ro 1:8; 1 Cor 1:4; 2 Cor 12:21; Phil 1:3; 4:19; Phlm 4. OT κύριος ὁ θ. σου (ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν, αὐτῶν) Mt 4:7 (Dt 6:16); 22:37 (Dt 6:5); Mk 12:29 (Dt 6:4); Lk 1:16; 4:8 (Dt 6:13); 10:27 (Dt 6:5); Ac 2:39. ὁ κύριος καὶ ὁ θ. ἡμῶν Rv 4:11 (Just., D. 12, 3; the combination of κύριος and θεός is freq. in the OT: 2 Km 7:28; 3 Km 18:39; Jer 38:18; Zech 13:9; Ps 29:3; 34:23; 85:15; 87:2; TestAbr A 3 p. 79, 19 [Stone p. 6]; JosAs 3:4; 12:2 κύριε ὁ θ. τῶν αἰώνων. But s. also Epict. 2, 16, 13 κύριε ὁ θεός [GBreithaupt, Her. 62, 1927, 253–55], Herm. Wr.: Cat. Cod. Astr. VIII/2, p. 172, 6 κύριε ὁ θεὸς ἡμῶν, the PGM ref. at the beg. of this entry, and the sacral uses τ. θεῷ κ. κυρίῳ Σοκνοπαίῳ [OGI 655, 3f—24 B.C.]; PTebt 284, 6; τῷ κυρίῳ θεῷ Ἀσκληπίῳ [Sb 159, 2]; deo domino Saturno [ins fr. imperial times fr. Thala in the prov. of Africa: BPhW 21, 1901, 475], also Suetonius, Domit. 13 dominus et deus noster [for the formulation s. 4a: PMich 209]; Ar. 15, 10; Just., D. 60, 3 al.) τὸν ἴδιον θ. AcPl Ha 3, 22.—ὁ θ. τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰ. Χ. Eph 1:17.
    ⓓ used w. πατήρ (s. πατήρ 6a) ὁ θ. καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ Ro 15:6; 2 Cor 1:3; Eph 1:3; Col 1:3; 1 Pt 1:3. ὁ θ. καὶ πατὴρ ἡμῶν Gal 1:4; Phil 4:20; 1 Th 1:3; 3:11, 13. ὁ θ. καὶ πατήρ 1 Cor 15:24; Eph 5:20; Js 1:27. θ. πατήρ Phil 2:11; 1 Pt 1:2; cp. 1 Cor 8:6. ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ro 1:7b; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; Phil 1:2; Col 1:2; Phlm 3; ἀπὸ θ. π. Gal 1:3 v.l.; Eph 6:23; 2 Th 1:2; 2 Ti 1:2; Tit 1:4; παρὰ θεοῦ π. 2 Pt 1:17; 2J 3.
    ⓔ w. gen. of what God brings about, in accordance w. the divine nature: ὁ θ. τῆς εἰρήνης Ro 15:33; 1 Th 5:23. τῆς ἐλπίδος the God fr. whom hope comes Ro 15:13. πάσης παρακλήσεως 2 Cor 1:3b. ὁ θ. τῆς ἀγάπης 13:11. ὁ θ. πάσης χάριτος 1 Pt 5:10. In οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἀκαταστασίας ὁ θεός 1 Cor 14:33, θεός is to be supplied before ἀκατ.: for God is not a God of disorder.
    ⓕ The gen. (τοῦ) θεοῦ is
    α. subj. gen., extremely freq. depending on words like βασιλεία, δόξα, θέλημα, ἐντολή, εὐαγγέλιον, λόγος, ναός, οἶκος, πνεῦμα, υἱός, υἱοί, τέκνα and many others. Here prob. (s. β) belongs τὸ μωρὸν τ. θ. the (seeming) foolishness of G. 1 Cor 1:25 (s. B-D-F §263, 2).
    β. obj. gen. ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ θ. love for God Lk 11:42; J 5:42; ἡ προσευχὴ τοῦ θ. prayer to God Lk 6:12. πίστις θεοῦ faith in God Mk 11:22. φόβος θεοῦ fear of, reverence for God Ro 3:18 al. (s. φόβος 2bα) If 1 Cor 1:25 is to be placed here (s. α above), τὸ μωρὸν τ. θ. refers to apostolic allegiance to God, which is viewed by outsiders as folly.
    γ. τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ the things, ways, thoughts, or secret purposes of God 1 Cor 2:11. φρονεῖν τὰ τ. θ. Mt 16:23; Mk 8:33 s. φρονέω 2b (ἀτιμάζοντας τὰ τοῦ θ. Just., D. 78, 10 al.). ἀποδιδόναι τὰ τ. θ. τῷ θεῷ give God what belongs to God Mt 22:21; Mk 12:17; Lk 20:25.
    δ. Almost as a substitute for the adj. divine IMg 6:1f; 15 (cp. Ath. 21, 4 οὐδὲν ἔχων θεοῦ [of Zeus]).
    ⓖ The dat. τῷ θεῷ (s. B-D-F §188, 2; 192; Rob. 538f; WHavers, Untersuchungen z. Kasussyntax d. indogerm. Sprachen 1911, 162ff) is
    α. dat. of advantage (cp. e.g. Ath. 26, 3 ὡς ἐπηκόῳ θεῷ) for God 2 Cor 5:13. Perh. (s. β) ὅπλα δυνατὰ τῷ θ. 10:4. The dat. of Ro 6:10f rather expresses the possessor.
    β. ethical dat. in the sight of God, hence w. superl. force (s. Beginn. IV, 75, on Ac 7:20) very: μεγάλοι τῷ θ. B 8:4 (cp. Jon 3:3). ἀστεῖος τῷ θ. Ac 7:20. Perh. (s. α) ὅπλα δυνατὰ τ. θ. weapons powerful in the sight of God 2 Cor 10:4. This idea is usu. expressed by ἐνώπιον τοῦ θ.
    ⓗ ὁ θ. is used as a vocative Mk 15:34 (Ps 21:2. θεός twice at the beginning of the invocation of a prayer: Ael. Dion. θ, 8; Paus. Attic. θ, 7 ‘θεὸς θεός’ ταῖς ἀρχαῖς ἐπέλεγον ἐπιφημιζόμενοι); Lk 18:11; Hb 1:8 (Ps 44:7; MHarris, TynBull 36, ’85, 129–62); 10:7 (Ps 39:9); AcPl Ha 3, 10; 5, 12; 31. S. also 2 and 3c and the beg. of this entry.
    ⓘ θ. τῶν αἰώνων s. αἰών 3 and 4; θ. αἰώνιος s. αἰώνιος 2; θ. ἀληθινός s. ἀληθινός 3b; εἷς ὁ θεός s. εἷς 2b; (ὁ) θ. (ὁ) ζῶν s. [ζάω] 1aε.—ὁ μόνος θεός the only God (4 Km 19:15, 19; Ps 85:10; Is 37:20; Da 3:45; Philo, Leg. All. 2, 1f; s. Norden, Agn. Th. 145) J 5:44 (some mss. lack τοῦ μόνου); 1 Ti 1:17.—ὁ μόνος ἀληθινὸς θ. (Demochares: 75 Fgm. 2 p. 135, 7 Jac. [in Athen. 6, 62, 253c] μόνος θ. ἀληθινός) J 17:3. cp. the sim. combinations w. μόνος θ. Ro 16:27; Jd 25. μόνος ὁ θεὸς μένει AcPl Ha 2, 27.—θ. σωτήρ s. σωτήρ 1.—OHoltzmann, D. chr. Gottesglaube, s. Vorgesch. u. Urgesch.1905; EvDobschütz, Rationales u. irrat. Denken über Gott im Urchristent.: StKr 95, 1924, 235–55; RHoffmann, D. Gottesbild Jesu ’34; PAlthaus, D. Bild Gottes b. Pls: ThBl 20, ’41, 81–92; Dodd 3–8; KRahner, Theos im NT: Bijdragen (Maastricht) 11, ’50, 212–36; 12, ’51, 24–52.
    ④ that which is nontranscendent but considered worthy of special reverence or respect, god (Artem. 2, 69 p. 161, 17: γονεῖς and διδάσκαλοι are like gods; Simplicius in Epict. p. 85, 27 acc. to ancient Roman custom children had to call their parents θεοί; s. 2 above and note on σέβομαι).
    ⓐ of humans θεοί (as אֱלֹהִים) J 10:34f (Ps 81:6; humans are called θ. in the OT also Ex 7:1; 22:27; cp. Philo, Det. Pot. Insid. 161f, Somn. 1, 229, Mut. Nom. 128, Omn. Prob. Lib. 43, Mos. 1, 158, Decal. 120, Leg. All. 1, 40, Migr. Abr. 84). θ. γίνεται τῶν λαμβανόντων (a benefactor) proves to be a god to recipients Dg 10:6 (cp. Pliny, NH 2, 7, 18; s. 2 above, beg.—Aristot., Pol. 3, 8, 1, 1284a of the superior pers. as a god among humans; Arcesilaus [III B.C.] describes Crates and Polemo as θεοί τινες=‘a kind of gods’ [Diog. L. 4, 22]; Antiphanes says of the iambic poet Philoxenus: θεὸς ἐν ἀνθρώποισιν ἦν [Athen. 14, 50, 643d]; Diod S 1, 4, 7 and 5, 21, 2 of Caesar; for honors accorded Demetrius, s. IKertész, Bemerkungen zum Kult des Demetrios Poliorketes: Oikumene 2, ’78, 163–75 [lit.]; Dio Chrys. 30 [47], 5 Πυθαγόρας ἐτιμᾶτο ὡς θεός; Heliod. 4, 7, 8 σωτὴρ κ. θεός, addressed to a physician; BGU 1197, 1 [4 B.C.] a high official, and 1201, 1 [2 B.C.] a priest θεός and κύριος; PMich 209, 11f [II/III A.D.] οἶδας ἄδελφε, ὅτει οὐ μόνον ὧς ἀδελφόν σε ἔχω, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὡς πατέρα κ. κύριον κ. θεόν; Just., A I, 26, 2 [Σίμων] θεὸς ἐνομίσθη καὶ … ὡς θεὸς τετίμηται; Tat. 3, 2 μὴ θεὸς ὤν [Empedocles]; Ath. 30, 2 Ἀντίνους … ἔτυχε νομίζεσθαι θεός of benefactors in gener. AcJ 27 [Aa II/1, 166, 4]).—JEmerton, JTS 11, ’60, 329–32.
    ⓑ of the belly (=appetite) as the god of certain people Phil 3:19 (cp. Athen. 3, 97c γάστρων καὶ κοιλιοδαίμων. Also Eupolis Com. [V B.C.] Fgm. 172 K. [in Athen. 3, 100b]; on the use of θ. in ref. to impersonal entities [e.g. Eur., Cyclops 316 of wealth as a god] s. DDD 693f).
    ⑤ of the devil ὁ θ. τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου 2 Cor 4:4 (s. αἰών 2a and WMüllensiefen, StKr 95, 1924, 295–99).—668–99. RAC XI 1202–78; XII 81–154; B. 1464. LfgrE s.v. θεός col. 1001 (lit.). Schmidt, Syn. IV 1–21. DELG. M-M. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > θεός

  • 29 κόσμος

    κόσμος, ου, ὁ (Hom.+)
    ① that which serves to beautify through decoration, adornment, adorning (Hom.+; Diod S 20, 4, 5 τῶν γυναικῶν τὸν κόσμον; OGI 531, 13; SIG 850, 10; IMaronIsis 41; PEleph 1, 4; PSI 240, 12 γυναικεῖον κόσμον; LXX; TestJud 12:1; JosAs 2:6 al.; Philo, Migr. Abr. 97 γυναικῶν κ.; Jos., Ant. 1, 250; 15, 5; Just., A II, 11, 4f) of women’s attire, etc. ὁ ἔξωθεν … κόσμος external adorning 1 Pt 3:3 (Vi. Hom. 4 of the inward adornment of a woman, beside σωφροσύνη; Crates, Ep. 9; Pythag., Ep. 11, 1; Plut., Mor. 141e; on the topic of external adornment cp. SIG 736, 15–26).
    ② condition of orderliness, orderly arrangement, order (Hom. et al.; s. HDiller, Die vorphilosophische Gebrauch von κ. und κοσμεῖν: BSnell Festschr., ’56, 47–60) μετὰ κόσμου in order Dg 12:9 (text uncertain; s. μετακόσμιος).
    ③ the sum total of everything here and now, the world, the (orderly) universe, in philosophical usage (so, acc. to Plut., Mor. 886b, as early as Pythagoras; certainly Heraclitus, Fgm. 66; Pla., Gorg. 508a, Phdr. 246c; Chrysipp., Fgm. 527 v. Arnim κόσμος σύστημα ἐξ οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς καὶ τῶν ἐν τούτοις περιεχομένων φύσεων. Likew. Posidonius in Diog. L. 7, 138; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 2 p. 391b, 9ff; 2 and 4 Macc; Wsd; EpArist 254; Philo, Aet. M. 4; Jos., Ant. 1, 21; Test12Patr; SibOr 7, 123; AssMos Fgm. b Denis [=Tromp p. 272]; Just., A I, 20, 2 al.; Ath. 19, 2 al.; Orig., C. Cels. 4, 68, 14; Did., Gen. 36, 7; 137, 13.—The other philosoph. usage, in which κ. denotes the heaven in contrast to the earth, is prob. without mng. for our lit. [unless perh. Phil 2:15 κ.=‘sky’?]). ἡ ἀέναος τοῦ κ. σύστασις the everlasting constitution of the universe 1 Cl 60:1 (cp. OGI 56, 48 εἰς τὸν ἀέναον κ.). Sustained by four elements Hv 3, 13, 3. πρὸ τοῦ τὸν κ. εἶναι before the world existed J 17:5. ἀπὸ καταβολῆς [κόσμου] from the beginning of the world Mt 13:35; 25:34; Lk 11:50; Hb 4:3; 9:26; Rv 13:8; 17:8. Also ἀπʼ ἀρχῆς κ. Mt 24:21 or ἀπὸ κτίσεως κ. Ro 1:20.—B 5:5 ἀπὸ καταβ. κ. evidently means at the foundation of the world (s. Windisch, Hdb. ad loc.). πρὸ καταβολῆς κ. before the foundation of the world J 17:24; Eph 1:4; 1 Pt 1:20 (on the uses w. καταβολή s. that word, 1). οὐδὲν εἴδωλον ἐν κ. no idol has any real existence in the universe (Twentieth Century NT) 1 Cor 8:4. Of the creation in its entirety 3:22. ὁ κόσμος ὅλος = πᾶσα ἡ κτίσις (Sallust. 21 p. 36, 13; TestSol 5:7; TestJob 33:4) Hs 9, 2, 1; 9, 14, 5. φωστῆρες ἐν κόσμῳ stars in the universe Phil 2:15 (s. above). Esp. of the universe as created by God (Epict 4, 7, 6 ὁ θεὸς πάντα πεποίηκεν, τὰ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ καὶ αὐτὸν τὸν κόσμον ὅλον; Wsd 9:9; 2 Macc 7:23 ὁ τοῦ κ. κτίστης; 4 Macc 5:25; Just., A I, 59, 1 al.; Ath. 8, 2 al.) ὁ ποιήσας τὸν κ. who has made the world Ac 17:24. ὁ κτίστης τοῦ σύμπαντος κ. 1 Cl 19:2; ὁ κτίσας τὸν κ. Hv 1, 3, 4; cp. m 12, 4, 2. ὁ τοῦ παντὸς κ. κυριεύων B 21:5. οὐδʼ εἶναι τὸν κόσμον θεοῦ ἀλλὰ ἀγγέλων AcPlCor 1:15. Christ is called παντὸς τοῦ κ. κύριος 5:5; and the κ. owes its origin to his agency J 1:10b. The world was created for the sake of the church Hv 2, 4, 1.—The universe, as the greatest space conceivable, is not able to contain someth. (Philo, Ebr. 32) J 21:25.
    ④ the sum total of all beings above the level of the animals, the world, as θέατρον ἐγενήθημεν (i.e. οἱ ἀπόστολοι) τῷ κόσμῳ καὶ ἀγγέλοις καὶ ἀνθρώποις 1 Cor 4:9. Here the world is divided into angels and humans (cp. the Stoic definition of the κόσμος in Stob., Ecl. I p. 184, 8 τὸ ἐκ θεῶν καὶ ἀνθρώπων σύστημα; likew. Epict 1, 9, 4.—Acc. to Ocellus Luc. 37, end, the κ. consists of the sphere of the divine beyond the moon and the sphere of the earthly on this side of the moon).
    ⑤ planet earth as a place of inhabitation, the world (SIG 814, 31 [67 A.D.] Nero, ὁ τοῦ παντὸς κόσμου κύριος; the meaning of the birthday of Augustus for the world OGI 458, 40 [=IPriene 105]; 2 Macc 3:12; Jos., Ant. 9, 241; 10, 205; Orig., C. Cels. 4, 68)
    ⓐ gener. Mk 16:15. τὰς βασιλείας τοῦ κ. Mt 4:8; ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κ. 26:13. Cp. 13:38 (cp. Hs 5, 5, 2); Mk 14:9; Hs 9, 25, 2. τὸ φῶς τοῦ κ. τούτου the light of this world (the sun) J 11:9. In rhetorical exaggeration ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν καταγγέλλεται ἐν ὅλῳ τ. κόσμῳ Ro 1:8 (cp. the Egypt. grave ins APF 5, 1913, 169 no. 24, 8 ὧν ἡ σωφροσύνη κατὰ τὸν κ. λελάληται). Abraham as κληρονόμος κόσμου heir of the world 4:13.—Cp. 1 Cor 14:10; Col 1:6. ἡ ἐν τῷ κ. ἀδελφότης the brotherhood in the (whole) world 1 Pt 5:9. ἐγένετο ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ κ. τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν our Lord has assumed the sovereignty of the world Rv 11:15. τὰ ἔθνη τοῦ κ. (not LXX, but prob. rabbinic אֻמּוֹת הָעוֹלָם=humankind apart fr. Israel; Billerb. II 191; Dalman, Worte 144f) the unconverted in the world Lk 12:30. In this line of development, κόσμος alone serves to designate the polytheistic unconverted world Ro 11:12, 15.—Other worlds (lands) beyond the ocean 1 Cl 20:8.—Many of these pass. bear the connotation of
    ⓑ the world as the habitation of humanity (as SibOr 1, 160). So also Hs 9, 17, 1f. εἰσέρχεσθαι εἰς τὸν κ. of entrance into the world by being born 1 Cl 38:3. ἐκ τοῦ κ. ἐξελθεῖν leave this present world (Philo, Leg. All. 3, 5 ἔξω τ. κόσμου φεύγειν; s. ἐξέρχομαι 5; cp. Hippol., Ref. 5, 16, 7) 1 Cor 5:10b; 2 Cl 8:3. γεννηθῆναι εἰς τὸν κ. be born into the world J 16:21. ἕως ἐσμὲν ἐν τούτῳ τῷ κ. 2 Cl 8:2. οὐδὲν εἰσφέρειν εἰς τὸν κ. (Philo, Spec. Leg. 1, 294 τὸν μηδὲν εἰς τὸν κόσμον εἰσενηνοχότα) 1 Ti 6:7 (Pol 4:1). πολλοὶ πλάνοι ἐξῆλθον εἰς τὸν κ. 2J 7.—ἐν τῷ κόσμω τούτῳ J 12:25 (κ. need not here be understood as an entity hostile to God, but the transition to the nuance in 7b, below, is signalled by the term that follows: ζωὴν αἰώνιον). ἵνα εἰς κόσμον προέλθῃ AcPlCor 2:6.
    ⓒ earth, world in contrast to heaven (Dio Chrys. 19 [36], 59; Iren., 1, 4, 2 [Harv. I 35, 5]; Orig., C. Cels. 8, 15, 24) ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ τούτῳ 2 Cl 19:3.—Esp. when mention is made of the preexistent Christ, who came fr. another world into the κόσμος. So, above all, in John (Bultmann, index I κόσμος) ἔρχεσθαι εἰς τὸν κ. (τοῦτον) J 6:14; 9:39; 11:27; 16:28a; 18:37; specif. also come into the world as light 12:46; cp. 1:9; 3:19. Sending of Jesus into the world 3:17a; 10:36; 17:18; 1J 4:9. His εἶναι ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ J 1:10a; 9:5a; 17:12 v.l. Leaving the world and returning to the Father 13:1a; 16:28b. Cp. 14:19; 17:11a. His kingship is not ἐκ τοῦ κ. τούτου of this world i.e. not derived from the world or conditioned by its terms and evaluations 18:36ab.—Also Χρ. Ἰησοῦς ἦλθεν εἰς τ. κόσμον 1 Ti 1:15; cp. ἐπιστεύθη ἐν κόσμῳ (opp. ἀνελήμφθη ἐν δόξῃ) 3:16.—εἰσερχόμενος εἰς τὸν κ. Hb 10:5.
    ⓓ the world outside in contrast to one’s home PtK 3 p. 15, 13; 19.
    ⑥ humanity in general, the world (TestAbr B 8 p. 113, 11 [Stone p. 74]; ApcEsdr 3:6 p. 27, 14; SibOr 1, 189; Just., A I, 39, 3 al.)
    ⓐ gener. οὐαὶ τῷ κ. ἀπὸ τῶν σκανδάλων woe to humankind because of the things that cause people to sin Mt 18:7; τὸ φῶς τοῦ κ. the light for humanity 5:14; cp. J 8:12; 9:5. ὁ σωτὴρ τοῦ κ. 4:42; 1J 4:14 (this designation is found in inscriptions, esp. oft. of Hadrian [WWeber, Untersuchungen z. Geschichte des Kaisers Hadrianus 1907, 225; 226; 229]).—J 1:29; 3:17b; 17:6.—κρίνειν τὸν κ. (SibOr 4, 184; TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 11 [Stone p. 32]; ApcMos 37) of God, Christ J 12:47a; Ro 3:6; B 4:12; cp. Ro 3:19. Of believers 1 Cor 6:2ab (cp. Sallust. 21 p. 36, 13 the souls of the virtuous, together w. the gods, will rule the whole κόσμος). Of Noah διʼ ἧς (sc. πίστεως) κατέκρινεν τὸν κ. Hb 11:7. ἡ ἁμαρτία εἰς τὸν κ. εἰσῆλθεν Ro 5:12; likew. θάνατος εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν κ. 1 Cl 3:4 (Wsd 2:24; 14:14). Cp. Ro 5:13; 1 Cor 1:27f. περικαθάρματα τοῦ κ. the refuse of humanity 4:13. Of persons before conversion ἄθεοι ἐν τῷ κ. Eph 2:12.—2 Cor 1:12; 5:19; Js 2:5; 1J 2:2; 4:1, 3. ἀρχαῖος κόσμος the people of the ancient world 2 Pt 2:5a; cp. vs. 5b; 3:6. Of pers. of exceptional merit: ὧν οὐκ ἦν ἄξιος ὁ κ. of whom the world was not worthy Hb 11:38.—ὅλος ὁ κ. all the world, everybody Ac 2:47 D; 1 Cl 5:7; cp. ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κ. 59:2; εἰς ὅλον τὸν κ. Hs 8, 3, 2. Likew. ὁ κόσμος (cp. Philo, De Prov. in Eus., PE 8, 14, 58) ὁ κ. ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ ἀπῆλθεν J 12:19. ταῦτα λαλῶ εἰς τὸν κ. 8:26; ἐν τῷ κ. 17:13; ἐγὼ παρρησίᾳ λελάληκα τῷ κ. 18:20; cp. 7:4; 14:22. ἵνα γνῷ ὁ κ. 14:31; cp. 17:23; ἵνα ὁ κ. πιστεύῃ 17:21.
    ⓑ of all humanity, but especially of believers, as the object of God’s love J 3:16, 17c; 6:33, 51; 12:47b.
    ⑦ the system of human existence in its many aspects, the world
    ⓐ as scene of earthly joys, possessions, cares, sufferings (cp. 4 Macc 8:23) τὸν κ. ὅλον κερδῆσαι gain the whole world Mt 16:26; Mk 8:36; Lk 9:25; 2 Cl 6:2 (cp. Procop. Soph., Ep. 137 the whole οἰκουμένη is an unimportant possession compared to ἀρετή). τὰ τερπνὰ τοῦ κ. the delightful things in the world IRo 6:1. οἱ χρώμενοι τὸν κ. ὡς μὴ καταχρώμενοι those who use the world as though they had no use of it or those who deal with the world as having made no deals with it 1 Cor 7:31a. ἔχειν τὸν βίον τοῦ κ. possess worldly goods 1J 3:17. τὰ τοῦ κόσμου the affairs of the world 1 Cor 7:33f; cp. 1J 2:15f. The latter pass. forms an easy transition to the large number of exprs. (esp. in Paul and John) in which
    ⓑ the world, and everything that belongs to it, appears as that which is hostile to God, i.e. lost in sin, wholly at odds w. anything divine, ruined and depraved (Herm. Wr. 6, 4 [the κόσμος is τὸ πλήρωμα τῆς κακίας]; 13, 1 [ἡ τοῦ κ. ἀπάτη], in Stob. p. 428, 24 Sc.; En 48:7; TestIss 4:6; AscIs 3:25; Hdb., exc. on J 1:10; Bultmann ad loc.—cp. Sotades Maronita [III B.C.] 11 Diehl: the κόσμος is unjust and hostile to great men) IMg 5:2; IRo 2:2. ὁ κόσμος οὗτος this world (in contrast to the heavenly realm) J 8:23; 12:25, 31a; 13:1; 16:11; 18:36; 1J 4:17; 1 Cor 3:19; 5:10a; 7:31b; Hv 4, 3, 2ff; D 10:6; 2 Cl 5:1, 5; (opp. ὁ ἅγιος αἰών) B 10:11. ‘This world’ is ruled by the ἄρχων τοῦ κ. τούτου the prince of this world, the devil J 12:31b; 16:11; without τούτου 14:30. Cp. ὁ κ. ὅλος ἐν τῷ πονηρῷ κεῖται the whole world lies in the power of the evil one 1J 5:19; cp. 4:4; also ὁ αἰὼν τοῦ κ. τούτου Eph 2:2 (s. αἰών 4).—Christians must have nothing to do with this world of sin and separation fr. God: instead of desiring it IRo 7:1, one is to ἄσπιλον ἑαυτὸν τηρεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ κ. keep oneself untainted by the world Js 1:27. ἀποφεύγειν τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κ. 2 Pt 2:20; cp. 1:4 (s. ἀποφεύγω 1).—Pol 5:3. ἡ φιλία τοῦ κ. ἔχθρα τ. θεοῦ ἐστιν Js 4:4a; cp. vs. 4b. When such an attitude is taken Christians are naturally hated by the world IRo 3:3; J 15:18, 19ad; 17:14a; 1J 3:13, as their Lord was hated J 7:7; 15:18; cp. 1:10c; 14:17; 16:20.—Also in Paul: God and world in opposition τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ κ. and τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἐκ θεοῦ the spirit of the world and the spirit that comes fr. God 1 Cor 2:12; σοφία τοῦ κ. and σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 1:20f. ἡ κατὰ θεὸν λύπη and ἡ τοῦ κ. λύπη godly grief and worldly grief 2 Cor 7:10. The world is condemned by God 1 Cor 11:32; yet also the object of the divine plan of salvation 2 Cor 5:19; cp. 1 Cl 7:4; 9:4. A Christian is dead as far as this world is concerned: διʼ οὗ (i.e. Ἰ. Χρ.) ἐμοὶ κ. ἐσταύρωται κἀγὼ κόσμῳ through Christ the world has been crucified for me, and I have been (crucified) to the world Gal 6:14; cp. the question τί ὡς ζῶντες ἐν κ. δογματίζεσθε; Col 2:20b. For στοιχεῖα τοῦ κ. Gal 4:3; Col 2:8, 20a s. στοιχεῖον.—The use of κ. in this sense is even further developed in John. The κ. stands in opposition to God 1J 2:15f and hence is incapable of knowing God J 17:25; cp. 1J 4:5, and excluded fr. Christ’s intercession J 17:9; its views refuted by the Paraclete 16:8. Neither Christ himself 17:14c, 16b; 14:27, nor his own 15:19b; 17:14b, 16a; 1J 3:1 belong in any way to the ‘world’. Rather Christ has chosen them ‘out of the world’ J 15:19c, even though for the present they must still live ‘in the world’ 17:11b; cp. 13:1b; 17:15, 18b. All the trouble that they must undergo because of this, 16:33a, means nothing compared w. the victorious conviction that Christ (and the believers w. him) has overcome ‘the world’ vs. 33b; 1J 5:4f, and that it is doomed to pass away 2:17 (TestJob 33:4; Kephal. I 154, 21: the κόσμος τῆς σαρκός will pass away).
    ⑧ collective aspect of an entity, totality, sum total (SIG 850, 10 τὸν κόσμον τῶν ἔργων (but s. 1 above); Pr 17:6a) ὁ κ. τῆς ἀδικίας ἡ γλῶσσα καθίσταται the tongue becomes (or proves to be) the sum total of iniquity Js 3:6 (so, approx., Meinertz; FHauck.—MDibelius, Windisch and ASchlatter find mng. 7b here, whereas ACarr, Exp. 7th ser., 8, 1909, 318ff thinks of mng. 1). Χρ. τὸν ὑπὲρ τῆς τοῦ παντὸς κόσμου τῶν σῳζομένων σωτηρίας παθόντα Christ, who suffered or died (s. πάσχω 3aα) for the salvation of the sum total of those who are saved MPol 17:2.—FBytomski, D. genet. Entwicklung des Begriffes κόσμος in d. Hl. Schrift: Jahrb. für Philos. und spekul. Theol. 25, 1911, 180–201; 389–413 (only the OT); CSchneider, Pls u. d. Welt: Αγγελος IV ’32, 11–47; EvSchrenck, Der Kosmos-Begriff bei Joh.: Mitteilungen u. Nachrichten f. d. evang. Kirche in Russland 51, 1895, 1–29; RLöwe, Kosmos u. Aion ’35; RBultmann, D. Verständnis v. Welt u. Mensch im NT u. im Griechentum: ThBl 19, ’40, 1–14; GBornkamm, Christus u. die Welt in der urchr. Botschaft: ZTK 47, ’50, 212–26; ALesky, Kosmos ’63; RVölkl, Christ u. Welt nach dem NT ’61; GJohnston, οἰκουμένη and κ. in the NT: NTS 10, ’64, 352–60; NCassem, ibid. 19, ’72/73, 81–91; RBratcher, BT 31, ’80, 430–34.—B. 13; 440. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κόσμος

  • 30 λέγω

    λέγω (Hom.+; on the mng. of the word ADebrunner, TW IV 71–73) impf. ἔλεγον (3 pl. ἔλεγαν s. B-D-F §82 app.; Mlt-H. 194; KBuresch, RhM 46, 1891, 224). Only pres. and impf. are in use; the other tenses are supplied by εἶπον (q.v., also B-D-F §101 p. 46; Mlt-H. 247), but the foll. pass. forms occur: fut. 3 sg. λεχθήσεται; aor. ptc. fem. sg. λεχθεῖσα (SyrBar 14:1), neut. pl. τὰ λεχθέντα (Jos. 24, 27; Esth 1:18; Papias, Just.), 3 sg. ἐλέχθη and pl. ἐλέχθησαν; pf. 3 sg. λέλεκται; plupf. ἐλέλεκτο; pf. ptc. λελεγμένος (all Just.; B-D-F §101) ‘say’ (beginning w. Hes. [Hom. uses the word in the senses ‘gather, collect’, as Il. 11, 755 al., and mid. ‘select’, as Il. 21, 27, and esp. of stories that one elects to ‘tell over’ or ‘recount’, as Od. 14, 197] and more freq. in Pind.; the usual word since the Attic writers; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph., apolog.).
    ① to express oneself orally or in written form, utter in words, say, tell, give expression to, the gener. sense (not in Hom., for this εἶπον, ἐν[ν]έπω, et al.)
    ⓐ w. an indication of what is said
    α. in the acc. ταύτην τ. παραβολήν Lk 13:6. (τὴν) ἀλήθειαν (Teles p. 4, 14; TestAbr A 16 p. 97, 27 [Stone p. 42]) J 8:45f; Ro 9:1; 1 Ti 2:7. ἀληθῆ (cp. Herodian 4, 14, 4) J 19:35. παροιμίαν οὐδεμίαν 16:29. τὶ καινότερον Ac 17:21 (w. ἀκούω as Pla., Prot. 310a; Dio Chrys. 3, 28; 4, 37). τί λέγουσιν what they say Mt 21:16; cp. Lk 18:6; 1 Cor 14:16. τί λέγω; what shall I say? Hb 11:32. ὸ̔ λέγει Lk 9:33; cp. 2 Ti 2:7; Phlm 21. ἃ λέγουσιν 1 Ti 1:7; AcPlCor 1:9. ταῦτα (τοῦτο) λ. (Jos., Vi. 291) Lk 9:34; 11:45b; 13:17; J 2:22; τοιαῦτα λ. Hb 11:14. τὸ αὐτὸ λέγειν be in agreement (not only in words: Thu. 4, 20, 4; 5, 31, 6; Polyb. 2, 62, 4; 5, 104, 1; Jos., Ant. 18, 375; 378) 1 Cor 1:10.—Also τινί τι tell someone someth. παραβολὴν αὐτοῖς Lk 18:1. μυστήριον ὑμῖν 1 Cor 15:51. τ. ἀλήθειαν ὑμῖν J 16:7. ὸ̔ λέγω ὑμῖν Mt 10:27. μηδενὶ λ. τοῦτο Lk 9:21. οὐδὲν αὐτῷ λέγουσιν they say nothing to him J 7:26. ταῦτα ἔλεγον ὑμῖν 2 Th 2:5.—τὶ πρός τινα (Pla, Gorg. 465a) παραβολὴν πρὸς αὐτούς Lk 5:36; cp. 14:7; 20:9.—24:10; 11:53 v.l. W. double acc. ἀδύνατα ταῦτα εἴρηκας Hm 11:19.
    β. by direct discourse or direct question foll., mostly abs. (extremely freq.) Mt 9:34; 12:44; Mk 3:30; Lk 5:39; J 1:29, 36; 1 Cor l2:3; Js 4:13. Also oft. introduced by recitative ὅτι Mt 9:18; Mk 1:15; 2:12; 3:21f; 5:28; 6:14f (on the textual problem s. FNeirynck, ETL 65, ’89, 110–18), 35; 7:20; Lk 1:24; 4:41; 17:10; 21:8 v.l.; J 6:14; 7:12; 8:33; Ac 2:13; 11:3 and oft.—καὶ ἔλεγεν Mk 4:21, 24, 26, 30 may = he used to say (so that they might memorize): WEssame, ET 77, ’66, 121.
    γ. by indirect discourse or indirect question foll.; abs. Mt 21:27; Mk 11:33c; Lk 20:8.—Introduced by ὅτι (Diod S 11, 4, 3; 11, 6, 2; 14, 4, 3; Petosiris, Fgm. 14c; Jos., Bell. 4, 543) Lk 22:70; Ac 20:23.—In acc. w. inf. τίνα λέγουσιν οἱ ἄνθρωποι εἶναι τ. υἱὸν τ. ἀνθρώπου; Mt 16:13; cp. vs. 15; Lk 9:20; 11:18; 23:2b; 24:23b; J 12:29a; Ac 4:32; 8:9; 17:7.—W. the inf. only Lk 24:23a; Js 2:14; 1J 2:6, 9.
    ⓑ w. indication of the pers. or thing about which someth. is said, or that is meant by someth.
    α. by a prep. περί τινος (Soph., Thu. et al.) οἱ Φαρισαῖοι ἔγνωσαν ὅτι περὶ αὐτῶν λέγει the Pharisees perceived that he was talking about them Mt 21:45. λέγει περὶ αὐτοῦ he said concerning him J 1:47; cp. 2:21; 11:13; 13:18, 22. εἴς τινα (Eur., Med. 453; X., Mem. 1, 5, 1) Ac 2:25; Eph 5:32. ἐπί τινα Hb 7:13. πρός τινα Lk 12:41; Hb 1:7.
    β. by the acc. alone mean someone or someth. (Demosth. 18, 88; Diod S 15, 23, 5; Phalaris, Ep. 142, 1 ἣν λέγω; Ael. Aristid. 48, 35 K.=24 p. 474 D.: τὸν Φιλάδελφον λέγων; Aelian, NA 8, 3 ὸ̔ δὲ λέγω, τοιοῦτόν ἐστιν, VH 3, 36; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 3; 10, 2; 2 Macc 14:7; Jos., Ant. 6, 86; TestSol 4:6 D τὸν δύστηνον λέγω γέροντα; Just., D. 130, 2 μετὰ τοῦ λαοῦ αὐτοῦ, λέγω Ἀβραὰμ καὶ Ἰσαὰκ …) τ. ἄνθρωπον τοῦτον ὸ̔ν λέγετε this man whom you mean Mk 14:71. ἔλεγεν τὸν Ἰούδαν J 6:71. συνείδησιν λέγω οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ I mean not your own conscience 1 Cor 10:29. τοῦτο δὲ λέγω but this is what I mean Gal 3:17; cp. 1 Cor 1:12a (Ptolem., Apotel. 2, 3, 12; 2, 11, 1 λέγω δέ … but I mean).—Mt 26:70; Mk 14:68; Lk 22:60. Cp. 4 end.
    γ. w. an indication of the one to whom someth. is said (on the synoptics and Ac s. WLarfeld, Die ntl. Ev. 1925, 237f); mostly in dat. (Aeschyl., Ag. 103; Herodas 4, 42 σοί; POxy 413, 99; s. also 1aα above) Mt 8:7; Mk 2:8, 17f; Lk 3:7; 5:24; J 1:39, 41, 43 and oft.—πρός τινα (Epict. 2, 17, 34 πρὸς ἄλλους ἐρεῖς; TestSol 1:6 D λέγει Νάθαν πρὸς τὸν ἄγγελον; ApcEsdr 6:16; s. also 1aα above) Mk 4:41; 16:3; Lk 4:21; 8:25 (λ. πρὸς ἀλλήλους as Jos., Ant. 2, 108; 9, 239); 9:23; 12:1; 16:1; J 2:3; 3:4; Ac 2:12; 28:4. μετά τινος: ἔλεγον μετʼ ἀλλήλων they said to each other J 11:56.
    δ. in other (s. 1aα, 1bα, 1bγ) prep. uses ἀφʼ ἑαυτοῦ (=ἀπὸ σεαυτοῦ v.l.) σὺ τοῦτο λέγεις; do you say this of your own accord? J 18:34 (TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 26 [Stone p. 38] al.). εἴς τινα against someone Lk 22:65. τὶ περί τινος say someth. about or concerning someone J 1:22; Ac 8:34; Tit 2:8. λ. περὶ τοῦ ἱεροῦ, ὅτι say, with reference to the temple, that Lk 21:5. τί σὺ λέγεις περὶ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι; what have you to say about him, since? J 9:17b (λ. τι περί τινος, ὅτι as Jos., Bell. 7, 215). τινὶ περί τινος say to someone about someone w. direct discourse foll. Mt 11:7. Also πρός τινα περί τινος (Jos., C. Ap. 1, 279 πρὸς αὐτὸν περὶ Μωϋσέως) Lk 7:24. πρός τινα ἐπί τινος bring charges against someone before someone Ac 23:30 (λ. ἐπί τινος as Jos., Vi. 258). λ. περί (v.l. ὑπέρ) τινος say (someth.), speak in someone’s defense 26:1.
    ε. in connection w. adverbs and adv. exprs.: Λυκαονιστὶ λ. say in (the) Lycaonian (language) Ac 14:11. καλῶς correctly (X., Mem. 2, 7, 11; 3, 3, 4; TestJob 7:8; EpArist 125; 196) J 8:48; 13:13. ὡσαύτως in the same way Mk 14:31. ἀληθῶς λέγω ὑμῖν truly, I tell you Lk 12:44; 21:3. κατὰ ἄνθρωπον (s. ἄνθρωπος 2b) Ro 3:5; Gal 3:15. κατὰ συγγνώμην, οὐ κατʼ ἐπιταγήν (s. ἐπιταγή) 1 Cor 7:6; cp. 2 Cor 8:8. καθʼ ὑστέρησιν Phil 4:11.
    ζ. w. emphasis on a certain kind of saying: φωνῇ μεγάλῃ in a loud voice Rv 5:12; 8:13 (cp. TestSol 16:1). Also ἐν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 14:7; 9. ἄγγελος ἐν φωνῇ λέγων GJs 20:4 (pap, s. deStrycker p. 387f). Opp. ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ (cp. Ps 13:1) 18:7. Also ἐν ἑαυτῷ (TestAbr B 3 p. 107, 11 [Stone p. 62]; TestJob 23:8) Mt 3:9; 9:21; Lk 3:8; 7:39, 49; GJs 1:1,4; 3:1; 5:1; cp. 1:3 (codd.); 2:1 v.l.; 14:1 v.l.
    η. in quotations fr. scripture (but s. also Epict. 1, 28, 4 ὡς λέγει Πλάτων with a quotation) Ἠσαί̈ας λέγει Isaiah says Ro 10:16, 20; 15:12. Μωϋσῆς λέγει 10:19. Δαυὶδ λέγει 11:9. ἡ γραφὴ λέγει (Just., D. 56, 17; cp. Paus. 2, 16, 4 τὰ ἔπη λέγει=the epic poets say) 4:3; 10:11; Gal 4:30; 1 Ti 5:18; Js 4:5; cp. 2:23; J 19:24; 2 Cl 14:2. In the case of the quot. formula λέγει without the subj. expressed, ἡ γραφή or ὁ θεός is easily understood (B-D-F §130, 3; Rob. 392.—On the omission of the subj. [Just., D. 101, 1 al.] cp. Epict. 1, 24, 12 λέγει σοι ‘θὲς κτλ.’=someone says to you ‘lay aside [this and that sign of prestige]’). It could prob. be translated indefinitely it says: Ro 15:10; 2 Cor 6:2; Gal 3:16; Eph 4:8; 5:14. ὁ θεός is obviously the subj. (Clearch., Fgm. 69c; Epict. 1, 1, 10 λέγει ὁ Ζεύς, followed by a divine revelation to Epictetus) Hb 5:6. λέγει ὁ κύριος 2 Cl 13:2; cp. Hb 8:8–10 (λέγει κύριος Am 5:27; Is 1:18; Jer 9:24; ParJer 6:16 al.). W. the passage more definitely indicated (schol. on Pind., O. 7, 66 ἐν τοῖς Μουσαίου λέγεται; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 3, 1179 Wendel v.l. ἐν τῇ γ´ τῆς Μουσαίου Τιτανογραφίας λέγεται ὡς) ἐν Ἠλίᾳ τί λέγει ἡ γραφή Ro 11:2 (Epict. 2, 17, 34 τί λέγει Χρύσιππος ἐν τοῖς περὶ τοῦ ψευδομένου). Δαυὶδ λέγει ἐν βίβλῳ ψαλμῶν Lk 20:42 (Epict. 2, 19, 14 Ἑλλάνικος λέγει ἐν τοῖς Αἰγυπτιακοῖς with quot.). ἐν τ. Ὡσηὲ λέγει Ro 9:25. λέγει ἐν τῷ Ἠσαί̈ᾳ 2 Cl 3:5 (Just., D. 123, 8); cp. ἐν Δαυίδ Hb 4:7. ὁ νόμος λέγει (cp. Pla., Crito 12, 50c; Epict. 3, 24, 43 τί γὰρ λέγει; [i.e. ὁ νόμος θεῖος]) 1 Cor 14:34. λέγει τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον Hb 3:7 (Just., D. 124, 1). Of words of Jesus: λέγει ὁ κύριος ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 2 Cl 8:5. λέγει ὁ κύριος 5:2; 6:1. λέγει αὐτός (i.e. ὁ Χριστός 2:7) 3:2. λέγει 4:2.
    θ. Hebraistic, though by no means limited to the OT (s. EKieckers, IndogF 35, 1915, 34ff; B-D-F §420; Mlt-H. 454), is the freq. use of λ. to introduce
    א. direct discourse (like לֵאמֹר), even though it is preceded by a verb of saying, or one that includes the idea of saying. Esp. λέγων is so used, as in the LXX, e.g. after ἀναβοᾶν, ἀνακράζειν Mk 1:23 (cp. Phlegon: 257 Fgm. 36, 3, 9 Jac. ἀνεκεκράγει λέγων), ἀπαγγέλλειν, ἀποκρίνεσθαι, ἀρνεῖσθαι, βοᾶν, γογγύζειν, διαγογγύζειν, διαλογίζεσθαι, διαμαρτύρεσθαι, διαστέλλεσθαι, διδάσκειν, δοξάζειν, εἰπεῖν Mt 22:1; Lk 12:16; 20:2 (s. B-D-F §101, p. 46; s. Rob. 882f; Kieckers, loc. cit. 36f), ἐμβριμᾶσθαι, ἐντέλλεσθαι, ἐπερωτᾶν, ἐπιτιμᾶν, ἐπιφωνεῖν, ἐρωτᾶν, κατηγορεῖν, κηρύσσειν, κράζειν, κραυγάζειν, λαλεῖν, μαρτυρεῖν, μεριμνᾶν, παραινεῖν, παρακαλεῖν, παρατιθέναι παραβολήν, προσεύχεσθαι, προσφωνεῖν, προφητεύειν, συζητεῖν, συλλαλεῖν, φωνεῖν, ψευδομαρτυρεῖν; s. these entries. Also after such verbs as denote an action accompanied by a statement of some kind: ἄγγελος κυρίου … ἐφάνη αὐτῷ λέγων appeared to him and said Mt 1:20; cp. 2:13; προσεκύνει αὐτῷ λ. fell before him and said 8:2; 9:18; cp. 14:33. ἅπτεσθαι 8:3; 9:29. ἔρχεσθαι Mk 5:35; Lk 18:3; 19:18 al.; cp. Lk 1:66; 5:8; 8:38; 15:9; Ac 8:10, 19; 12:7; 27:23f; 1 Cor 11:25 al.
    ב. the content of a written document (2 Km 11:15; 4 Km 10:6.—1 Macc 8:31; 11:57; Jos., Ant. 11, 26) ἔγραψεν λέγων (=יִכְתֹּב לֵאמֹר) he wrote as follows Lk 1:63.
    ג. orders or instructions to be carried out by other persons: ἔπεμψεν λέγων he sent and had them say Lk 7:19. ἀπέστειλεν λ. (Judg 11:14f; Jdth 3:1; JosAs 3:2; ParJer 3:21 al.) Mt 22:16; 27:19; Lk 7:20; 19:14; J 11:3. If the persons carrying out the orders are named, the ptc. can refer to them Mt 22:16 v.l.
    ד. When it is used w. the ptc. λ. appears in its finite forms ἐμπαίζοντες ἔλεγον they mocked and said Mt 27:41. προσελθὼν αὐτῷ λέγει he approached him and said Mk 14:45. διαρρήξας … λέγει he tore his clothes as he said vs. 63; cp. vs. 67; 15:35; Lk 6:20; J 1:36; Hb 8:8a al.—Also pleonastically (TestSol 2:2; TestJob 23:4; cp. Homeric ἀμειβόμενος προσέειπε Il. 3, 437 al., προσηύδα 14, 270 al.) ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει he answered Mk 8:29b; 9:5, 19; 10:24; 11:22; Lk 3:11; 11:45; 13:8. κράξας λέγει he cried out Mk 5:7; 9:24 (cp. TestAbr B 6 p. 109, 29 [Stone p. 66] κράζων καὶ λέγων; ApcEsdr 1:2 κράξας λέγων).
    ι. Now and then short exprs. with λ. are inserted as parentheses (B-D-F §465, 2; Rob. 434): πολλοί, λέγω ὑμῖν, ζητήσουσιν many, I tell you, will seek Lk 13:24. ἐν ἀφροσύνῃ λέγω 2 Cor 11:21b. ὡς τέκνοις λέγω 6:13.
    κ. ptc. w. the article τὰ λεγόμενα what was said (EpArist 215, 298; TestSol 15:13; ApcEsdr 2:15; Jos., Ant. 3, 85; 207; Just., D. 46, 4; 115, 1) Lk 18:34. προσεῖχον τ. λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τ. Φιλίππου (προσέχω 2b) Ac 8:6 (προσέχ. τοῖς λεγ. as Jos., Ant. 13, 303; τὰ λ. ὑπό τινος as Bell. 7, 56; 423; Esth 3:3, also Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 24, p. 408, 19 ὑπὸ τῶν μάντεων; Fgm. 30 p. 417, 23 Jac.; Epict. 1, 18, 1; SIG 679, 87). τὰ ἢ λεχθέντα ἢ πραχθέντα (Ps.-Libanius, Charact. Ep. p. 48, 18; 64, 18; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 55) Papias (2:15) in Eus., HE 3, 39, 15 (=Geb., Harn., Zahn 15, p. 72, 17).
    ② to express oneself in a specific way, say
    ⓐ ask w. direct question foll: Mt 9:14; 15:1; 18:1; Mk 5:30f. ὁ διδάσκαλος λέγει the Master asks 14:14. W. dat. of pers. and a direct question foll.: Mt 9:28a; 15:34; 16:15; 20:6.
    ⓑ answer (Lucian, Syr. Dea 18; TestSol 5:8 al.; ApcMos 5) Mt 17:25; Mk 8:24; J 1:21; 18:17b. W. dat. of pers. and direct discourse: Mt 4:10; 8:26; 9:28b; 14:17; 15:33; 18:22; 19:7, 20 al. W. dat of pers. and direct discourse introduced by ὅτι Mt 19:8.
    ⓒ order, command, direct, enjoin, recommend more or less emphatically (Syntipas p. 9, 4; Num 32:27; TestSol 4:7 D; TestAbr A 17 p. 98, 21 [Stone p. 44]) τὶ someth. 2 Cl 6:4. ἃ λέγω Lk 6:46. τί τινι command someone (to do) someth. ὅ τι ἂν λέγῃ ὑμῖν J 2:5b (TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 8 [Stone p. 10]); cp. Ac 21:23 (s. Num 32:31). ὅ ὑμῖν λέγω, πᾶσιν λέγω, γρηγορεῖτε the order I give to you I give to everyone: be on your guard! Mk 13:37 (for the formal nuance cp. reff. at end of this parag.). Gener. w. dat. of pers. and direct discourse foll.: Mt 5:44; 6:25; 8:4, 9; 26:52; Mk 3:3, 5; 5:8; 6:10; Lk 6:27; 7:8; J 2:7f. W. dat. of pers. and inf. foll.: Rv 10:9; 13:14; w. an inf. and a negative forbid (X., An. 7, 1, 40) Mt 5:34, 39.—Here belongs χαίρειν τινὶ λέγειν (Epict. 3, 22, 64) extend a greeting to someone, since the greeting consists in saying χαῖρε=‘may you prosper’ 2J 10f. W. ἵνα foll. recommend that, tell to τῷ λαῷ λέγων … ἵνα πιστεύσωσιν Ac 19:4. οὐ περὶ ἐκείνης λέγω ἵνα ἐρωτήσῃ I do not recommend that anyone should pray about that (sin) 1J 5:16. W. inf. foll.: Ro 2:22.—τάδε λέγει is the formal style of one who is giving an order (introductory formula for the edicts of the Persian kings [IMagnMai 115, 4]; in the OT a favorite method of introducing a prophetic statement [Thackeray p. 11]) Ac 21:11, 8, 12, 18; 3:1, 7, 14 (s. Gerhard, Philol. 64, 1905, 27ff; Thieme 23; GRudberg, Eranos 11, 1911, 177f; LLafoscade, De epistulis imperatorum 1902, 63 and 77. Roman edicts gener. use the simple λέγει as in the praescriptio of SEG IX, 8 I, 1–3 αὐτοκράτωρ Καίσαρ Σεβαστὸς … λέγει; also by Augustus: Jos., Ant., 16, 162; s. MBenner, The Emperor Says ’75).
    ⓓ assure, assert; w. direct discourse foll. Esp. in the formulas λέγω σοι, λ. ὑμῖν, ἀμὴν (ἀμὴν) λ. ὑμῖν (TestAbr A 8 p. 85, 19f [Stone p. 18]) Mt 11:22; 12:31; 19:24; 23:39; Mk 11:24; Lk 4:25; 7:9, 28; 9:27.—Mt 5:26; 6:2, 5; 8:10; Mk 3:28; 9:41; 10:15; Lk 4:24; 18:17, 29; 23:43; J 1:51; 3:3, 5, 11; 5:19, 24f; 6:26, 32 al.
    ⓔ maintain, declare, proclaim as teaching, w. direct discourse foll.: Gal 4:1; 1J 2:4. Foll. by acc. and inf. (X., Symp. 5, 5) Mt 22:23; Mk 12:18; Lk 20:41; 23:2b; Ro 15:8; 2 Ti 2:18. Foll. by ὅτι and direct discourse Mk 12:35b; 1 Cor 15:12. W. dat. of pers. and direct discourse after ὅτι Mt 5:20, 22, 28, 32; 8:11 al. Someth. like interpret εἰς w. ref. to Eph 5:32.—σὺ λέγεις (that is what) you maintain Mt 27:11; Mk 15:2; Lk 23:3 (cp. σὺ εἶπας Mt 26:25 and s. εἶπον 1a). Cp. also Lk 22:70; J 18:37 (s. OMerlier, RevÉtGr 46, ’33, 204–19; Goodsp., Probs. 64–68 [strong affirmative, yes]; MSmith, JBL 64, ’45, 506–10 [intentionally ambiguous, so you say, Tannaitic Parallels to the Gospels, ’51, 27–30]; DCatchpole, NTS 17, ’70/71, 213–26). τί λέγει ἡ γνῶσις; what does Gnosis teach about this? With the answer in direct discourse B 6:9 (cp. Epict. 3, 13, 11 καὶ τί λέγει [i.e., ὁ λόγος ὁ τῶν φιλοσόφων=philosophy]; direct discourse follows).
    ⓕ of written communications (Hdt. 3, 40; 122; 8, 140; UPZ 68, 5 [152 B.C.]; Jos., Ant. 13, 80) 1 Cor 6:5; 7:6; 15:51; 2 Cor 6:13; 8:8; Gal 5:2; Phil 4:11; Col 2:4; Phlm 21, al. in Paul.
    ③ to inform about / tell of someth., speak, report (Diog. L. 1, 31) τινί to someone Mk 7:36. τὶ about someth. (X., Cyr. 1, 2, 16 νῦν λέξομεν τὰς Κύρου πράξεις) τὴν ἔξοδον αὐτοῦ of his death (lit., departure) Lk 9:31. τὰ περὶ τ. βασιλείας Ac 1:3. τὰ γινόμενα ὑπʼ αὐτῶν αἰσχρόν ἐστιν καὶ λέγειν it is a disgrace even to speak of the things they do Eph 5:12 (Demosth. 10, 27 ὸ̔ … οὔτε λέγειν ἄξιον). τινὶ περί τινος bring a report about someone to someone Mk 1:30; 8:30. Likew. τινί τινα Phil 3:18.
    ④ to identify in a specific manner, call, name (Aeschyl. et al.) w. double acc. (Epict. 2, 19, 19 τί Στωικὸν ἔλεγες σεαυτόν; Diog. L. 8, 88 τὴν ἡδονὴν λέγειν τὸ ἀγαθόν=call pleasure the [real] good; 2 Macc 4:2; Just., D. 61, 1 ἀρχηστρατηγὸν ἑαυτὸν λέγει) τινά τι describe someone as someth. τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν; why do you call me good? Mk 10:18; Lk 18:19. Δαυὶδ λέγει αὐτὸν κύριον David calls him Lord Mk 12:37. πατέρα ἴδιον ἔλεγεν τὸν θεόν he called God his Father J 5:18. οὐκέτι λέγω ὑμᾶς δούλους I no longer call you slaves 15:15; cp. Ac 10:28; Rv 2:20. Pass. be called, named Mt 13:55; Hb 11:24. ὁ λεγόμενος the so-called (Epict. 4, 1, 51 οἱ βασιλεῖς λεγόμενοι; Socrat., Ep. 14, 7 ὁ λ. θάνατος) λεγόμενοι θεοί so-called gods 1 Cor 8:5 (Herm. Wr. 2, 14 the λεγόμενοι θεοί in contrast to μόνος ὁ θεός. Somewhat differently Jos., Ant. 12, 125 Ἀντίοχος ὁ παρὰ τοῖς Ἕλλησιν θεὸς λεγόμενος). οἱ λεγόμενοι ἀκροβυστία ὑπὸ τῆς λ. περιτομῆς those who are called ‘the uncircumcised’ (i.e. gentiles) by the so-called circumcision (i.e. Jews) Eph 2:11. ὁ λεγόμενος (B-D-F §412, 2; Rob. 1107; cp. BGU 1117, 9 [13 B.C.]; PRyl 133, 11; 137, 19; 2 Macc 12:17; 14:6; 3 Macc 1:3; TestAbr B 13 p. 118, 14 [Stone p. 84]; TestJob 46:5; 47:1; Just., A I, 22, 1, D. 32, 1) who is called … Mt 1:16; 27:17; whose surname is (Appian, Liby. 49 §213 Ἄννων ὁ μέγας λεγόμενος; Jos., Ant. 13, 370, Vi. 4) 10:2; Col 4:11; by name Mt 9:9; 26:3, 14; 27:16; Mk 15:7; Lk 22:47; J 9:11.—Of things: of the name of a star Rv 8:11. Of place-names (BGU 326, 19 [II A.D.]; 2 Macc 9:2; 12:21) Mt 2:23; 26:36; J 4:5; 11:54; 19:13; Ac 3:2; 6:9; Hb 9:3. Of the local, vernacular name λ. Ἑβραϊστί J 5:2 v.l.; 19:17b.—In the transl. of foreign words (which) means: ὅ ἐστιν κρανίου τόπος λεγόμενος which means ‘Place of a Skull’ Mt 27:33b. Cp. also J 4:25; 11:16; 20:24; 21:2. Also ὸ̔ λέγεται 20:16. ὸ̔ λ. μεθερμηνευόμενον which, when translated, means 1:38. ἣ διερμηνευομένη λέγεται Ac 9:36.—Other exx. of the significance mean (Aeschyl. et al.) are Gal 4:1; 2 Cl 6:4; 8:6 Cp. 1bβ.—B. 1253f; 1257; 1277. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv. S. λόγος, ῥῆμα, λαλέω.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > λέγω

  • 31 μετά

    μετά (Hom.+) prep. w. gen. and acc., in the NT not (B-D-F §203; Rob. 610) w. dat.—For lit. s. ἀνά, beg.; also for μετά (and σύν) Tycho Mommsen, Beiträge zu d. Lehre v. den griech. Präp. 1895. Basic idea: ‘in the vicinity of ’.
    A. w. gen. with
    ① marker of placement, with, among, in company with someone (Gen 42:5; EpArist 180; En 22:13; 99:10; PsSol 4:6; JosAs 10:3 al.) or someth. ἦν μετὰ τῶν θηρίων he was among the wild animals Mk 1:13 (Diog. L. 6, 92 μόσχοι μετὰ λύκων). ἦν συγκαθήμενος μ. τῶν ὑπηρετῶν he sat down among the servants 14:54. μετὰ ἀνόμων ἐλογίσθη he was classed among the criminals Mk 15:28; Lk 22:37. τὸ μέρος αὐτοῦ μ. τῶν ἀπίστων θήσει he will assign him his lot among the faithless (unbelievers?) Lk 12:46; cp. Mt 24:51. ζῆτειν τὸν ζῶντα μ. τῶν νεκρῶν seek the living among the dead Lk 24:5. μὴ γογγύζετε μετʼ ἀλλήλων do not grumble among yourselves J 6:43. εἱστήκει Ἰούδας μετʼ αὐτῶν 18:5. ἡ σκηνὴ τ. θεοῦ μετὰ τ. ἀνθρώπων Rv 21:3a. μετὰ τῶν νεφελῶν in the midst of the clouds 1:7.
    ② marker of assoc. in gener. sense denoting the company within which someth. takes place, with
    ⓐ w. gen. of pers. in company w. whom someth. takes place
    α. w. verbs of going, remaining, etc. προσέρχεσθαι μ. τινος come (in company) with someone Mt 20:20; cp. 5:41; Mk 1:29; 3:7; 5:24, 37; 11:11; 14:17; Lk 2:51; 6:17; 9:49; 14:31; J 3:22b; 11:54; Ac 24:1; Gal 2:1. Angels accompanying the Messiah Mt 25:31; cp. 16:27; Mk 8:38; 1 Th 3:13; 2 Th 1:7. περιπατεῖν μ. τινος (Menand., Fgm. 178 Kö., Sam. 587f S. [242f Kö.]; ApcEsdr 6:12) J 6:66. γίνεσθαι μ. τινος be, remain with someone Ac 7:38; 9:19; 20:18; AcPlCor 2:4 (ApcMos 2 ἐγένοντο μ. ἀλλήλων). οἱ μ. αὐτοῦ γενόμενοι his companions Mk 16:10. μένειν μ. τινος stay with someone 1J 2:19 (ParJer 3:15). ζήσασα μ. ἀνδρός Lk 2:36. ἀκολουθεῖν μ. τινος follow (after) someone Rv 6:8; 14:13 (s. ἀκολουθέω 2).
    β. used w. trans. verbs ἄγειν τινὰ μ. ἑαυτοῦ bring someone along (s. ἄγω 1b) 2 Ti 4:11. παραλαμβάνειν τινὰ μεθʼ ἑαυτοῦ take or bring someone along (as a companion) (Gen 22:3) Mt 12:45; 18:16; Mk 14:33. ἔχειν τι μ. ἑαυτοῦ have someth. with oneself: bread 8:14; τινά someone (PGM 4, 1952): the lame Mt 15:30; the poor Mk 14:7; Mt 26:11; J 12:8; the bridegroom Mk 2:19b. Pass. συγκατεψηφίσθη μετὰ τ. ἕνδεκα ἀποστόλων he was chosen (to serve) with the eleven apostles Ac 1:26 (cp. Himerius, Or. 44 [=Or. 8], 3 μετὰ τῶν θεῶν ἀριθμούμενος=numbered with the gods).
    γ. esp. εἶναι μ. τινος be with someone, in someone’s company.
    א. lit. of close association: the disciples w. Jesus Mt 26:69, 71; Mk 3:14; 14:67; Lk 22:59; J 15:27; 17:24. Also of accompaniment for a short time Mt 5:25; J 3:26; 9:40; 12:17; 20:24, 26. Of Jesus’ association w. his disciples 13:33; 14:9; 16:4; 17:12. Of relations between the superintendent and the congregation μετὰ τ. ἐπισκόπου εἶναι be with, on the side of, the supervisor/bishop IPhld 3:2. οἱ μ. τινος (sc. ὄντες) someone’s friends, companions, etc. (Diod S 17, 96, 2 οἱ μεθʼ Ἡρακλέους; SIG 175, 5; 659, 5; 826e II, 30; Am 4:2; 8:10; Gen 24:59; 1 Macc 7:23; JosAs 27:7; AscIs 2:15; 3:6, 14; Jos., Vi. 397, Ant. 7, 20; Just., D. 8, 3 al.) Mt 12:3f; 26:51; Mk 1:36; 2:25; Lk 6:3f. Of things ἄλλα πλοῖα ἦν μ. αὐτοῦ other boats were with him, accompanied him Mk 4:36. ὁ μισθός μου μετʼ ἐμοῦ (sc. ἐστιν) Rv 22:12. τὸ πῦρ ἐστι μετʼ αὐτοῦ the fire (of judgment) awaits him (the interpretation of the Armenian text; sim. the Lat.) AcPlCor 2:37.
    ב. in ref. to supportiveness be with someone, stand by, help someone of God’s help (Gen 21:20; 26:3; 28:20 al.; Jos., Ant. 15, 138) J 3:2; 8:29; 16:32; Ac 7:9 (cp. Gen 39:2, 21); 10:38; cp. Mt 1:23 (Is 8:8); Lk 1:28; Ro 15:33. Of God’s hand (1 Ch 4:10) Lk 1:66; Ac 11:21. Of Christ: Mt 28:20; Ac 18:10.
    ג. a favorite expr. in conclusions of letters ὁ θεὸς τῆς ἀγάπης καὶ εἰρήνης ἔσται μ. ὑμῶν will be with you 2 Cor 13:11; cp. Phil 4:9; ὁ κύριος κτλ. 2 Th 3:16 (cp. Ruth 2:4); 2 Ti 4:22. ἡ χάρις τοῦ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ μ. ὑμῶν (sc. ἔσται) 1 Cor 16:23; cp. 1 Th 5:28; 1 Cl 65:2. μ. τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν Gal 6:18; Phil 4:23; Phlm 25; 21:9. μ. πάντων ὑμῶν 2 Th 3:18; cp. Eph 6:24. Short and to the point: ἡ χάρις μ. ὑμῶν Col 4:18; 1 Ti 6:21; cp. Tit 3:15; Hb 13:25. ἔσται μεθʼ ἡμῶν χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη 2J 3.—ἡ ἀγάπη μου μ. πάντων ὑμῶν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ my love is with you all in Christ Jesus 1 Cor 16:24. ἡ χάρις τοῦ κυρίου Ἰ. Χρ. καὶ ἡ ἀγάπη τ. θεοῦ καὶ ἡ κοινωνία τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν 2 Cor 13:13 (WvanUnnik, Dominus Vobiscum: liturg. formula, TManson memorial vol., ’59, 270–305; on the Trinitarian formula s. the lit. on πνεῦμα 8).—In the expr. ὅσα ἐποίησεν ὁ θεὸς μ. αὐτῶν Ac 14:27; 15:4 (cp. Hs 5, 1, 1) ὤν could be supplied what God has done in helping them; but ποιεῖν can just as well go w. μ. αὐτῶν has done for them, after the analogy of עָשָׂה עִם פּ׳ (Tob 12:6; 13:7 ἃ ποιήσει μεθʼ ὑμῶν; Jdth 8:26 ὅσα ἐποίησεν μετὰ Ἀβραάμ; 15:10; 1 Macc 10:27. In addition, cp. BGU 798, 8 εὐχαριστοῦμεν τῇ ἡμῶν δεσποίνῃ εἰς πάντα τὰ καλὰ ἃ ἐποίησεν μετὰ τ. δούλων αὐτῆς. But s. also LMaloney, ‘All That God Had Done with Them’ ’91, 118–21: God works ‘with’ the apostles and ‘through’ them). Here also belongs ποιεῖν ἔλεος μ. τινος have mercy on someone, show mercy to someone (Gen 24:12; 2 Km 3:8; JosAs 23:4) Lk 1:72; 10:37 (MWilcox, The Semitisms in Ac, ’65, 84f). ἐμεγάλυνεν κύριος τὸ ἔλεος αὐτοῦ μετʼ αὐτῆς the Lord has shown great mercy to her 1:58 (cp. 1 Km 12:24; Ps 125:2f).—In πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης μ. τοῦ προσώπου σου Ac 2:28=Ps 15:11 the LXX has literally translated אֶת־פָּנֶיךָ; it means in your presence.
    ד. in ref. to taking sides or being allied in some way with someone: in contrast to εἶναι κατά τινος be against someone is εἶναι μ. τινος be with someone, on someone’s side Mt 12:30a; Lk 11:23a (AFridrichsen, ZNW 13, 1912, 273–80).
    ⓑ to denote the company in which an activity or experience takes place: ἀνακεῖσθαι μ. τινος recline at table with someone (for a meal) Mt 26:20. ἀνακλιθῆναι 8:11; cp. Lk 24:30. βασιλεύειν Rv 20:4, 6. γρηγορεῖν Mt 26:38, 40. δειπνεῖν Rv 3:20 (TestJob 15:2). δουλεύειν Gal 4:25. ἐμπαίζειν Mt 27:41. ἐσθίειν 9:11; 24:49; Mk 2:16ab; 14:14, 18; Lk 5:30 (TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 9 [Stone p. 10]). ἠρώτα … ἵνα φάγῃ μ. αὐτοῦ he asked (him) to eat with him 7:36 (cp. TestAbr B 6 p. 110, 21 [Stone p. 68]; JosAs 7:1). εὐφραίνεσθαι 15:29; Ro 15:10 (Dt 32:43). κλαίειν 12:15b. κληρονομεῖν Gal 4:30 (Gen 21:10; Just., D. 26, 1; cp. συγκληρονομεῖν JosAs 24:9). πίνειν Mt 26:29. ποιεῖν τὸ πάσχα celebrate the Passover (with someone) 26:18. συνάγειν 12:30b; Lk 11:23b. συνεσθίειν Gal 2:12. ταράττεσθαι Mt 2:3. τρώγειν J 13:1 v.l. χαίρειν Ro 12:15a.
    ⓒ The associative aspect can also derive expression from the fact that two opposite parties exert influence upon one another or that one party brings the other to adopt a corresponding, and therefore common, attitude
    α. in friendly, or at least not in hostile, fashion: εἰρηνεύειν (3 Km 22:45) Ro 12:18; cp. 2 Ti 2:22; Hb 12:14. εὐθηνίαν ἔχειν Hm 2:3. κοινωνίαν ἔχειν 1J 1:3a, 7. λαλεῖν μετά τινος (cp. Gen 31:24, 29; 1 Macc 7:15) Mk 6:50; J 4:27ab. συλλαλεῖν μ. τινος Mt 17:3; Ac 25:12. συμβούλιον διδόναι Mk 3:6. συνάγεσθαι Mt 28:12; J 18:2. συνᾶραι λόγον Mt 18:23; 25:19. ἐγένοντο φίλοι ὅ τε. Ἡρῴδης καὶ ὁ Πιλᾶτος μετʼ ἀλλήλων Lk 23:12. οἱ μοιχεύοντες μετʼ αὐτῆς those who commit adultery with her Rv 2:22. πορνεύειν (cp. Ezk 16:34; TestAbr A 10 p. 88, 7 [Stone p. 24]) 17:2; 18:3, 9. μολύνεσθαι 14:4 (cp. En 12:4 τῶν γυναικῶν ἐμιάνθησαν).
    β. in hostile fashion; after verbs of fighting, quarreling, etc. to denote the pers. w. whom the strife is being carried on πολεμεῖν μ. τινος carry on war with = against someone (נִלְחַם עִם פּ׳ 1 Km 17:33; 3 Km 12:24; ParJer 7:10. But s. also OGI 201, 3 ἐπολέμησα μετὰ τῶν Βλεμύων; BGU 1035, 9; 11. Also in Mod. Gk. [AThumb, Hdb. der neugriech. Volkssprache2 1910 §162, 1 note]) Rv 2:16; 12:7; 13:4; 17:14 (B-D-F §193, 4; Rob. 610). Also πόλεμον ποιεῖν (Gen 14:2; 1 Ch 5:19) 11:7; 12:17; 13:7 (Da 7:21 Theod.); 19:19. ζητεῖν μ. τινος deliberate or dispute w. someone J 16:19; cp. 3:25 (cp. ApcEsdr 2:6 δικάζου μεθʼ ἡμῶν). κρίνεσθαι go to law w. someone 1 Cor 6:6. κρίματα ἔχειν μ. τινος have lawsuits w. someone vs. 7.
    ⓓ of any other relation betw. persons, whether already existing or brought about in some manner εἶδον τὸ παιδίον μ. Μαρίας Mt 2:11. ἀνταποδοῦναι ὑμῖν ἄνεσιν μ. ἡμῶν 2 Th 1:7. ἐκδέχομαι αὐτὸν μ. τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 Cor 16:11. Of delegations, composed of several units Mt 22:16; 2 Cor 8:18. συμφωνεῖν Mt 20:2.
    ⓔ of things ὧν τὸ αἷμα ἔμιξεν μ. τῶν θυσιῶν αὐτῶν Lk 13:1. Pass. πιεῖν οἶνον μ. χολῆς μεμιγμένον Mt 27:34.
    ⓕ to show a close connection betw. two nouns, upon the first of which the main emphasis lies (Thu. 7, 75, 3 λύπη μ. φόβου; Pla., Rep. 9, 591b ἰσχύν τε καὶ κάλλος μετὰ ὑγιείας λαμβάνειν; Ar. 11:2 τόξον ἔχειν μ. φαρέτρας) ἀγάπη μ. πίστεως Eph 6:23. πίστις μ. σωφροσύνης 1 Ti 2:15. εὐσέβεια μ. αὐταρκείας 6:6. Cp. Eph 4:2b; Col 1:11; 1 Ti 1:14. φάρμακον μ. οἰνομέλιτος ITr 6:2.
    ③ marker of attendant circumstances of someth. that takes place, with
    ⓐ of moods, emotions, wishes, feelings, excitement, states of mind or body (Xenophon Eph. 1, 15, 5 μ. ἀδείας; 2, 10, 4 μ. ἐπιμελείας; PAmh II, 133, 11 μετὰ πολλῶν κόπων; PLond II, 358, 8 p. 172 [II A.D.]; SIG index IV p. 445f; LXX [Johannessohn, Präp. 209ff]; En et al.) μ. αἰδοῦς with modesty 1 Ti 2:9. μ. αἰσχύνης with shame (s. αἰσχύνη 2) Lk 14:9. μ. εὐνοίας Eph 6:7. μ. εὐχαριστίας Phil 4:6; 1 Ti 4:3f; cp. Ac 24:3. μετὰ χαρᾶς (2 Macc 15:28; 3 Macc 5:21; 6:34; En 10:16; PsSol 8:16 al.; s. χαρά 1a) 1 Th 1:6; Hb 10:34; 13:17; cp. Phil 2:29. μ. φόβου καὶ τρόμου 2 Cor 7:15; Eph 6:5; Phil 2:12. μ. φόβου καὶ χαρᾶς Mt 28:8. μ. πραΰτητος καὶ φόβου 1 Pt 3:16. μ. παρρησίας (Lev 26:13; 1 Macc 4:18; s. παρρησία 3a) Ac 2:29; 4:29, 31; 28:31; Hb 4:16. μ. πεποιθήσεως 1 Cl 31:3. μ. σπουδῆς (3 Macc 5:24, 27; Mel., P. 12, 80) Mk 6:25; Lk 1:39. μ. ταπεινοφροσύνης Eph 4:2a; cp. Ac 20:19. μ. ὀργῆς (3 Macc 6:23; TestJob 4:4) Mk 3:5. μ. δακρύων in tears (3 Macc 1:16; 4:2; 5:7; TestAbr A 9 p. 86, 19 [Stone p. 20]; 14 p. 94, 21 [St. p. 36]; JosAs 28:8; ApcEsdr 6:23; s. δάκρυον) Mk 9:24 v.l.; Hb 5:7; 12:17. μ. εἰρήνης (s. εἰρήνη 1b) Ac 15:33; Hb 11:31.
    ⓑ of other accompanying phenomena (Antig. Car. 148 μετὰ φλογὸς καίεσθαι) μ. διωγμῶν though with persecutions Mk 10:30. μ. ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν 1 Ti 4:14. μ. νηστειῶν Ac 14:23. μ. θορύβου (Jos., Ant. 5, 216) 24:18. μ. παρακλήσεως 2 Cor 8:4. μ. παρατηρήσεως Lk 17:20. μ. ὕβρεως καὶ πολλῆς ζημίας Ac 27:10 (s. ὕβρις 3). μ. φαντασίας 25:23. μ. δυνάμεως καὶ δόξης Mt 24:30; Mk 13:26; Lk 21:27 (Just., A I, 50, 1 al. μ. δόξης, D. 132, 1 w. δυνάμεως). μ. ἐξουσίας καὶ ἐπιτροπῆς Ac 26:12 (Jos., Ant. 20, 180 μετʼ ἐξουσίας). μ. βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ ἐξάγειν τινά (s. βραχίων) Ac 13:17. μ. φωνῆς μεγάλης w. a loud voice Lk 17:15 (cp. EpArist 235; 281; JosAs 28:9). μ. σάλπιγγος with a trumpet call Mt 24:31 (Plut., Mor. 1135f μετʼ αὐλῶν=with the sound of flutes). σφραγίσαντες τ. λίθον μετὰ τ. κουστωδίας makes the stationing of the guard an accompaniment to the sealing of the stone Mt 27:66 (another possibility here is the instrumental use of μετά [Lycurgus the orator 124 μ. παραδειγμάτων διδάσκειν; SEG VIII, 246, 8 μετὰ κυνῶν—an instrument of torture—βασανίσαι; CWessely, Neue griech. Zauberpap. 1893, 234 γράφε μ. μέλανος; 2 Macc 6:16]: secure the stone by means of a guard; s. σφραγίζω 1).
    ⓒ of concrete objects, which serve as equipment (Appian, Maced. 9 §4 μετὰ χρυσῶν στεφάνων; POxy 123, 15; 19 μετὰ τῶν χλαμύδων εἰσβῆναι; 1 Esdr 5:57; Jdth 15:13; TestJob 24:10 μ. ψαλίδος; JosAs 7:4 μ. χρυσίου καὶ ἀργύριου; ParJer 9:31 μ. πολλῶν λίθων; ApcSed 7:10 μ. χαλιναρίου; ApcMos 40 μ. τῶν σινδόνων) μ. μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων Mt 26:47; 55; Mk 14:43, 48; Lk 22:52. μ. φανῶν καὶ λαμπάδων καὶ ὅπλων (Xenophon Eph. p. 336, 20 μ. λαμπάδων) J 18:3.
    B. w. acc. In our lit. only in the mng. after, behind
    ① marker of position that is behind someth., behind (Hom.+; Polyb.; Just., A I, 13, 4; Tat. 2, 2; not LXX) μ. τὸ δεύτερον καταπέτασμα behind the second curtain Hb 9:3.
    ② marker of time after another point of time, after (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX)
    ⓐ with the time expressly given μ. πολὺν χρόνον (2 Macc 6:1.—μετʼ οὐ πολὺν χρ.: Hero Alex. I p. 340, 6; SIG 1169, 54; Jos., Vi. 407) Mt 25:19. μ. τοσοῦτον χρόνον (4 Macc 5:7; ParJer 5:18) Hb 4:7. μ. χρόνον τινά (Diod S 9, 10, 2; Witkowski 26, 9 [III B.C.]; Jos., Ant. 8, 398; cp. En 106:1 μ. δὲ χρόνον; ApcSed 13:3 μ. χρόνον) Hv 1, 1, 2f; Hs 5, 2, 5; 9, 13, 8. μ. ἡμέρας ἕξ after six days Mt 17:1; Mk 9:2 (ApcMos 42 μ. τὰς ἓξ ἡμέρας). μ. τρεῖς ἡμέρας (Artem. 4, 33 p. 224, 5; Polyaenus 6, 53; 8, 62; EpArist 301; TestJob 52:1f; 53:7; ParJer 9:14; Jos., Ant 7, 280) Mt 27:63; Mk 8:31; 10:34; Lk 2:46; cp. μ. τρεῖς ἡμέρας καὶ τρεῖς νύκτας AcPlCor 2:30. μ. δύο ἡμέρας Mt 26:2; Mk 14:1 (cp. Caesar, Bell. Gall. 4, 9, 1 post tertiam diem=on the third day). μ. τινας ἡμέρας Ac 15:36; 24:24. μετʼ οὐ πολλὰς ἡμέρας (Artem. 1, 78 p. 72, 30; Jos., Ant. 5, 328, Vi. 309) Lk 15:13. οὐ μ. πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας not long after these days = within a few days Ac 1:5 (B-D-F §226; 433, 3; Rob. 612; 1158; Dssm., ZVS 45, 1913, 60). W. gen. foll. μ. ἡμέρας εἴκοσι τῆς προτέρας ὁράσεως twenty days after the former vision Hv 4, 1, 1 (cp. Biogr. p. 31 μετὰ ξ´ ἔτη τοῦ Ἰλιακοῦ πολέμου; Gen 16:3). μ. τρεῖς μῆνας Ac 28:11. μ. τρία ἔτη Gal 1:18. ὁ μ. τετρακόσια καὶ τριάκοντα ἔτη γεγονὼς νόμος 3:17.
    ⓑ w. designations that are general, but include the idea of time: μ. τὴν ἄφιξίν μου Ac 20:29. μ. τὸ πάσχα after the Passover 12:4. μ. τὴν μετοικεσίαν Βαβυλῶνος Mt 1:12.
    ⓒ gener. μ. τὴν θλῖψιν after the (time of) tribulation Mk 13:24; cp. μ. τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν ἡμερῶν ἐκείνων Mt 24:29. μ. τὴν ἔγερσιν 27:53. μ. τὴν ἀνάγνωσιν Ac 13:15. μ. τὸ βάπτισμα 10:37. μ. μίαν καὶ δευτέραν νουθεσίαν Tit 3:10. μ. τὸ ψωμίον after he had eaten the piece of bread J 13:27.—Quite gener. μ. τοῦτο after this, afterward (Lucian, Hermot. 31; Gen 18:5; Lev 14:19; EpArist 258; TestJob 11:4; TestReub 1:9; TestLevi 6:3; Just., D. 57, 4) J 2:12; 11:7, 11; 19:28; Hb 9:27; Rv 7:1. μ. ταῦτα after this (Aeneas Tact. 240; 350; Diod S 1, 7, 1; Ex 3:20; 11:8 and oft.; TestJob 21:4; TestLevi 6:5; TestJos 19:5; JosAs 10:15; ParJer 3:10; ApcEsdr 4:36; ApcMos 2; Just., A I, 32, 6) Mk 16:12; Lk 5:27; 10:1 and oft. μ. οὐ πολύ (Dio Chrys. 56 [73], 8; Lucian, Scyth. 1; Herodian 1, 9, 7; BGU 614, 14; Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 96 II, 9; 1 Esdr 3:22; Jos., Ant. 12, 132) not long afterward Ac 27:14. μ. μικρόν a short while afterward Mt 26:73; Mk 14:70 (Just., D. 56, 17). Also μ. βραχύ Lk 22:58 (cp. μετʼ ὀλίγον: Lucian, Dial, Mort. 15, 3; PRyl 77, 41; Wsd 15:8; Jdth 13:9; TestAbrA 7 p. 84, 8 [Stone p. 16]; GrBar 9:3; Jos., Ant. 12, 136; 10:15; Just., D. 56, 18).
    ⓓ w. subst. aor. inf. foll.
    α. w. acc. (SIG 633, 105; 640, 13; 695, 78; 1233, 1; Sir 46:20; Jdth 16:25; Bar 1:9; 1 Macc 1:1, 9; TestAbr B 12 p. 116, 11 [Stone p. 80]; 117, 5 [St. p. 82]; TestJob 5:2; TestLevi 18:1; ApcMos 1; Just., A I, 50, 12.—B-D-F §406, 3; Rob. 979) μ. τὸ ἐγερθῆναί με after I am raised up Mt 26:32; Mk 14:28. μ. τὸ παραδοθῆναι τὸν Ἰωάννην after John was arrested Mk 1:14.—Ac 1:3; 7:4; 10:41; 15:13; 19:21; 20:1; Hv 2, 1, 3; m 4, 1, 7; Hs 8, 1, 3; 8, 2, 5.
    β. without acc. (Aelian, VH 12, 1 p. 118, 27; Herodian 2, 9, 5; SIG 976, 39; UPZ 110, 193 [164 B.C.]; Sir 23:20; 32:18 v.l.; 1 Macc 1:20; ApcMos 26:42f; Just., A I, 14, 1; Tat. 16, 1) μ. τὸ λαλῆσαι αὐτοῖς after he had spoken to them Mk 16:19.—Lk 12:5; 1 Cor 11:25; Hb 10:26.—W. perf. inf. 10:15.—M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > μετά

  • 32 νοῦς

    νοῦς, νοός, νοί̈, νοῦν, ὁ (contracted fr. νόος.—Hom. et al.; pap, LXX, TestSol, Test12Patr; SibOr 3, 574; EpArist 276; Philo [oft.]; Jos., Ant. 3, 65, Vi. 122 al.; apolog. exc. Mel.—On its declension s. B-D-F §52; W-S. §8, 11; Mlt-H. 127; 142) in the NT only in Pauline lit. except for Lk 24:45; Rv 13:18; 17:9.
    ⓐ mind, intellect as the side of life contrasted w. physical existence, the higher, mental part of a human being that initiates thoughts and plans (Apollonius of Tyana [I A.D.] in Eus., PE 4, 13; Orig., C. Cels. 8, 38, 21; 52, 24; Did., Gen. 57, 26): ὁ νόμος τοῦ νοός (μου) the law of (my) intellect Ro 7:22 v.l., 23. (Opp. σάρξ) τῷ ν. δουλεύειν νόμῳ θεοῦ serve the law of God w. one’s intellect vs. 25.
    ⓑ understanding, mind as faculty of thinking (Hippol., Ref. 4, 43, 2; Did., Gen. 44, 11 [w. λογισμός]) διανοίγειν τὸν ν. τινος open someone’s mind Lk 24:45. ὁ ἔχων νοῦν whoever has understanding Rv 13:18 (ν. ἔχειν as Aristoph., Equ. 482; Hyperid. 3, 23; Dio Chrys. 17 [34], 39; 23 [40], 26; Ael. Aristid. 23, 12 K.=42 p. 771 D.; EpArist 276; Philo, Mos. 1, 141; TestReub 3:8; Ar. 9, 5; Just., D. 30, 1; 60, 2; Tat. 1, 2). ὧδε ὁ ν. ὁ ἔχων σοφίαν here is (i.e. this calls for) a mind with wisdom 17:9. νοῦν διδόναι grant understanding Dg 10:2. Also παρέχειν νοῦν 11:5. ὁ σοφίαν καὶ νοῦν θέμενος ἐν ἡμῖν τῶν κρυφίων αὐτοῦ who has placed in us wisdom and understanding of his secrets 6:10. ποικίλος τῇ φρονήσει καὶ τῷ ν. diverse in thought and understanding Hs 9, 17, 2a; cp. vs. 2b. Of the peace of God ἡ ὑπερέχουσα πάντα ν. which surpasses all power of thought Phil 4:7. In contrast to the divine Pneuma which inspires the ‘speaker in tongues’: ὁ ν. μου ἄκαρπός ἐστιν my mind is unfruitful, because it remains inactive during the glossolalia 1 Cor 14:14. προσεύχεσθαι τῷ ν. (opp. τῷ πνεύματι.—νόῳ as instrumental dat. as Pind., P. 1, 40) pray w. the understanding vs. 15a; ψάλλειν τῷ ν. vs. 15b. θέλω πέντε λόγους τῷ ν. μου λαλῆσαι I would rather speak five words w. my understanding vs. 19 (cp. 1QS 10:9).—As a designation of Christ (cp. SibOr 8, 284) in a long series of expressions (w. φῶς) Dg 9:6 (cp. Epict. 2, 8, 2 τίς οὖν οὐσία θεοῦ; νοῦς, ἐπιστήμη, λόγος ὀρθός. Theoph. Ant. 1, 3 [p. 62, 14] νοῦν ἐὰν εἴπω, φρόνησιν αὐτοῦ [sc. τοῦ θεοῦ] λέγω; Ath. 10, 2 νοῦς καὶ λόγος τοῦ πατρὸς ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ. The god Νοῦς in the Herm. Wr.: Rtzst., Mysterienrel3 47 al.; JKroll, D. Lehren des Hermes Trismegistos 1914, 10ff; 60ff al.; PGM 5, 465 ὁ μέγας Νοῦς; Iren. 1, 1, 1 [Harv. I 9, 7], 1, 2, 1 [Harv. I 13, 7]: names of Aeons in gnostic speculation).—Also the state of sensibleness, composure in contrast to the disturbances of soul brought about by the expectation of the Parousia, σαλευθῆναι ἀπὸ τοῦ νοός be shaken, and thereby lose your calmness of mind 2 Th 2:2.
    ② way of thinking, mind, attitude, as the sum total of the whole mental and moral state of being (Just., A I, 15, 16)
    ⓐ as possessed by every person μεταμορφοῦσθαι τῇ ἀνακαινώσει τοῦ ν. be transformed by the renewing of the mind, which comes about when Christians have their natural νοῦς penetrated and transformed by the Spirit which they receive at baptism Ro 12:2 (s. Ltzm., Hdb. ad loc.). W. the same sense ἀνανεοῦσθαι τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ ν. ὑμῶν you must adopt a new attitude of mind Eph 4:23 (the piling up of synonyms is a distinctive feature of Eph; s. MDibelius, Hdb. exc. on Eph 1:14). Of polytheists παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ θεὸς εἰς ἀδόκιμον ν. God abandoned them to depraved thoughts Ro 1:28. τὰ ἔθνη περιπατεῖ ἐν ματαιότητι τοῦ ν. αὐτῶν the nations/gentiles live w. their minds fixed on futile things Eph 4:17. Of one who is in error: εἰκῇ φυσιούμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ ν. τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ groundlessly conceited (lit. ‘puffed up’) by his mind, fixed on purely physical things Col 2:18. κατεφθαρμένος τὸν ν. with depraved mind 2 Ti 3:8; also διεφθαρμένος τὸν ν. 1 Ti 6:5 (B-D-F §159, 3; Rob. 486). μεμίανται αὐτῶν καὶ ὁ ν. καὶ ἡ συνείδησις their minds and consciences are unclean Tit 1:15. ὁ ν. αὐτῶν περὶ τὴν πρᾶξιν αὐτῶν καταγίνεται their mind is fixed on their own business Hm 10, 1, 5.
    ⓑ specif. of the Christian attitude or way of thinking κατηρτισμένοι ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ νοί̈ 1 Cor 1:10. Through baptism believers receive μίαν φρόνησιν καὶ ἕνα νοῦν Hs 9, 17, 4; cp. 9, 18, 4. εἷς νοῦς, μία ἐλπίς is to rule in the church IMg 7:1.
    ③ result of thinking, mind, thought, opinion, decree (Hom. et al. of gods and humans; cp. Hippol., Ref. 9, 10, 8) ἕκαστος ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ ν. πληροφορείσθω each pers. is to be fully convinced in his own mind Ro 14:5. τίς γὰρ ἔγνω νοῦν κυρίου; who has known the Lord’s thoughts? (Is 40:13) 11:34; 1 Cor 2:16a. When Paul continues in the latter passage vs. 16b w. ἡμεῖς νοῦν Χριστοῦ ἔχομεν, he is using the scriptural word νοῦς to denote what he usu. calls πνεῦμα (vs. 14f). He can do this because his νοῦς (since he is a ‘pneumatic’ person) is filled w. the Spirit (s. 2a above), so that in his case the two are interchangeable. Such a νοῦς is impossible for a ‘psychic’ person.—OMoe, Vernunft u. Geist im NT: ZST 11, ’34, 351–91; RJewett, Paul’s Anthropological Terms, ’71, 358–90; TKrischer, Glotta 62, ’84, 141–49. S. καρδία end; νοέω end.—B. 1198. DELG s.v. νόος. Schmidt, Syn. III 621–55. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > νοῦς

  • 33 πληρόω

    πληρόω impf. 3 sg. ἐπλήρου; fut. πληρώσω; 1 aor. ἐπλήρωσα; pf. πεπλήρωκα; plpf. 3 sg. πεπληρώκει (on the omission of the augm. B-D-F §66, 1; Mlt-H. 190). Pass.: impf. ἐπληρούμην; 1 fut. πληρωθήσομαι; 1 aor. ἐπληρώθην; pf. πεπλήρωμαι; plpf. 3 sg. πεπλήρωτο (s. B-D-F §66, 1; Mlt-H. 190) (Aeschyl., Hdt.+).
    ① to make full, fill (full)
    ⓐ of things τὶ someth. τὴν γῆν (Orig., C. Cels. 3, 8, 29) B 6:12 (Gen 1:28; cp. Ocellus [II B.C.] c. 46 Harder [1926] τὸν πλείονα τῆς γῆς τόπον πληροῦσθαι with their descendants). Pass., of a net ἐπληρώθη Mt 13:48. πᾶσα φάραγξ πληρωθήσεται Lk 3:5 (Is 40:4). ὀθόνη πλοίου ὑπὸ πνεύματος πληρουμένη a ship’s sail filled out by the wind MPol 15:2.—τόπον πληρῶσαι fill a space Hs 9, 7, 5. ἐπλήρωσεν τοὺς τύπους τῶν λίθων he filled in the impressions of the stones (that had been removed) 9, 10, 2.—Also of sounds and odors (as well as light: schol. on Pla. 914b) ἦχος ἐπλήρωσεν τὸν οἶκον a sound filled the house Ac 2:2 (Diod S 11, 24, 4 αἱ οἰκίαι πένθους ἐπληροῦντο=with cries of grief). ἡ οἰκία ἐπληρώθη ἐκ τῆς ὀσμῆς the house was filled with the fragrance J 12:3 (cp. Diod S 4, 64, 1 τὴν οἰκίαν πληρώσειν ἀτυχημάτων; Ael. Aristid. 36, 84 K.=48 p. 471 D.: ὅταν οἴκημα πληρωθῇ; TestAbr A 4 p. 80, 23f [Stone p. 8] πλήρωσον τὸν οἶκον ἡμῶν [with aromatic plants]).—Also in other ways of the filling of impers. objects with real but intangible things or qualities: τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ (i.e. of the martyr Polycarp) χάριτος ἐπληροῦτο MPol 12:1 (χάρις 1 and 4). πεπληρώκατε τὴν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τῆς διδαχῆς ὑμῶν you have filled Jerusalem with your teaching Ac 5:28. ὑμεῖς πληρώσατε (aor. impv. as a rhetor. demand; vv.ll. πληρώσετε, ἐπληρώσατε) τὸ μέτρον τῶν πατέρων ὑμῶν of filling the measure of sins (cp. Da 8:23) Mt 23:32; cp. ἐπεὶ πεπλήρωτο ἡ ἡμετέρα ἀδικία Dg 9:2. θεὸς πληρώσει πᾶσαν χρείαν ὑμῶν Phil 4:19 (cp. Thu. 1, 70, 7). πλ. τὴν καρδίαν τινός fill someone’s heart, i.e. take full possession of it (cp. Eccl 9:3) ἡ λύπη πεπλήρωκεν ὑμῶν τ. καρδίαν J 16:6. διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ σατανᾶς τ. καρδίαν σοὺ; Ac 5:3 (Ad’Alès, RSR 24, ’34, 199f; 474f prefers the v.l. ἐπήρωσεν; against him LSt.-Paul Girard, Mém. de l’inst. franc. du Caire 67, ’37, 309–12). ὁ ψευδοπροφήτης πληροῖ τὰς ψυχάς Hm 11:2 (θείου πνεύματος πληρώσαντος … τὰς ψυχάς Orig., C. Cels. 3, 81, 20).—Of Christ, who passed through all the cosmic spheres ἵνα πληρώσῃ τὰ πάντα Eph 4:10 (cp. Jer 23:24; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 4 πάντα πεπλήρωκεν ὁ θεός, Vita Mos. 2, 238, Conf. Lingu. 136; Ath.8, 3 πάντα γὰρ ὑπὸ τοῦτου πεπλήρωται). The mid. in the sense of the act. (B-D-F §316, 1; Rob. 805f. Cp. X., Hell. 6, 2, 14; 35 al.; Plut., Alc. 211 [35, 6]) τὸ πλήρωμα τοῦ τὰ πάντα ἐν πᾶσιν πληρουμένου Eph 1:23 (πλήρωμα 2).
    ⓑ of persons fill w. powers, qualities, etc. τινὰ someone ὁ ἄγγελος τοῦ προφητικοῦ πνεύματος πληροῖ τὸν ἄνθρωπον Hm 11:9a. τινά τινος someone with someth. (OdeSol 11:2; B-D-F §172; Rob. 510) πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης Ac 2:28 (Ps 15:11). Cp. Ro 15:13 (cp. POxy 3313, 3 χαρ[ᾶ ἡμ]ᾶ ἐπλήρωσα). τινά τινι someone with someth. (B-D-F §195, 2) ὁ διάβολος πληροῖ αὐτὸν τῷ αὐτοῦ πνεύματι Hm 11:3.—Mostly pass., in pres., impf., fut., aor. become filled or full (Scholiast on Pla. 856e of μάντις: ἄνωθεν λαμβάνειν τὸ πνεῦμα καὶ πληροῦσθαι τοῦ θεοῦ); in the perf. have been filled, be full: w. gen. of thing (Diod S 20, 21, 3 τῶν βασιλείων πεπληρωμένων φόνων=when the palace was full of murderous deeds; Diog. L. 5, 42 τὸ πάσης ἀρετῆς πεπληρῶσθαι) Lk 2:40 v.l.; Ac 13:52 (Jos., Ant. 15, 421 ἐπληρώθη χαρᾶς; cp. Just., A I, 49, 5); Ro 15:14; 2 Ti 1:4; Dg 10:3; IRo ins; Ox 840, 40f.—W. dat. of thing (Aeschyl., Sept. 464 et al.; Parthenius 10, 4 ἄχει ἐπληρώθη; 2 Macc 7:21; 3 Macc 4:16; 5:30; Just., D. 7, 1 πνεύματι. Cp. BGU 1108, 12 [I B.C.]) Lk 2:40; Ro 1:29; 2 Cor 7:4; Hm 5, 2, 7; 11:9b v.l. (for πλησθεί).—W. acc. of thing (pap use the act. and pass. w. acc. of thing in the sense ‘settle in full by [paying or delivering] someth.’: PLond II, 243, 11 p. 300 [346 A.D.]; 251, 30; POxy 1133, 8; 1134, 6; PFlor 27, 3 al.; B-D-F §159, 1; Rob. 510) πεπληρωμένοι καρπὸν δικαιοσύνης Phil 1:11. Cp. Col 1:9.—W. ἐν and dat. of thing ἐν πνεύματι with the Spirit Eph 5:18. ἐν πίστει καί ἀγάπῃ ISm ins. Cp. Col 4:12 v.l., in case ἐν κτλ. here belongs to πεπληρωμένοι (s. πληροφορέω 1b); but mng. 3 also merits attention. ἐστὲ ἐν αὐτῷ πεπληρωμένοι Col 2:10 is prob. different, meaning not ‘with him’, but in him or through him.—Abs. Eph 3:19 (εἰς denotes the goal; s. πλήρωμα 3b). πεπλήρωμαι I am well supplied Phil 4:18 (cp. Diod S 14, 62, 5 πληροῦν τινα=supply someone fully).
    ② to complete a period of time, fill (up), complete (Pla., Leg. 9, 866a, Tim. 39d; Plut., Lucull. 516 [35, 8]; POxy 275, 24 [66 A.D.] μέχρι τοῦ τὸν χρόνον πληρωθῆναι; 491, 6; PTebt 374, 10; BGU 1047 III, 12 al. in pap; Gen 25:24; 29:21; Lev 8:33; 12:4; 25:30; Num 6:5; Tob 10:1; 1 Macc 3:49 al.; TestAbr B; TestJob 28:1 ἐπλήρωσα εἴκοσι ἔτη; ApcMos 13; Jos., Ant. 4, 78; 6, 49) in our lit. only pass. (Ps.-Callisth. 3, 17, 39; 41 πεπλήρωται τὰ τῆς ζωῆς ἔτη; Did., Gen. 195, 23) πεπλήρωται ὁ καιρός Mk 1:15; cp. J 7:8. χρόνος instead of καιρός Hs 6, 5, 2; cp. πληρωθέντος τοῦ χρόνου (pl.: Iren. 1, 17, 2 [Harv. I 168, 13]) when the time has elapsed 1 Cl 25:2. πεπλήρωνται αἱ ἡμέραι the days are over, have come to an end Hv 2, 2, 5. πληρωθέντων … τῶν ἡμερῶν GJs 5:2 (TestAbr B 1 p. 105, 4 [Stone p. 58]).—Ac 9:23. πεπλήρωται ὁ ὅρος τῶν ἐτῶν ending of Mk in the Freer ms. 6f. πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσερακοντα when forty years had passed Ac 7:30 (TestJud 9:2).—24:27; 1 Cl 25:5. ὡς ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος when he had reached the age of 40 Ac 7:23 (PFlor 382, 6; 11 ἑβδομήκοντα ἔτη ἐπλήρωσας). ἐπληρώθησαν οἱ μῆνες αὐτῆς ὡς εἶπεν ἕξ (Anna) had passed her sixth month as (the angel) said GJs 5:2 (but s. deStrycker ad loc.).
    ③ to bring to completion that which was already begun, complete, finish (X., Hell. 4, 8, 16; Herodian 1, 5, 8; Olympiodorus, Life of Plato p. 2 Westerm.: the hymn that was begun; Himerius, Or. 6 [2], 14 πληρῶσαι τὴν ἐπιθυμίαν=fully gratify the desire, in that the Persians wished to incorporate into their great empire a small piece of the west, i.e. Greece; ApcSed 13:1 τὴν μετάνοιαν) τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ bring (the preaching of) the gospel to completion by proclaiming it in the most remote areas Ro 15:19; sim. πλ. τ. λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ Col 1:25. πληρώσατέ μου τ. χαράν Phil 2:2. Cp. 2 Th 1:11.—Pass. 2 Cor 10:6; Col 4:12 v.l. (s. 1b above). ὁ πᾶς νόμος ἐν ἑνὶ λόγῳ πεπλήρωται Gal 5:14 because of its past tense is prob. to be translated the whole law has found its full expression in a single word or is summed up under one entry (s. s.v. λόγος 2a; some would put this passage under 4b). οὐχ εὕρηκά σου ἔργα πεπληρωμένα Rv 3:2. Johannine usage speaks of joy that is made complete (the act. in Phil 2:2, s. above) J 3:29; 15:11; 16:24; 17:13; 1J 1:4; 2J 12.
    ④ to bring to a designed end, fulfill a prophecy, an obligation, a promise, a law, a request, a purpose, a desire, a hope, a duty, a fate, a destiny, etc. (Pla., Gorg. 63, 507e ἐπιθυμίας [cp. TestJos 4:7 ἐπιθυμίαν]; Herodian 2, 7, 6 ὑποσχέσεις; Epict. 2, 9, 3; 8 ἐπαγγελίαν; Plut., Cic. 869 [17, 5] τὸ χρεών [=destiny]; Procop. Soph., Ep. 68 τ. ἐλπίδας; Spartan ins in BSA 12, 1905/6, p. 452 [I A.D.] τὰ εἰθισμένα; pap, LXX; Philo, Praem. 83 τὰς θείας παραινέσεις μὴ κενὰς ἀπολιπεῖν τῶν οἰκείων πράξεων, ἀλλὰ πληρῶσαι τοὺς λόγους ἔργοις ἐπαινετοῖς=the divine exhortations it [God’s people] did not leave devoid of appropriate performance, but carried out the words with praiseworthy deeds; Jos., Ant. 5, 145; 14, 486).
    ⓐ of the fulfillment of divine predictions or promises. The word stands almost always in the passive be fulfilled (Polyaenus 1, 18 τοῦ λογίου πεπληρωμένου; Alex. Aphr., Fat. 31, II 2 p. 202, 21 ὅπως πληρωθῇ τὸ τῆς εἱμαρμένης δρᾶμα; 3 Km 2:27; TestBenj 3:8 προφητεία; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 8, 4) and refers mostly to the Tanach and its words: τοῦτο γέγονεν ἵνα πληρωθῇ τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑπὸ κυρίου διὰ τοῦ προφήτου (cp. 2 Ch 36:21) Mt 1:22; cp. 2:15, 17, 23; 4:14; 8:17; 12:17; 13:35; 21:4; 26:54, 56; 27:9 (PNepper-Christensen, D. Mt-evangelium, ’58, 136–62); Mk 14:49; 15:27(28) v.l. (after Lk 22:37); Lk 1:20; 4:21; 21:22 v.l.; 24:44; J 12:38; 13:18; 15:25; 17:12; 19:24, 36; Ac 1:16 (cp. Test Napht 7:1 δεῖ ταῦτα πληρωθῆναι); Js 2:23. A vision ἔδει γὰρ τὸ τῆς … ὀπτασίας πληρωθῆναι for what (Polycarp) had seen in his vision was destined to be fulfilled MPol 12:3.—The OT type finds its fulfillment in the antitype Lk 22:16 (cp. MBlack, ET 57, ’45/46, 25f, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 229–36). At times one of Jesus’ predictions is fulfilled: J 18:9, 32. The act. bring to fulfillment, partly of God, who brings divine prophecies to fulfillment Ac 3:18; MPol 14:2, partly of humans who, by what they do, help to bring divine prophecies to realization (Vi. Thu. 1, 8 [=OxfT p. xii, 8] οὗτος ἐπλήρωσε τὰ μεμαντευμένα) Ac 13:27. Jesus himself fulfills his destiny by dying, as God’s messengers Moses and Elijah foretell Lk 9:31.—GPt 5:17.
    ⓑ a prayer (Chariton 8, 1, 9 πεπληρώκασιν οἱ θεοὶ τὰς εὐχάς; Aristaen., Ep. 1, 16 the god πεπλήρωκε τ. εὐχήν [=prayer]; IBM 894, 8 of answered prayer) πληρῶσαί μου τὴν αἴτησιν answer my prayer ITr 13:3 (cp. Ps 19:5; TestAbr A 15 p. 96, 4 [Stone p. 40]). A command(ment) (Herodian 3, 11, 4 τὰς ἐντολάς; POxy 1252A, 9 πλήρωσον τὸ κεκελευσμένον; 1 Macc 2:55; SibOr 3, 246) πεπλήρωκεν ἐντολὴν δικαιοσύνης Pol 3:3. νόμον (Ps.-Demetr., Form. Ep. p. 12, 9; cp. Hdt. 1, 199 ἐκπλῆσαι τὸν νόμον) Ro 13:8; pass. Gal 5:14 (but s. 3 above and cp. Aeschyl., Ag. 313). τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου Ro 8:4. πᾶσαν δικαιοσύνην (cp. 4 Macc 12:14 πλ. τὴν εὐσέβειαν) Mt 3:15 (s. AFridrichsen: Congr. d’Hist. du Christ. I 1928, 167–77; OEissfeldt, ZNW 61, ’70, 209–15 and s. βαπτίζω 2a, end); pass. ISm 1:1 (s. δικαιοσύνη 3b). Also ἐστὶ πρέπον πληρωθῆναι πάντα it is fitting that all things should be fulfilled GEb 18, 40 (cp. APF 3, 1906, 370 II, 7 [II A.D.] ἕως ἅπαντα τὰ κατʼ ἐμὲ πεπληρῶσθαι).—A duty or office βλέπε τὴν διακονίαν …, ἵνα αὐτὴν πληροῖς pay attention to your duty … and perform it Col 4:17 (cp. CIG 2336 πλ. πᾶσαν ἀρχὴν κ. λειτουργίαν; PFlor 382, 40 πληρῶσαι τὴν λειτουργίαν; ISardRobert I p. 39 n. 5).—Abs., in the broadest sense and in contrast to καταλύειν (s. καταλύω 3a): οὐκ ἦλθον καταλῦσαι ἀλλὰ πληρῶσαι Mt 5:17; depending on how one prefers to interpret the context, πληρόω is understood here either as fulfill=do, carry out, or as bring to full expression=show it forth in its true mng., or as fill up=complete (s. AKlöpper, ZWT 39, 1896, 1ff; AHarnack, Aus Wissenschaft u. Leben II 1911, 225ff, SBBerlAk 1912, 184ff; JHänel, Der Schriftbegriff Jesu 1919, 155ff; Dalman, Jesus 56–66 confirm; WHatch, ATR 18, ’36, 129–40; HLjungman, D. Gesetz Erfüllen, ’54; WKümmel, Verheissung u. Erfüllung3, ’56; JO’Rourke, The Fulfilment Texts in Mt, CBQ 24, ’62, 394–403).
    ⑤ to bring to completion an activity in which one has been involved from its beginning, complete, finish (1 Macc 4:19) πάντα τὰ ῥήματα Lk 7:1 (cp. TestBenj 12:1 τοὺ λόγου). τὴν διακονίαν Ac 12:25. [τὰς τοῦ κυρίου οἰκο]νομίας πληρῶσε (=πληρῶσαι) to carry out to the end God’s designs (i.e. Paul’s life as programmed by God is about to be concluded) AcPl Ha 5, 27; cp. the restoration in 6, 26 ο̣ἰ̣κο̣ν̣[ομίαν πληρώσω] (cp. the description of Jeremiah’s death ParJer 9:31 ἐπληρώθη αὐτοῦ οἰκονομία); τὸν δρόμον Ac 13:25; cp. the abs. ἕως πληρώσωσιν until they should complete (their course) Rv 6:11 v.l. (s. 6 below). τὸ ἔργον Ac 14:26. τὴν εὐχήν MPol 15:1. τὰ κυνηγέσια 12:2 (another probability here is the quite rare [Hdt. 2, 7 al.] intr. sense be complete, be at an end). Pass. be accomplished, be finished, at an end (Ps.-Callisth. 1, 24, 9 as a saying of Philip as he lay dying: ἐμοῦ τὸ πεπρωμένον πεπλήρωται = my destiny has been fulfilled; Mel., P. 43, 297 ὁ νόμος ἐπληρώθη τοῦ εὐαγγελίου φωτισθέτος) ὡς ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα Ac 19:21. ἄχρι οὗ πληρωθῶσιν καιροὶ ἐθνῶν Lk 21:24. αἱ ἀποκαλύψεις αὗται τέλος ἔχουσιν• πεπληρωμέναι γάρ εἰσιν these revelations have attained their purpose, for they are completed Hv 3, 3, 2.
    ⑥ complete a number, pass. have the number made complete (since Hdt. 7, 29; Iren. 1, 16, 2 [Harv. I 161, 6]; Hippol., Ref. 6, 51, 2) ἕως πληρωθῶσιν οἱ σύνδουλοι Rv 6:11 (s. 5 above).—CMoule, Fulfilment Words in the NT, NTS 14, ’68, 293–320. DELG s.v. πίμπλημι. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πληρόω

  • 34 φαίνω

    φαίνω (Hom.+) fut. 3 pl. φανοῦσιν Da 12:3; 1 aor. ἔφανα (B-D-F §72; Mlt-H. 214f), subj. 3 sg. φάνῃ Rv 8:12; 18:23; 2 pf. πέφηνα (Tat.). Mid.: aor. subj. 3 sg. φάνηται (Just., A I, 7, 4). Pass.: impf. ἐφαινόμην; 2 fut. φανήσομαι (2 Macc 6:27; s. B-D-F §79; Mlt-H. 262; the older φανοῦμαι only in the LXX—quot. 1 Pt 4:18); 2 aor. ἐφάνην; pf. 3 sg. πέφανται and inf. πέφανθαι (Just.)
    ① to shine or to produce light, shine
    ⓐ as act., exc. for GJs 16:2 v.l. (s. deStrycker ad loc.), in our lit. only intr. shine, give light, be bright (Aristoph., Nub. 586 of the sun; Pla., Tim. 39b; Theocr. 2, 11 of the moon; Gen 1:15, 17; En 104:2; 2; TestJob 31:5 of stars; SibOr 5, 522; 8, 203) sun Rv 1:16. Sun and moon 21:23 (ApcMos 31); moon PtK 2 p. 14, 27; Dg 7:2. A lamp (1 Macc 4:50) 2 Pt 1:19; in imagery J 5:35 (in a comparison Theoph. Ant. 2, 13 [p. 134, 4]). Light Rv 18:23 (φάνῃ modern edd.; φανῇ t.r.) in imagery J 1:5; 1J 2:8. Day and night shine, in so far as the sun, or moon and stars give their light Rv 8:12 (text φάνῃ; v.l. φανῇ). φαίνοντος ἤδη τοῦ ὄρθρου AcPl Ha 4, 3 (s. ὄρθρος).—Of the brightness of a heavenly messenger AcPl Ha 3, 28; 31; 36.
    ⓑ pass., in act. sense, of light and its sources shine, flash (Is 60:2) ἐφάνη φῶς μέγα ἐν τῷ σπηλαίῳ GJs 19:2 (JosAs 14:3 φῶς ἀνεκλάλητον) of stars, in imagery Phil 2:15 (TestJob 31:5). Of lightning as a portent (X., Cyr. 1, 6, 1) Mt 24:27. Of light Rv 18:23 (v.l. φανῇ). Of a star appear Mt 2:7 (FBoll, ZNW 18, 1918, 45f); GJs 21:2 codd. Of the day (Appian, Iber. 35 §143 φαινομένης ἡμέρας) Rv 8:12.
    ② to become visible, appear, pass. φαίνομαι w. act./intr. sense
    ⓐ appear, be or become visible, be revealed τότε ἐφάνη καὶ τὰ ζιζάνια Mt 13:26 (cp. 2 Macc 1:33 τό ὕδωρ ἐφάνη). τά ἔργα τῶν ἀνθρώπων 2 Cl 16:3. τό σημεῖον τοῦ υἱοῦ τ. ἀνθρώπου Mt 24:30. Cp. D 16:6. ἀτμὶς φαινομένη (opp. ἀφανιζομένη) Js 4:14. Cp. Hv 3, 2, 6a. ὁ ἀσεβὴς ποῦ φανεῖται; what will become of the godless man? 1 Pt 4:18 (Pr 11:31). οὐδέποτε ἐφάνη οὕτως nothing like this was ever seen (=happened) Mt 9:33. τὸ φαινόμενον that which is visible (Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 270) IRo 3:3a. τὰ φαινόμενά σου εἰς πρόσωπον whatever is visible before your face (opp. τὰ ἀόρατα) IPol 2:2. φαινόμενα things which appear Hb 11:3 (Ar. 1, 5 πάντων τῶν φαινομένων; Ath. 5, 2; cp. Sext. Emp., Hypotyp. 1, 138). Ign. explains: I will be a real believer ὅταν κόσμῳ μὴ φαίνωμαι when I am no longer visibly present in the world (because I have been devoured by the wild beasts) IRo 3:2. A play on words is meant to make this clear: Christ also, through the fact that he is ἐν πατρί and hence no longer visibly present in the world, μᾶλλον φαίνεται is all the more plainly visible as that which he really is, i.e. ὁ θεὸς ἡμῶν 3:3b. τ̣ὸ̣ [τέλο]ς (or: τ̣ε̣[λο]ς) τῶν φαινο[μέ]νων (opp. ἀφανῶν) light of things seen Ox 1081, 29f (rev. rdg.; s. διέρχομαι 1bβ); ἡ πίστ[ις] εὑρ[ετ]έ̣ [α] ἡ φαινομένη τοῦ ἀ.[ … ι]κ̣οῦ πατρός 32–34 (s. ἀπατρικός, but also ἀγέννητος, the preferred restoration being ἀγ[εννή]τ̣ου on the basis of the Coptic).
    ⓑ make one’s appearance, show oneself (Diod S 4, 6, 5 θεὸν φαίνεσθαι παρʼ ἀνθρώποις; 5, 2, 4 [divinity]; Chariton 5, 7, 10 φάνηθι, δαῖμον ἀγαθέ; Sb 8141, 24 [ins I B.C.] δαίμονος τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ υἱὸς … ἐφάνη; ParJer 7:20 θεὸς … ἐφάνη ἡμῖν διὰ τοῦ αἰέτου τούτου; SibOr 5, 152; Just., A I, 63, 10; ἐφάνη ὁ θεὸς … ἄλλως ἄλλοις Iren. 1, 10, 3 [Harv. I, 95, 9]; Did., Gen. 225, 13; τοῦ Ἰησοῦ … φαινομένου Just., D. 88, 8) Hv 1, 4, 3. Elijah (Jos., Ant. 8, 319) ἐφάνη has made his appearance (as forerunner of God’s kingdom, Mal 3:22. Some people consider that Jesus is Elijah come again) Lk 9:8. ἕως ἐφάνη βρέφος until the child (Jesus) appeared (in ref. to his birth in a cave) GJs 19:2. Of the first advent of Jesus Christ, who comes from outside our world B 14:5; IMg 6:1; Dg 11:2; also w. dat. (X., Cyr. 1, 6, 43; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 20, 5; Ael. Aristid. 51, 25 K.=27 p. 540 D.: ἡ θεὸς ἐφάνη μοι) κόσμῳ 11:3. Of the risen Lord, w. dat. Mk 16:9 (Just., D. 67, 7) τοῖς ἀποστόλοις. Of an angel, w. dat. (2 Macc 3:33; 10:29) Mt 1:20 (GJs 14:2); 2:13, 19 (cp. Alcaeus L-P. [schol. on Nicander, Ther. 613 p. 48 Keil]: φανῆναι τὸν Ἀπόλλωνα καθʼ ὕπνους; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 289 κατὰ τοὺς ὕπνους ἡ ῏Ισις ἐφάνη τῷ Ἀ., Ant. 7, 147; 8, 196). ὄπως φανῶσιν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις in order to be seen by people Mt 6:5; w. ptc. to denote the role that one plays before people (Hyperid., Fgm. 70, 1; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 4, 1; Ael. Aristid. 47 p. 428 D.) νηστεύοντες as fasting vs. 16; cp. 18 (B-D-F §414, 3).—Of the Antichrist φανήσεται ὡς υἱὸς θεοῦ he will appear (in the same way) as a son of God D 16:4.—Of earthly persons: ὅπου ἄν φανῇ ὁ ἐπίσκοπος, ἐκεῖ τὸ πλῆθος ἔστω ISm 8:2. Of participation in a meeting διὰ τί οὐκ ἐφάνης τῇ συνόδῳ ἡμῶν GJs 15:1. Παῦλος φανεῖς πᾶσι εἶπεν Paul showed himself (after his martyrdom) to all and said AcPl Ha 11, 5.
    ③ to become known, be recognized, be apparent, be revealed, pass. φαίνομαι w. act./intr. sense
    ⓐ w. predicate nom. εἰ ἦσαν, ἐφαίνοντο ἂν κλάδοι τοῦ σταυροῦ if they (the bogus teachers) actually were (God’s planting), they would appear as branches of the cross ITr 11:2. οὐ φαίνονται they are not apparent Hs 3:2ab, 3ab. ἡ ἁμαρτία ἵνα φανῇ ἁμαρτία in order that sin might be recognized as sin Ro 7:13.
    ⓑ appear to the eyes of the spirit, be revealed ὅπερ καὶ φανήσεται πρὸ προσώπου ἡμῶν, ἐξ ὧν ἀγαπῶμεν αὐτόν which also will be revealed before our face by the fact that we love (the Lord) IEph 15:3.
    ④ to be known by appearance as opposed to underlying reality, appear as someth., appear to be someth., pass. φαίνομαι w. act./intr. sense made more definite by a predicate nom. (X., Cyr. 1, 4, 19; Cebes 5, 1; Arrian, Anab. 4, 30, 4 πιστὸς ἐφαίνετο=he showed himself to be trustworthy; TestReub 5:7; Iren. 5, 1, 2 [Harv. II 315, 5]; Theoph. Ant. 3, 7 [p. 218, 5]) φαίνονται ὡραῖοι Mt 23:27. ἵνα ἡμεῖς δόκιμοι φανῶμεν 2 Cor 13:7. W. dat. of pers. appear to someone as someth. (Lucian, Dial. Mort. 25, 1; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 7 [Stone p. 54]) φαίνεσθε τοῖς ἀνθρώποις δίκαιοι Mt 23:28 (cp. Pr 21:2). W. ἐνώπιόν τινος instead of the dat.: ἐφάνησαν ἐνώπιον αὐτῶν ὡσεὶ λῆρος τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα Lk 24:11.—Foll. by ὡς look as if (TestJos 3:4) Hv 3, 2, 6b; Hs 9, 9, 7.
    ⑤ to make an impression on the mind, have the appearance, seem, freq. w. focus on aspect of decision evoked by circumstance; pass. φαίνομαι w. act./intr. sense, w. dat. and inf. (Hom. et al.) οἱ τοιοῦτοι οὐκ εὐσυνείδητοί μοι εἶναι φαίνονται IMg 4. W. dat. and ptc. φαίνεσθέ μοι κατὰ ἀνθρώπους ζῶντες ITr 2:1. τί ὑμῖν φαίνεται; how does it seem to you? what is your decision? Mk 14:64. ἐάν σοι φανῇ if it seems good to you Hv 2, 3, 4 (acc. to CTurner, JTS 21, 1920, 198, a Latinism: si tibi videtur. Cp. POxy 811 [I A.D.] εἴ σοι φαίνεται). Without a dat. (Jos., C. Ap. 1, 12; Just., D. 91, 4) οὐδὲν φαίνεται κεκομμένον ἀπʼ αὐτοῦ nothing seems to have been cut from it (the tree) or apparently nothing has been cut from it (cp. Aristoxenus, Fgm. 83 φαίνεται Ὄλυμπος αὐξήσας μουσικήν=O. has apparently enriched music) Hs 8, 3, 1 (φαίνεται w. acc. and inf. Demetrius: 722 Fgm. 5 Jac.).—B. 1045f.—DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > φαίνω

  • 35 φύσις

    φύσις, εως, ἡ (φύω; Hom.+)
    ① condition or circumstance as determined by birth, natural endowment/condition, nature, esp. as inherited fr. one’s ancestors, in contrast to status or characteristics that are acquired after birth (Isocr. 4, 105 φύσει πολίτης; Isaeus 6, 28 φύσει υἱός; Pla., Menex. 245d φύσει βάρβαροι, νόμῳ Ἕλληνες; Just., A I, 1, 1 Καίσαρος φύσει υἱῷ; SIG 720, 3; OGI 472, 4; 558, 6 al.; PFay 19, 11.—Theoph. Ant. 1, 13 [p. 86, 16]) ἡμεῖς φύσει Ἰουδαῖοι Gal 2:15 (cp. Ptolemaeus, Περὶ Ἡρῴδου τ. βασιλέως: no. 199 Jac. [I A.D.] Ἰουδαῖοι … ἐξ ἀρχῆς φυσικοί; Jos., Ant. 7, 130; φύσει Λιμναίου IK XXXVII, 15, 3 of the birth daughter of L. in contrast to her adoptive relationship w. one named Arsas). ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία the uncircumcision that is so by nature (a ref. to non-Israelites, who lack the moral cultivation of those who are circumcised and yet ‘observe the upright requirements of the law’ [Ro 2:26]. Israelites who violate their responsibilities to God, despite their privileged position indicated by receipt of circumcision and special revelation, run the risk of placing themselves in the condition of the uncircumcised) Ro 2:27. ἤμεθα τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς we were, in our natural condition (as descendants of Adam), subject to (God’s) wrath Eph 2:3 (the position of φύσει betw. the two words as Plut., Mor. 701a; DTurner, Grace Theological Journal 1, ’80, 195–219). The Christians of Tralles have a blameless disposition οὐ κατὰ χρῆσιν, ἀλλὰ κατὰ φύσιν not from habit, but by nature ITr 1:1 (here the contrast is between perfunctory virtue and spontaneous or instinctive behavior; Pindar sim. extolled the virtues of athletes who, in contrast to those w. mere acquired learning, reflected their ancestral breeding for excellence: O. 7, 90–92; P. 10, 11–14; N. 3, 40–42; 6, 8–16). οἱ κατὰ φύσιν κλάδοι the natural branches Ro 11:21, 24c. ἡ κατὰ φύσιν ἀγριέλαιος a tree which by nature is a wild olive vs. 24a; opp. παρὰ φύσιν contrary to nature vs. 24b; s. lit. s.v. ἀγριέλαιος and ἐλαία 1. On κατὰ and παρὰ φύσιν s. MPohlenz, Die Stoa I ’48, 488c.
    ② the natural character of an entity, natural characteristic/disposition (χρυσὸς … τὴν ἰδίαν φ. διαφυλάττει Iren. 1, 6, 2 [Harv. I 55, 2]; Hippol., Ref. 5, 8, 12) ἡ φύσις ἡ ἀνθρωπίνη human nature (Pla., Tht. 149b, Tim. 90c; Aristot. 1286b, 27; Epict. 2, 20, 18; Philo, Ebr. 166 al.; Aelian, VH 8, 11 τῶν ἀνθρώπων φύσις θνητή; TestJob 3:3 ἡ ἀνθρωπίνη φ.; Orig., C. Cels. 1, 52, 13; Just., A II, 6, 3 τῇ φύσει τῶν ἀνθρώπων) Js 3:7b (unless the sense should be humankind, s. 4 below). Euphemistically: παρθένος ἐγέννησεν, ἃ οὐ χωρεῖ ἡ φύσις αὐτῆς while remaining a virgin, a virgin has had a child or a virgin has given birth, something that does not accord w. her natural condition (as a virgin) GJs 19:3. τὸ ἀδύνατον τῆς ἡμετέρας φύσεως the weakness of our nature Dg 9:6. θείας κοινωνοὶ φύσεως sharers in the divine nature 2 Pt 1:4 (cp. ὅσοι φύσεως κοινωνοῦντες ἀνθρω[πίν]ης IReisenKN, p. 371, 46f; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 232 θείας μετεσχηκέναι φύσεως; Himerius, Or. 48 [=Or. 14], 26 of Dionysus: πρὶν εἰς θεῶν φύσιν ἐλθεῖν=before he attained to the nature of the gods; Ar. 13, 5 μία φ. τῶν θεῶν. Difft. AWolters, Calvin Theological Journal 25, ’90, 28–44 ‘partners of the Deity’).—Also specif. of sexual characteristics (Diod S 16, 26, 6 originally παρθένοι prophesied in Delphi διὰ τὸ τῆς φύσεως ἀδιάφθορον=because their sexuality was uncorrupted. φύσις of sex and its change Dicaearchus, Fgm. 37 W.; ἑρμαφροδίτου φ. Iren. 1, 11, 5 [Harv. I 108, 8]. Obviously φ. also has the concrete mng. ‘sex organ’: Nicander, Fgm. 107; Diod S 32, 10, 7 φ. ἄρρενος corresponding to φ. θηλείας following immediately; Anton. Lib. 41, 5; Phlegon: 257 Fgm. 36, 2, 1 Jac.). In the context of Mary’s virginal delivery ἐραυνήσω τὴν φύσιν αὐτῆς= I will examine whether she remains a virgin GJs 19:3b; 20:1 (where Tdf. with codd. reads ἔβαλε Σαλώμη τὸν δάκτυλον αὐτῆς εἰς τὴν φύσιν αὐτῆς [cp. J 20:25]). The hyena παρʼ ἐνιαυτὸν ἀλλάσσει τὴν φύσιν changes its nature every year, fr. male to female and vice versa B 10:7 (s. ὕαινα). Polytheists worship τοῖς φύσει μὴ οὖσιν θεοῖς beings that are by nature no gods at all Gal 4:8 (s. CLanger, Euhemeros u. die Theorie der φύσει u. θέσει θεοί: Αγγελος II 1926, 53–59; Mel., P. 8, 58 φύσει θεὸς ὢν καὶ ἄνθρωπος; Synes., Prov. 1, 9 p. 97c τοῖς φύσει θεοῖς; Diod S 3, 9, 1 differentiates between two kinds of gods: some αἰώνιον ἔχειν κ. ἄφθαρτον τὴν φύσιν, others θνητῆς φύσεως κεκοινωνηκέναι κ. διʼ ἀρετὴν … τετευχέναι τιμῶν ἀθανάτων=some ‘have an everlasting and incorruptible nature’, others ‘share mortal nature and then, because of their personal excellence, … attain immortal honors’).—ὅταν ἔθνη φύσει τὰ τοῦ νόμου ποιῶσιν when gentiles spontaneously (i.e. without extraneous legal instruction; cp. the prophetic ideal Jer 31:32–34) fulfill the demands of the (Mosaic) law Ro 2:14 (s. WMundle, Theol. Blätter 13, ’34, 249–56 [the gentile as Christian under direction of the πνεῦμα]; difft. s. 3 below).
    ③ the regular or established order of things, nature (Ar. 4, 2 κατὰ ἀπαραίτητον φύσεως ἀνάγκην=in accordance with the non-negotiable order of things; Ath. 3, 1 νόμῳ φύσεως) μετήλλαξαν τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν εἰς τὴν παρὰ φύσιν they exchanged the natural function for one contrary to nature Ro 1:26 (Diod S 32, 11, 1 παρὰ φύσιν ὁμιλία; Appian, Bell. Civ. 1, 109 §511; Athen. 13, 605d οἱ παρὰ φύσιν τῇ Ἀφροδίτῃ χρώμενοι=those who indulge in Aphrodite contrary to nature; TestNapht 3:4; Philo, Spec. Leg. 3, 39 ὁ παιδεραστὴς τὴν παρὰ φύσιν ἡδονὴν διώκει=a lover of boys pursues unnatural pleasure; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 273; Tat. 3:4; Ath. 26, 2; on φ. as definer of order s. JKube, ΤΕΧΝΗ und ΑΡΕΤΗ ’69, esp. 44–46; on relation to κτίσι in Paul, s. OWischmeyer, ZTK 93, ’96, 352–75). ὅταν ἔθνη φύσει τὰ τοῦ νόμου ποιῶσιν when gentiles fulfil the law’s demands by following the natural order (of things) Ro 2:14 (cp. Ltzm., Hdb., exc. on Ro 2:14–16; but s. 2 above). ἡ φύσις διδάσκει ὑμᾶς 1 Cor 11:14 (Epict. 1, 16, 9f; Plut., Mor. 478d; Synes., Calv. [Baldhead] 14 p. 78c φύσις as well as νόμος prescribes long hair for women, short hair for men.—Ltzm., Hdb. ad loc.). τὸ ὄνομα, ὸ̔ κέκτησθε φύσει δικαίᾳ the name which you bear because of a just natural order IEph 1:1 (s. Hdb. ad loc.—τῇ φ. τὸ ἀγαθὸν ἀνώφορόν ἐστιν Did., Gen. 21, 5.—JKleist, transl. ’46, 119 n. 2 suggests ‘natural disposition’).—RGrant, Miracle and Natural Law ’52, 4–18.
    ④ an entity as a product of nature, natural being, creature (X., Cyr. 6, 2, 29 πᾶσα φύσις=every creature; 3 Macc 3:29.—Diod S 2, 49, 4 plants are called φύσεις καρποφοροῦσαι; 3, 6, 2 θνητὴ φ.= a mortal creature. Ps.-Callisth. 1, 10, 1 ἀνθρωπίνη φ. = a human creature. It can also mean species [X. et al.; 4 Macc 1:20; Philo] and then at times disappear in translation: Ps.-Pla, Epin. 948d ἡ τῶν ἄστρων φύσις=the stars; X., Lac. 3, 4 ἡ τῶν θηλειῶν φύσις=the women; Aristot., Part. An. 1, 5 περὶ τῆς ζῳϊκῆς φ.=on animals) πᾶσα φύσις θηρίων κτλ. Js 3:7a. Also prob. ἡ φ. ἡ ἀνθρωπίνη humankind 3:7b; s. 2 above.—Kl. Pauly IV 841–44 (lit.).—DELG s.v. φύομαι C 6. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > φύσις

  • 36 τυγχάνω

    τυγχάνω, Thgn.253, Pi.P.3.104, O.2.47, etc.: [dialect] Ep. [tense] impf.
    A

    τύγχανον Od.14.231

    , ([etym.] παρετ-) Il.11.74: [tense] fut.

    τεύξομαι 16.609

    , Od.19.314, Ar.Eq. 112, Lys.18.23 (also as [tense] fut. [voice] Med. of τεύχω): [tense] aor. 2 ἔτῠχον, [dialect] Ep. τύχον, Il.5.287, 587, etc.; [dialect] Ep. subj. τύχωμι, -ῃσι, 7.243, 11.116; later also τετύχῃσι, Max.577; late [dialect] Ep. opt.

    τετύχοιμι Man.3.299

    : [dialect] Ep. also [tense] aor. 1

    ἐτύχησα Il.15.581

    , al., Hes.Fr.15: [tense] pf. τετύχηκα (intr.) Od.10.88 (part. τετυχηκώς, v.l. τετυχηώς. Il.17.748), Th. 1.32, (trans.) X.Cyr.4.1.2, Isoc.3.59; later also τέτευχα, D.21.150 (cod. S), Arist.EN 1119a10, PA 647b15, freq. later, PEnteux.6.7 (iii B. C.), UPZ123.30 (ii B. C.), PStrassb.98.10 (ii B. C.), Inscr.Prien.108.287 (ii B. C.), etc.; [dialect] Dor. [tense] pf. inf.

    τετεύχεν SIG398.5

     (Cos, iii B. C.); but [dialect] Ion. [tense] plpf.

    ἐτετεύχεε Hdt.3.14

    ; τέτυχα v.l. in Ep.Hebr.8.6, v.l. in J.BJ7.5.4, ([etym.] συν- ) Aristeas 180, etc.; part.

    τετυχώς Jahresh.29

    Beibl. 163 (Stara Zagora):—[voice] Med., [tense] aor. 1

    τεύξασθαι LXX2 Ma.15.7

    :— [voice] Pass., [tense] impf.

    ἐτυγχάνετο Ant.Lib.39.3

     (dub.): elsewh. in compds, [tense] aor. 1 ἐτεύχθην ([etym.] ἐν-) Plb.35.6.1: [tense] pf. τέτευγμαι ([etym.] ἐπι-) Id.6.53.2.
    2 of events, and things generally, happen to one, befall one, come to one's lot, c. dat. pers., οὔνεκά μοι τύχε πολλά because much fell to me, Il.11.684;

    καί μοι μάλα τύγχανε πολλά Od.14.231

    ;

    θέλοιμ' ἂν ὡς πλείστοισι πημονὰς τυχεῖν A.Pr. 348

    , cf. Pers. 706 (troch.);

    οἷ' αὐτοῖς τύχοι S.Ph. 275

    ;

    εἴ τι δεσπόταισι τυγχάνει E.Alc. 138

    : abs.,

    εἰ δ' αὖθ', ὃ μὴ γένοιτο, συμφορὰ τύχοι A.Th.5

    , cf. Ag. 347, etc.;

    ἄριστα πρὸς τὸ τυγχάνον E.Hel. 1290

    , cf. Ion 1511.
    b [tense] aor. part. ὁ τυχών, the first one meets, any chance person, Hes.Th. 973, Pl.R. 539d, etc.;

    οἱ τ.

     everyday men, the vulgar,

    X.Mem.3.9.10

    , etc.;

    εἷς ἦν τῶν τ. Isoc.10.21

    ; οὐχ ὁ τ. ἀνήρ, of Moses, Longin.9.9: so of things, τὸ τυχόν any chance result, Pl.Ti. 46e;

    ὃν ἐξαλείφει πρόφασις ἡ τυχοῦσ' ὅλον E.Fr. 1041

    ; οὐχ ὁ τ. λόγος no common discourse, Pl.Lg. 723e;

    σύνεσιν οὐ τὰν τυχοῦσαν Archim.

    Spir.Praef.; οἱ τ. φόβοι trifling fears, Lycurg.37; καίπερ τὸ τ. καταβαλοῦσιν though they may have paid a trifling sum, Str.5.2.7:—Math., τυχὸν σημεῖον any point (at random), Euc.1.5, cf. 6.9; ἄλλα, ἃ ἔτυχεν, ἰσάκις πολλαπλάσια any other equimultiples taken at random, Id.5.4.
    3 in [ per.] 3sg. [tense] aor. or [tense] impf., impers. (sts. also pers.) in relat. clauses, as (when, where, etc.) it (he, she, etc.) happened (may happen, etc.), i. e. anyhow, at any time, place, etc., καὶ ἀρχομένοις καὶ μεσοῦσι καὶ ὅπως ἔτυχέ τῳ at the beginning, middle, or any other point, Th.5.20; ὡς ἔτυχε ζημιοῦσθαι to be penalized just anyhow, X.Mem.3.9.13; οὐχ ὡς ἔτυχεν in no ordinary manner, Men. Sam.79, BMus.Inscr.4.481*.340 (Ephesus, ii A. D.); τὴν μὲν δικαίαν, τὴν δ' ὅπως ἐτύγχανεν just anyhow, E.Hipp. 929; ἀποτετμάσθω δύο τμάματα ὡς ἔτυχεν let two segments be cut off at random, Archim. Con.Sph.24;

    χώρᾳ γ' ἐν ᾗ ἔτυχε X.Oec.3.3

    ;

    ὅπου ἔτυχεν Id.Cyr.8.4.3

    ;

    ὅπου ἂν τύχῃ Pl.Prt. 242e

    ;

    ὁπότε τύχοι

     sometimes,

    Pl.Phd. 89b

    ;

    ὅταν τύχῃ

     sometimes,

    E.El. 1169

     (lyr.); but, at any odd time, Th.1.142;

    ἡνίκ' ἂν τ. D.1.3

    ; ἂν τύχῃ, εἰ τύχοι, it may be, Pl.Cra. 430e, Hp.Mi. 367a;

    τὸ δέ, εἰ ἔτυχεν, οὐχ οὕτως ἔχει Id.Cra. 439c

    ;

    εἰ οὕτως ἔτυχεν Arist.Cat. 8b12

    ;

    τὸ ὅπῃ ἔτυχεν

     mere chance,

    Pl.Phlb. 28d

    : with attraction of the relat. Pron.,

    τὸ οἷς ἔτυχε προσκρούειν Plu.Cic.27

    ;

    ὡμίλει ᾧ τύχοι Plb.26.1.3

    ;

    ὧν ἔτυχε πιμπλάμενος Luc.Vit.Auct.9

    ; οὐδὲ γὰρ ὧν ἔτυχ' ἦν they were not just any acts, D.18.130.
    b c. acc. et inf.,

    ἔτυχε ὄμβρον συνεργῆσαι Plu.Alc.28

    , cf. Ael.NA5.6; ἔτυχεν ὥστε .. D.C.39.12.
    4 sts. the Verb agrees in person and number with the subject of the principal clause, perhaps by assimilation, ἀπαίροντες ἀπὸ τῆς Πελοποννήσου ὁπόθεν τύχοιεν, for ὁπόθεν τύχοι, Th.4.26, cf. 93, 5.56, 7.70, Pl.Tht. 179c; ὅ τι ἂν τύχωσι, τοῦτο λέγουσι they say just anything, Id.Prt. 353a;

    ὅ τι ἂν τύχωσι, τοῦτο πράξουτιν Id.Cri. 45d

    , cf. Grg. 522c, Smp. 181b;

    ἀναφύονται ὁπόθεν ἂν τύχῃ ἕκαστος Id.Tht. 180c

    ;

    ὡς ἐτύγχανον ἕκαστοι, ηὐλίζοντο X.An.2.2.17

    , cf. 3.1.3;

    τάχ' ἄν, εἰ τύχοιεν, σωφρονέστεροι γένοιντο D.15.16

    ;

    δουλεύειν μᾶλλον ἢ μεθ' ὁποτέρου ἂν τύχωσι τούτων ἐλευθέρους εἶναι Th.8.48

    ; πρὸς ὀργὴν ἥν τινα τύχητε ἔστιν ὅτε σφαλέντες τὴν τοῦ πείσαντος μίαν γνώμην ζημιοῦτε yielding to the impulse of the moment, Id.3.43;

    εἶτ' οὐκ ἐλήρουν ὅ τι τύχοιμ' Ar.

     Ra. 945: with attraction of the relat. Pron.,

    οὓς ἂν τύχῃς ἐπαινῶν Isoc.12.206

    .
    5 neut. part. τυχόν, used abs. like ἐξόν, παρόν, etc., since it so befell,

    οὕτως τ. Luc.Symp.43

    .
    b as Adv., perchance, perhaps, Isoc.4.171, X.An.6.1.20, Pl.Alc.2.140a, 150c, D.18.221, 21.41, Men.Pk. 184, 1 Ep.Cor.16.6;

    τ. ἴσως Epich.277

    , E.Fr.953.9, Men. Epit. 287, Plb.2.58.9; τυχὸν μὲν.., τυχὸν δὲ .. Arr.An.1.10.6, etc.
    II joined with the part. of another Verb to express a coincidence, τύχησε γὰρ ἐρχομένη νηῦς a ship happened to be, i. e. was just then, starting, Od.14.334;

    ξεῖνος ἐὼν ἐτύχησε παρ' ἱπποδάμοισι Γερηνοῖς Hes.Fr.15.3

    , cf. Semon.7.19, Pi.N.1.49;

    πρυτανεία ἣ ἂν τυγχάνῃ πρυτανεύουσα IG12.63.27

    , cf. 52; τὰ νοέων τυγχάνω what I happen to have, i.e. have at this moment, in my mind, Hdt. 1.88, cf. 8.65,68.

    ά; ἐτετεύχεε ἐπισπόμενος Id.3.14

    ; ὃ τυγχάνω μαθών which I have just learnt, S.Tr. 370; παρὼν ἐτύγχανον I was by just then, Id.Aj. 748; τυγχάνει καθεύδων he is sleeping just now, Ar.V. 336 (troch.); ἔτυχον στρατευόμενοι they were just then engaged in an expedition, Th.1.104; ἔτυχε κατὰ τοῦτο καιροῦ ἐλθών he came just at this point of time, Id.7.2; ἥτις δέ τοι μάλιστα σωφρονεῖν δοκεῖ, αὕτη μέγιστα τυγχάνει λωβωμένη she is just the one who.., Semon.7.109; but freq. τυγχάνω cannot be translated at all, esp. in phrase τυγχάνω ὤν, which is simply = εἰμί, S.Aj.88, Ar.Pl.35, Pl.Prt. 313c, etc.
    2 the part. ὤν is sts. omitted,

    ὁ γὰρ μέγιστος τυγχάνει δορυξένων S.El.46

    ; εἴ σοι χαρτὰ τυγχάνει τάδε ib. 1457; νῦν δ' ἀγροῖσι τυγχάνει ib. 313;

    ἔνδον γὰρ ἄρτι τυγχάνει Id.Aj.9

    ;

    εἴ τις εὔνους τυγχάνει Ar.Ec. 1141

    ;

    εἰ σὺ τυγχάνεις ἐπιστήμων τούτων Pl.Prt. 313e

    , cf. Grg. 502b, R. 369b, al.: sts. τυγχάνειν is used much like εἶναι, Σωτὴρ γένοιτ' ἂν Ζεὺς ἐπ' ἀσπίδος τυχών A.Th. 520; οὐκ ἀποδάμου τυχόντος not being absent, Pi.P.4.5 (cf. τόσσαις)

    ; ποῦ χρὴ τηνικαῦτα τυγχάνειν; E.IA 730

    ; τ. ἐν ἐμπύροις to be engaged in.., Id.Andr. 1113; freq. in Arist.,

    δύο μέρη τετύχηκεν ἐξ ὧν ἡ πόλις Pol. 1318a31

    , cf. 1289b16, Top. 151b11; also in later Gr.,

    τὰ ἑπτάμηνα γόνιμα τυγχάνειν Sor.1.55

    , cf. 69, al.;

    νέος πάνυ τυγχάνων PLips. 40 ii 7

     (iv A. D.), etc.:—Phryn.244 rejects this usage in Attic.
    b τυγχάνον, = τὸ ἐκτὸς ὑποκείμενον, the external reality, e. g. αὐτὸς ὁ Δίων as distd. both from the word ([etym.] φωνή) Δίων and its meaning, Stoic.2.48.
    c τὰ πράγματα τυγχάνοντα καλοῦσι (sc. οἱ Στωϊκοί) , τέλος γὰρ τὸ τυχεῖν τούτων, ib.77.
    3 later c. inf., τυγχάνομεν ἐπιδεδωκέναι we happen to have handed in.., we have just handed in.., PTeb.796.13 (ii B. C.), cf. PSI10.1118.8 (i A. D.), 1.39.4 (ii A. D.), Heliod. et Antyll. ap. Orib.44.8.21, 25, 44.23.21, Gal. 18(2).394.
    B gain one's end or purpose, succeed,

    οὐκ ἐτύχησεν ἑλίξας Il. 23.466

    ;

    εἰ τύχῃ τις ἔρδων Pi.N.7.11

    , cf. 55; τὸ τυχεῖν, = νίκη, Id.O.2.51;

    πείθειν.. τυγχάνειν θ' ἅμα E.Hec. 819

    ;

    εἰ τύχοιμεν Th.4.63

    ; τυχόντες if successful, opp. σφαλέντες, Id.3.39, cf. 82, Pi.P.10.62;

    τυγχάνουσι καὶ ἀποτυγχάνουσι Arist.Po. 1450a3

    ;

    ὀρθῶς πράττειν καὶ τ. Pl.Euthd. 280a

    ; gain one's request, Hdt.1.213 (so τυχόντα γνώμης in Th.3.42); in speaking, to be right,

    τί νιν καλοῦσα.. τύχοιμ' ἄν; A.Ag. 1233

    , cf. Ch.14, 317 (lyr.), S.Ph. 223, OC 1580;

    Δίκαν νιν προσαγορεύομεν τυχόντες καλῶς A.Ch. 950

     (lyr.):—[voice] Pass., impers., αὐτῷ πρὸς τὸ ἔργον οὐδὲν ἐτυγχάνετο nothing went right, dub. in Ant.Lib. 39.3:—in part. τυχήσας or τυχών, combined with νύξε, βάλε, οὖτα, etc., pierce, wound, etc., successfully, so that the whole phrase means hit,

    ἔγχεϊ νύξε κατὰ κληῗδα τυχήσας Il.5.579

    , cf. 858, 12.394; βάλε δουρὶ κατὰ ζωστῆρα τυχήσας ib. 189;

    ὑπὸ στέρνοιο τυχήσας βεβλήκει 4.106

    , cf. 5.98, 582, 13.371, 397, Od.19.452, al.; also conversely,

    θηρητὴρ ἐτύχησε βαλών Il.15.581

    ;

    βαλὼν τύχω Hdt.3.35

    ; also apart from such combinations, hit, c. gen.,

    προβιβάντος Il.16.609

    ;

    μηρίνθοιο 23.857

    ;

    τ. τοῦ σκοποῦ Pl.Lg. 717b

    , cf. R. 523b, Th.2.35, X.An.3.2.19, Ap.1: c. dupl. gen.,

    εἰ.. τοῦ παιδὸς.. τύχω μέσης τῆς καρδίης Hdt. 3.35

    : abs.,

    ἤμβροτες οὐδ' ἔτυχες Il.5.287

    ;

    αἰ κε τύχωμι 7.243

    , Od.22.7.
    II hit upon, light upon:
    1 meet, fall in with persons, Αακεδαίμονι.. τυχήσας having met [him] in Lacedaemon, Od.21.13: c. gen.,

    θρηνητοῦ A.Ag. 1075

    ; τριακτῆρος ib. 172 (lyr.);

    ἀγαθῶν ἀνδρῶν Lys.2.5

    ;

    γυναικῶν X.Smp.9.7

    : with a predicate added,

    μή τευ μελαμπύγου τύχῃς Archil.110

    ;

    προφρόνων Μοισᾶν τ. Pi.I.4(3).43(61)

    ;

    θεῶν ἀμεινόνων τ. E.Heracl. 351

    ;

    ἐμοῦ.. οἰκητοῦ S.OT 1450

    , cf. 677;

    ἡμῶν τ. οἵων σε χρή E.Hel. 1300

    , cf. Lys.18.23;

    ἐρωτᾶτε αὐτοὺς ὁποίων τινῶν ἡμῶν ἔτυχον X.An.5.5.15

    ;

    τοῦ δαίμονος.. κακοδαίμονος Ar.Eq. 112

    .
    2 light on a thing,

    τύχε γάρ ἀμάθοιο βαθείης Il.5.587

    ; attain, obtain a thing, c. gen.,

    πομπῆς καὶ νόστοιο Od.6.290

    ;

    αἰδοῦς Thgn.253

    , cf. 256; [ οἴκτου] A.Pr. 241;

    ξυγγνώμης Th.7.15

    ;

    τῆς ἀξίας Ar.Av. 1223

    ; of meeting with misfortunes, βίης τυχεῖν meet with, suffer violence, Hdt.9.108; τραυμάτων, κακῶν, A.Ag. 866, E.Hec. 1280; δίκης, κρίσεως, Pl.Grg. 472d, Phdr. 249a, cf. Lg. 869b: abs., have the lot or fate,

    ἄλλος μὲν ἀποφθίσθω ἄλλος δὲ βιώτω, ὅς κε τύχῃ Il.8.430

    ;

    τὴν παρὰ Δαρείου αἰτήσας ἔτυχε μισθόν Hdt.5.23

     (where τὴν is governed by αἰτήσας).
    b after Hom. also c. acc. of neut. Adj. or Pron.,

    τὰ πρόσφορα A.Ch. 711

    , cf. Eu.30, S.OC 1106, Ph. 509 (lyr.), E.Med. 758, Hec.51: later the acc. is used more freely,

    τ. ἐπίστασιν Sammelb.5235.15

     (i A. D.);

    ὑπογραφήν BGU615.23

     (ii A. D.);

    βοήθειαν PGoodsp.Cair.15.14

     (iv A. D.);

    εὐκαιρίαν PSI9.1082.5

     (iv A. D.);

    τὰ γυναίκια δεσμὸν οὐδένα βούλεται τυγχάνειν Sor.1.70b

    .
    c after either case a gen. pers. may be added, obtain a thing from a person,

    ὧν δέ σου τυχεῖν ἐφίεμαι S.Ph. 1315

    ;

    σου τοῦτο τ. Id.OC 1168

    ; or the pers. may be added with a Prep.,

    τ. ἐπαίνου ἔκ τινος Id.Ant. 665

    ;

    παρὰ σεῖο τ. φιλότητος Od.15.158

    ;

    τιμίαν ἕδραν παρ' ἀνδρῶν A.Eu. 856

     (dub.);

    αἰδοῦς ὑπό τινος X.Cyr.1.6.10

    , cf. Mem.4.8.10, etc.: abs.,

    χρὴ πρὸς μακάρων τυγχάνοντ' εὖ πασχέμεν Pi.P.3.104

    .
    d c. inf.,

    οἶμαί σου τεύξεσθαι μεθεῖναί με Pl.Phlb. 50d

    ;

    ἐὰν ψαῦσαι τοῦ νεκροῦ τύχωμεν Plu.Pel.33

    ; οὐ τυχὼν ἐπιδείξειν ( = ἐπιδεῖξαι ) not having succeeded in proving, PPetr.3p.153 (iii B. C.). (Τυ-γ-χ-άνω, with ἐτύχησα, τετύχηκα, is formed from the [tense] aor. τυχ-εῖν, which was orig. the [tense] aor. [voice] Pass. (with act. form) of τεύχω 'make'; ἔτυχε = factum est, as ἔτραφον = I was nourished (v. τρέφω); senses A.1.1-3 are the oldest and are parallel to

    τεύχω 11

     (esp.[voice] Pass.); many of the forms belong equally to both verbs; τιτύσκομαι like wise belongs to both verbs; τ (ε) υχ- from Θ (ε) υχ-, cf. ἀποθύσκειν, ἐνθύσκει, συνθύξω, and perh. Germ. taugen 'to be capable, useful', Engl. dow, doughty.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τυγχάνω

  • 37 ἀξίωμα

    A that of which one is thought worthy, an honour,

    γάμων.. ἀξίωμ' ἐδέξατο E. Ion62

    ; οἳ τὰς πόλεις ἔχουσι κἀξιώματαib. 605;

    κοινῆς τραπέζης ἀ. ἔχειν Id.Or.9

    ; τὸ τῆς πόλεως ἀ. the dignity of the city's representative, D.18.149.
    2 honour, reputation, E.Supp. 424, Th.2.65, etc.;

    ὢν ἐν ἀξιώματι ὑπὸ τῶν ἀστῶν Id.6.15

    ;

    τὸ τῶν ἐλευθέρων γυναικῶν ἀ. D.59.113

    : c. gen. objecti, ἀ. ἔχειν ἀρετῆς claim on ground of merit, Arist.Pol. 1281b25.
    4 of things, worth, quality,

    οὐ τῷ πλήθει ἀλλὰ τῷ ἀ. Th.5.8

    .
    5 concrete, things of dignity, Philostr.VS2.5.4.
    II that which is thought fit, decision, decree,

    δαιμόνων S.OC 1452

    , cf. 1459;

    τὰ τῶν προγόνων ἀ. D.18.210

    ;

    ἀ. κενὰ καὶ νομοθεσίαι Epicur.Ep.2p.36U.

    2 in Science, that which is assumed as the basis of demonstration, selfevident principle, Arist.Metaph. 997a7, 1005b33, APo. 72a17, Polystr. p.16 W.:—Math., axiom, Arist.Metaph. 1005a20, etc.; philosophical doctrine, τὸ Ζήνωνος ἀ. ib. 1001b7, cf. Xen. 979b22; logical proposition, Chrysipp.Stoic.2.53,63, etc.
    3 request, petition,

    ἱκετικὸν ἀ. BGU 1053ii7

     (i B. C.), cf. Plu.2.633c.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἀξίωμα

  • 38 μέλλω

    μέλλω (Hom.+) fut. μελλήσω; impf. ἔμελλον (all edd. J 6:6; Ac 21:27) and ἤμελλον (all edd. Lk 7:2; 19:4; J 4:47; 12:33; 18:32; Hb 11:8; s. B-D-F §66, 3; W.-S. §12, 3; Mlt-H. 188. In Att. ins the ἠ-appears after 300 B.C. [Meisterhans3-Schw. 169]. In IPriene ἐ-occurs only once: 11, 5 [c. 297 B.C.]).
    ① to take place at a future point of time and so to be subsequent to another event, be about to, used w. an inf. foll.
    ⓐ only rarely w. the fut. inf., w. which it is regularly used in ancient Gk. (Hom. et al.), since in colloquial usage the fut. inf. and ptc. were gradually disappearing and being replaced by combinations with μέλλω (B-D-F §338, 3; 350; s. Rob. 882; 889). W. the fut. inf. μ. denotes certainty that an event will occur in the future μ. ἔσεσθαι (SIG 914, 10 μέλλει ἔσεσθαι; 247 I, 74 ἔμελλε … [δώσε]ιν; Jos., Ant. 13, 322; Mel., P. 57, 415) will certainly take place or be Ac 11:28; 24:15; 27:10; 1 Cl 43:6; cp. Dg 8:2.
    ⓑ w. the aor. inf. (rarely in ancient Gk. [but as early as Hom., and e.g. X., Cyr. 1, 4, 16]; Herodas 3, 78 and 91; UPZ 70, 12 [152/1 B.C.]; PGiss 12, 5; POxy 1067, 17; 1488, 20; Ex 4:12; Job 3:8; 2 Macc 14:41; JosAs 29:3; ParJer 9:13; GrBar 4:15 [Christ.]; ApcMos13; s. Phryn. p. 336; 745ff Lob.; WRutherford, New Phryn. 1881, 420ff) be on the point of, be about to, μ. ἀποκαλυφθῆναι be about to be revealed Ro 8:18. τὸ δωδεκάφυλον τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ μέλλον ἀπολέσθαι the twelve tribes of Israel that were about to be destroyed 1 Cl 55:6. ἤμελλεν προαγαγεῖν Ac 12:6. ἀποθανεῖν Rv 3:2. ἐμέσαι vs. 16. τεκεῖν 12:4.
    ⓒ w. the pres. inf. So mostly (ca. 80 times in the NT.; oft. in lit., ins, pap, LXX; TestAbr B 4 p. 108, 14 [Stone p. 64]; ApcEsdr 6:23f p. 32, 2f Tdf.; EpArist; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 7 Jac.; Just., A I, 51, 8; D. 32, 4 al.; Tat. 14, 1; Mel., P. 38, 263; Ath. 32, 1).
    α. be about to, be on the point of ἤμελλεν τελευτᾶν he was at the point of death (Aristot. Fgm. 277 [in Apollon. Paradox. 27] and Diod S 6, 4, 3 μέλλων τελευτᾶν; cp. Jos., Ant. 4, 83; 12, 357) Lk 7:2. Also ἤμελλεν ἀποθνῄσκειν (Artem. 4, 24 p. 217, 5 γραῦς μέλλουσα ἀποθνῄσκειν; Aesop, Fab. 131 P.=202 H.; 233 P.=216 H.; 2 Macc 7:18; 4 Macc 10:9) J 4:47. ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν he was about to kill himself Ac 16:27. Of God’s eschat. reign μέλλειν ἔρχεσθαι 1 Cl 42:3. Of heavenly glory ἡ μέλλουσα ἀποκαλύπτεσθαι 1 Pt 5:1. Cp. Lk 19:4; J 6:6; Ac 3:3; 5:35; 18:14; 21:27; 22:26; 23:27.—Occasionally almost = begin ἤμελλον γράφειν Rv 10:4. ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι πάντα when all these things are (or begin) to be accomplished Mk 13:4; cp. Lk 21:7; Rv 10:7.
    β. in a weakened sense it serves simply as a periphrasis for the fut. (PMich III, 202, 8ff; 13ff [105 A.D.].—Mayser II/1, 226) ὅσα λαλῶ ἢ καὶ μ. λαλεῖν (=ἢ καὶ λαλήσω) what I tell or shall tell Hm 4, 4, 3. So esp. oft. in Hermas: μ. λέγειν v 1, 1, 6; 3, 8, 11; m 11:7, 17; Hs 5, 2, 1. μ. ἐντέλλεσθαι v 5:5; m 5, 2, 8. μ. κατοικεῖν Hs 1:1; 4:2. μ. χωρεῖν (=χωρήσω) IMg 5:1. μ. βασιλεύειν GJs 23:2.—Substitute for the disappearing fut. forms (inf. and ptc. B-D-F §356); for the fut. inf.: προσεδόκων αὐτὸν μέλλειν πίμπρασθαι Ac 28:6; for the fut. ptc.: ὁ μέλλων ἔρχεσθαι Mt 11:14. ὁ τοῦτο μέλλων πράσσειν the one who was going to do this Lk 22:23; cp. 24:21; Ac 13:34. οἱ μέλλοντες πιστεύειν those who were to believe (in him) in the future 1 Ti 1:16; 1 Cl 42:4; Hm 4, 3, 3. μέλλοντες ἀσεβεῖν those who were to be ungodly in the future 2 Pt 2:6 v.l. (s. 3, end). Of Christ ὁ μέλλων κρίνειν 2 Ti 4:1; 7:2. οἱ μέλλοντες ἀρνεῖσθαι = οἱ ἀρνησόμενοι Hv 2, 2, 8. πυρὸς ζῆλος ἐσθίειν μέλλοντος τοὺς ὑπεναντίους raging fire that will devour the opponents Hb 10:27.
    γ. denoting an intended action: intend, propose, have in mind μέλλει Ἡρῴδης ζητεῖν τὸ παιδίον Herod intends to search for the child Mt 2:13. οὗ ἤμελλεν αὐτὸς ἔρχεσθαι where he himself intended to come Lk 10:1. μέλλουσιν ἔρχεσθαι they intended to come J 6:15. Cp. vs. 71; 7:35; 12:4; 14:22; Ac 17:31; 20:3, 7, 13ab; 23:15; 26:2; 27:30; Hb 8:5; 2 Pt 1:12. τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν; what do you intend to do? Hs 1:5. οὐ μ. ποιεῖν I have no intention of doing MPol 8:2. μ. προσηλοῦν they wanted to nail him fast 13:3. μ. λαμβάνειν we wanted to take him out 17:2.
    ② to be inevitable, be destined, inevitable
    ⓐ w. pres. inf. to denote an action that necessarily follows a divine decree is destined, must, will certainly … μ. πάσχειν he is destined to suffer Mt 17:12; B 7:10; 12:2; cp. 6:7. μ. σταυροῦσθαι must be crucified 12:1. μ. παραδίδοσθαι Mt 17:22; Lk 9:44; 16:5. ἔμελλεν ἀποθνῄσκειν J 11:51; 12:33; 18:32. ἐν σαρκὶ μ. φανεροῦσθαι B 6:7, 9, 14. Cp. Mt 16:27; 20:22; Ro 4:24; 8:13; Rv 12:5. οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν … θεωρεῖν they should no more see … Ac 20:38. τὰ μ. γίνεσθαι what must come to pass 26:22; cp. Rv 1:19. διὰ τοὺς μέλλοντας κληρονομεῖν σωτηρίαν those who are to inherit salvation Hb 1:14. μέλλομεν θλίβεσθαι that we were to be afflicted 1 Th 3:4.—Mk 10:32; Lk 9:31; J 7:39; Hb 11:8. ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ᾗ ἔμελλε θηριομαχεῖν on the day on which Paul was to fight the wild animals AcPl Ha 3, 9. ὡς μελλούσης τῆς πόλεως αἴρεσθαι in expectation of the city’s destruction 5, 16. ἄνωθεν μέλλω σταυροῦσθαι I (Jesus) am about to be crucified once more 7, 39.
    ⓑ w. aor. inf. ἀποκαλυφθῆναι that is destined (acc. to God’s will) to be revealed Gal 3:23.
    ③ The ptc. is used abs. in the mng. (in the) future, to come (Pind., O. 10, 7 ὁ μέλλων χρόνος ‘the due date’) ὁ αἰὼν μέλλων the age to come (s. αἰών 2b), which brings the reign of God (opp. ὁ αἰὼν οὗτος or ὁ νῦν αἰών) Mt 12:32; Eph 1:21; 2 Cl 6:3; Pol 5:2; cp. Hb 6:5. Also ὁ μ. καιρός (opp. ὁ νῦν κ.) 4:1. ἡ μ. ζωή (opp. ἡ νῦν ζ.) 1 Ti 4:8. ὁ μ. βίος (opp. ὁ νῦν β.) 2 Cl 20:2. ἡ μ. βασιλεία 5:5; ἡ οἰκουμένη ἡ μ. the world to come Hb 2:5. ἡ μέλλουσα πόλις (as wordplay, opp. [οὐ … ] μένουσα π.) 13:14. ἡ μ. ἐπαγγελία the promise for the future 2 Cl 10:3f. τὰ μ. ἀγαθά Hb 9:11 v.l.; Hv 1, 1, 8. ἡ μ. ἀνάστασις 1 Cl 24:1; τὸ κρίμα τὸ μ. the judgment to come Ac 24:25; cp. 1 Cl 28:1; 2 Cl 18:2; MPol 11:2. ἡ μ. ὀργή Mt 3:7; IEph 11:1. ἡ μ. θλῖψις Hv 4, 2, 5. τὰ μ. σκάνδαλα 4:9.—ἡ μέλλουσά σου ἀδελφή your future sister=the one who in the future will be your sister, no longer your wife Hv 2, 2, 3. Several times the noun can be supplied fr. the context: τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος, i.e. Ἀδάμ Ro 5:14.—Subst. τὸ μέλλον the future (Aeneas Tact. 422; 431 al.; Antiphanes Com. [IV B.C.] 227 K.; Menand., Monostich. 412 [608 Jaekel] Mei.; Anacreont. 36; Plut., Caes. 14, 4; Herodian 1, 14, 2; SIG 609, 5; ViEzk 13 [p. 75, 12 Sch.]; Philo, Mel.) 1 Cl 31:3. εἰς τὸ μ. for the future (Jos., Ant. 9, 162) 1 Ti 6:19; specif. (in the) next year (PLond III, 1231, 4 p. 108 [144 A.D.] τὴν εἰς τὸ μέλλον γεωργείαν; s. Field, Notes 65) Lk 13:9. τὰ μ. the things to come (X., Symp. 4, 47; Aeneas Tact. 1050; Artem. 1, 36; Wsd 19:1; TestJob 47:9; JosAs 23:8; Philo; Just., D. 7, 1; Ath. 27, 2) Col 2:17; PtK 3 p. 15, 21. (Opp. τὰ ἐνεστῶτα the present as PGM 5, 295) Ro 8:38; 1 Cor 3:22; B 1:7; 5:3; 17:2. Ox 1081 39f (SJCh 91, 2) (s. ἀρχή 2). Uncertain 2 Pt 2:6 (if ἀσεβέσιν is to be retained, the ref. is to impending judgment for the impious).
    ④ delay τί μέλλεις why are you delaying? (cp. Aeschyl., Prom. 36; Eur., Hec. 1094; Thu. 8, 78; Lucian, Dial. Mort. 10, 13; Jos., Bell. 3, 494 τί μέλλομεν; 4 Macc 6:23; 9:1) Ac 22:16. οὐ μελλήσας without delay AcPl Ha 8, 4. The connection in AcPt Ox 849, 1 is uncertain.—B. 974. DELG. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > μέλλω

  • 39 οὐρανός

    οὐρανός, οῦ, ὁ 24:31 (Hom.+; ‘heaven’ in various senses)
    ① the portion or portions of the universe gener. distinguished from planet earth, heaven (so mostly in the sing.; s. B-D-F §141, 1)
    ⓐ mentioned w. the earth
    α. forming a unity w. it as the totality of creation (Pla., Euthyd. 296d οὐρανὸς καὶ γῆ; Gen 1:1; 14:19, 22; Tob 7:17 BA; Jdth 9:12; Bel 5; 1 Macc 2:37 al.; PsSol 8:7; ParJer 5:32; Just., D. 74, 1; PGM 13, 784 ὁ βασιλεύων τῶν οὐρανῶν κ. τῆς γῆς κ. πάντων τῶν ἐν αὐτοῖς ἐνδιατριβόντων; Orig., C. Cels. 6, 59, 6; Theoph. Ant. 1, 4 [p. 64, 13]) ὁ οὐρανὸς καὶ ἡ γῆ Mt 5:18; 11:25; 24:35; Mk 13:31; Lk 10:21; 16:17; 21:33; Ac 4:24; 14:15; 17:24 (on the absence of the art. s. B-D-F §253, 3); Rv 14:7; 20:11; Dg 3:4; AcPlCor 2:9; 19.
    β. standing independently beside the earth or contrasted w. it: Mt 5:34f; Ac 7:49 (cp. on both Is 66:1). ἐν (τῷ) οὐρανῷ καὶ ἐπὶ (τῆς) γῆς Mt 6:10; 28:18; Lk 11:2 v.l.; Rv 5:13.—1 Cor 8:5; Rv 5:3; ISm 11:2. τὸ πρόσωπον τ. γῆς καὶ τ. οὐρανοῦ Lk 12:56. Cp. Hb 12:26 (Hg 2:6); Js 5:12.—τὰ ἔσχατα τ. γῆς as extreme contrast to heaven 1 Cl 28:3. By God’s creative word the heaven was fixed and the earth founded on the waters Hv 1, 3, 4. Neither heaven nor earth can be comprehended by human measure 16:2 (Is 40:12). On ἀπʼ ἄκρου γῆς ἕως ἄκρου οὐρανοῦ Mk 13:27 s. under ἄκρον. ὁ πρῶτος οὐρ. καὶ ἡ πρώτη γῆ will give way in the last times to the οὐρ. καινός and the γῆ καινή Rv 21:1 (cp. Is 65:17; 66:22).
    ⓑ as firmament or sky over the earth; out of reach for humans Hm 11:18. Hence ἕως οὐρανοῦ (ApcEsdr 4:32) Mt 11:23; Lk 10:15 or εἰς τὸν οὐρ. Hv 4, 1, 5 as an expr. denoting a great height. Likew. ἀπὸ τ. γῆς ἕως τ. οὐρανοῦ 1 Cl 8:3 (scripture quot. of unknown origin); GPt 10:40 (for a transcendent being who walks on the earth and whose head touches the sky, s. Il. 4, 443). Since the heaven extends over the whole earth, ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρ. under (the) heaven = on earth, throughout the earth (Pla., Tim. 23c, Ep. 7, 326c; UPZ 106, 14 [99 B.C.]; Eccl 1:13; 3:1; Just., A II, 5, 2) Ac 2:5; 4:12; Col 1:23; Hs 9, 17, 4; m 12, 4, 2. ὑποκάτωθεν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ throughout the earth 1 Cl 53:3 (Dt 9:14). ἐκ τῆς (i.e. χώρας) ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρ. εἰς τὴν ὑπʼ οὐρανόν from one place on earth to another Lk 17:24 (cp. Dt 29:19; Bar 5:3; 2 Macc 2:18 ἐκ τῆς ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρ. εἰς τὸν ἅγιον τόπον).—In the last days there will appear τέρατα ἐν τ. οὐρανῷ ἄνω wonders in the heaven above Ac 2:19 (Jo 3:3 v.l.). σημεῖον ἐν τῷ οὐρ. Rv 12:1, 3 (cp. Diod S 2, 30, 1 τὰ ἐν οὐρανῷ γινόμενα=what takes place in the heavens; Ael. Aristid. 50, 56 K.=26 p. 519 D., where the statue of Asclepius from Pergamum appears ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ). The sky can even be rolled up; s. ἑλίσσω.—Rain falls fr. heaven (X., An. 4, 2, 2) and heaven is closed to bring about a drought Lk 4:25.—Rv 11:6; Js 5:18 (cp. 2 Ch 6:26; 7:13; Sir 48:3). Lightning also comes fr. heaven (Bacchylides 17, 55f ἀπʼ οὐρανοῦ … ἀστραπάν [=Attic-ήν]) Lk 10:18. Likew. of other things that come down like rain to punish sinners: fire Lk 9:54 (cp. 4 Km 1:10; TestAbr A 10 p. 88, 14 [Stone p. 24]); Rv 20:9; fire and brimstone Lk 17:29 (cp. Gen 19:24); apocalyptic hail Rv 16:21; AcPl Ha 5, 7.
    ⓒ as starry heaven IEph 19:2. τὰ ἄστρα τοῦ οὐρ. (cp. ἄστρον and s. Eur., Phoen. 1; Diod S 6, 2, 2 ἥλιον κ. σελήνην κ. τὰ ἄλλα ἄστρα τὰ κατʼ οὐρανόν; Ael. Aristid. 43, 13 K.=1 p. 5 D.; TestAbr A 1 p. 78, 1 [Stone p. 4]; JosAs 2:11) Hb 11:12. οἱ ἀστέρες τοῦ οὐρ. 1 Cl 32:2 (Gen 22:17); cp. 10:6 (Gen 15:5). In the time of tribulation at the end of the world the stars will fall fr. heaven Mt 24:29a; Mk 13:25a; Rv 6:13; 12:4. Cp. 8:10; 9:1. ἡ στρατιὰ τοῦ οὐρ. (s. οὐράνιος) the host of heaven, of the stars, which some Israelites illicitly worshipped Ac 7:42 (worship of the στρατιὰ τοῦ οὐρ. in enmity to Yahweh also Jer 7:18; 19:13; Zeph 1:5; 2 Ch 33:3, 5). These are also meant by the δυνάμεις τῶν οὐρανῶν Mt 24:29b; Lk 21:26; cp. Mk 13:25b (cp. δύναμις 4).
    ⓓ as place of atmosphere (cp. TestAbr A 9 p. 87, 15 [Stone p. 22] εἰς τὴν αἰθέρα τοῦ οὐρανοῦ); clouds hover in it, the νεφέλαι τοῦ οὐρ. (s. νεφέλη) Mt 24:30b; 26:64; Mk 14:62; D 16:8. Likew. the birds, τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (Gen 1:26; Ps 8:9; Jdth 11:7; ParJer 7:3; cp. Bar 3:17) Mt 6:26; 8:20; 13:32; Mk 4:32; Lk 8:5; 9:58; Ac 10:12; 11:6; 6:12 (Gen 1:26), 18; Hs 9, 24, 1; GJs 3:2 codd.; 18:2 codd.—πυρράζει ὁ οὐρανός Mt 16:2, 3.—In connection w. τὸν σατανᾶν ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ πεσόντα Lk 10:18 the atmosphere may well be thought of as an abode of evil spirits. On Satan as the ἄρχων τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ ἀέρος, s. ἀήρ. Cp. also the λεγόμενοι θεοὶ εἴτε ἐν οὐρ. εἴτε ἐπὶ γῆς 1 Cor 8:5. In any case Rv 12:7f speaks of the dragon and his angels as being in heaven.
    ⓔ The concept of more than one heaven (the idea is Semitic; but s. FTorm, ZNW 33, ’34, 48–50, who refers to Anaximander and Aristot. Also Ps.-Apollod. 1, 6, 1, 2 ms. and Achilles Tat. 2, 36, 4 and 37, 2 ms. have οὐρανοί; Himerius, Or. 66 [=Or. 20], 4 οὐρανοί as the abode of the gods; also Hesychius Miles. [VI A.D.] c. 66 JFlach of the ‘godless heathen’ Tribonian.—Schlatter, Mt2 p. 58 on 3:2: ‘The pl. οὐρανοί is found neither in Philo nor Joseph.’ Cp. PKatz, Philo’s Bible ’50, 141–46; Mussies 84) is also found in our lit. (s. 1aα; Theoph. Ant. 1, 4 [p. 64, 15]), but it is not always possible to decide with certainty just where the idea is really alive and where it simply survives in a formula (in J’s Gospel the pl. is entirely absent; Rv has it only 12:12 [fr. LXX]. Eph always has the pl. In others the sing. and pl. are interchanged for no apparent reason [cp. Hb 9:23 w. 24 or Hv 1, 1, 4 w. 1, 2, 1; also GPt 10:40f; Ps. 113:11 lines 1 and 2; TestAbr, TestJob, Just., Tat.]): the third heaven (cp. Ps.-Lucian, Philopatris 12 ἐς τρίτον οὐρανὸν ἀεροβατήσας [s. on ἀνακαινίζω and πνεῦμα 8]; PSI 29, 2ff [IV A.D.?] ἐπικαλοῦμαί σε τὸν καθήμενον ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ οὐρανῷ … ἐν τῷ β´ οὐρ. … ἐν τῷ γ´ οὐρ.; Simplicius, In Epict. p. 100, 13 Düb. ὀκτὼ οὐρανοί; TestLevi 3:3; GrBar 11:1 εἰς πέμπτον οὐ. Combination of the third heaven and paradise, GrBar 10:1ff; ApcMos 37. S. τρίτος 1a) 2 Cor 12:2 (s. JohJeremias, Der Gottesberg 1919, 41ff; Ltzm., Hdb.4 ’49, exc. on 2 Cor 12:3f [lit.]). ὑπεράνω πάντων τῶν οὐρανῶν Eph 4:10. τ. πάντα ἐν τ. οὐρανοῖς κ. ἐπὶ τ. γῆς Col 1:16; cp. vs. 20. ἔργα τ. χειρῶν σού εἰσιν οἱ οὐρ. Hb 1:10 (Ps 101:26).—4:14; 7:26; 2 Pt 3:5, 7, 10, 12f (of the heavens, their destruction in the final conflagration, and their replacement by the καινοὶ οὐρ.); 1 Cl 20:1; 33:3. τακήσονταί τινες τῶν οὐρανῶν 2 Cl 16:3.—S. also Lampe s.v. 2.—From the concept of various celestial levels a transition is readily made to
    ② transcendent abode, heaven (the pl. is preferred for this mng.: B-D-F §141, 1; Rob. 408)
    ⓐ as the dwelling-place (or throne) of God (Sappho, Fgm. 56 D.2 [=Campbell 54] of Eros; Solon 1, 22 D.3 of Zeus; Hom. Hymn to Aphrodite 291 [all three οὐρ. in the sing. as the seat of the gods]; Pla., Phdr. 246e ὁ μέγας ἐν οὐρανῷ Ζεύς; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 2, 2; 3, 4 ὁ οὐρ. as οἰκητήριον θεοῦ or θεῶν; Dio Chrys. 19[36], 22 θεῶν μακάρων κατʼ οὐρανόν; Artem. 2, 68 p. 159, 13 ὁ οὐρανὸς θεῶν ἐστὶν οἶκος; Ael. Aristid. 43, 14 K.=1 p. 5 D.; Maximus Tyr. 11, 11b; ins from Saïtaï in Lydia [δύναμις 5]; IAndrosIsis, Cyrene 8 p. 129.—On the OT: GWestphal, Jahwes Wohnstätten 1908, 214–73) Mt 23:22; Ac 7:55f; Hb 8:1; 16:2b (Is 66:1); Dg 10:7. ὁ θεὸς ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρ. Hv 1, 1, 6 (cp. Tob 5:17 S). ὁ θεὸς τοῦ οὐρ. (Gen 24:3) Rv 11:13; 16:11. ὁ κύριος ἐν οὐρανοῖς Eph 6:9; cp. Col 4:1. ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν (μου, ἡμῶν) ὁ ἐν (τοῖς) οὐρ. (silver tablet fr. Amisos: ARW 12, 1909, 25 ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ μέγας ὁ ἐν οὐρανῷ καθήμενος) Mt 5:16, 45; 6:1, 9; 7:11, 21b; 10:33; 12:50; 16:17; 18:10b, 14, 19; Mk 11:25f; Lk 11:2 v.l.; D 8:2 (here the sing. ὁ ἐν τῷ οὐρ. Cp. PGM 12, 261 τῷ ἐν οὐρανῷ θεῷ). ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ the Father who (gives) from heaven Lk 11:13 (Jos., Ant. 9, 73 ἐκχέαι τὸν θεὸν ἐξ οὐρανοῦ). God dwells in τὰ ὕψη τῶν οὐρ. 1 Cl 36:2. Therefore the one who prays looks up toward heaven: ἀναβλέπειν εἰς τὸν οὐρ. (s. ἀναβλέπω 1) Mt 14:19; Mk 6:41; 7:34; Lk 9:16; MPol 9:2; 14:1. ἀτενίσας εἰς τὸν οὐρ. εἶδεν δόξαν θεοῦ Ac 7:55; ἐπάρας τ. ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸν οὐρ. J 17:1.—The Spirit of God comes fr. (the open) heaven Mt 3:16; Mk 1:10; Lk 3:21; J 1:32; Ac 2:2(–4); 1 Pt 1:12; AcPlCor 2:5. The voice of God resounds fr. it (Maximus Tyr. 35, 7b Διὸς ἐξ οὐρανοῦ μέγα βοῶντος, the words follow) Mt 3:17; Mk 1:11; Lk 3:22; J 12:28; Ac 11:9; MPol 9:1 (cp. Just., D. 88, 8), and it is gener. the place where divine pronouncements originate Ac 11:5 and their end vs. 10. The ὀργὴ θεοῦ reveals itself fr. heaven Ro 1:18 (s. Jos., Bell. 1, 630 τὸν ἀπʼ οὐρανοῦ δικαστήν). Also, a σημεῖον ἐκ (ἀπὸ) τοῦ οὐρ. is a sign given by God Mt 16:1; Mk 8:11; Lk 11:16; cp. 21:11.—Lampe s.v. 4.
    ⓑ Christ is ἐξ οὐρανοῦ from heaven, of a heavenly nature 1 Cor 15:47 (s. ἄνθρωπος 1d. On this HKennedy, St. Paul and the Conception of the ‘Heavenly Man’: Exp. 8th ser., 7, 1913, 97–110; EGraham, CQR 113, ’32, 226) and has come down from heaven J 3:13b, 31; 6:38, 42, 50 (Ar. 15, 1 ἀπʼ οὐρανοῦ καταβάς; Mel., P. 66, 467 ἀφικόμενος ἐξ οὐρανῶν), as ὁ ἄρτος ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (s. ἄρτος 2). Cp. Ro 10:6. He returned to heaven (τὴν ἔνσαρκον εἰς τοὺς οὐρανοὺ ἀνάληψιν Iren. 1, 10, 1 [Harv. I 91, 2]; on the ascension s. CHönn, Studien zur Geschichte der Hf. im klass. Altertum: Progr. Mannheim 1910; EPfister, Der Reliquienkult im Altertum II 1912, 480ff; HDiels, Himmels u. Höllenfahrten v. Homer bis Dante: NJklA 49, 1922, 239–53; RHolland, Zur Typik der Himmelfahrt: ARW 23, 1925, 207–20; JKroll, Gott u. Hölle ’32, 533 [ind.: Ascensus]; WMichaelis, Zur Überl. der Hf.s-geschichte: ThBl 4, 1925, 101–9; AFridrichsen, D. Hf. bei Lk: ibid. 6, 1927, 337–41; GBertram, Die Hf. Jesu vom Kreuz: Deissmann Festschr. 1927, 187–217 [UHolzmeister, ZKT 55, ’31, 44–82]; HSchlier, Christus u. d. Kirche im Eph 1930, 1ff; VLarrañaga, L’Ascension de Notre-Seigneur dans le NT ’38 [fr. Spanish]. S. also at ἀνάστασις 2 end, and διά A 2a) to live there in glory: Mk 16:19; Lk 24:51; Ac 1:10f (AZwiep, The Ascension of the Messiah in Lukan Christology ’97); 2:34; 7:55f; 9:3; 22:6; 1 Pt 3:22; 15:9. Christians await his return fr. heaven: Ac 1:11; Phil 3:20; 1 Th 1:10; 4:16; 2 Th 1:7 (Just., A I, 51, 8 al.).—When Messianic woes have come to an end, τότε φανήσεται τὸ σημεῖον τοῦ υἱοῦ τ. ἀνθρώπου ἐν οὐρανῷ then the sign of the Human One (who is) in heaven will appear; acc. to the context, the sign consists in this, that he appears visibly in heavenly glory Mt 24:30.—Lampe s.v. 10b.
    ⓒ as the abode of angels (Gen 21:17; 22:11; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 8, 12; TestAbr A 4 p. 80, 34 [Stone p. 8]; ParJer 3:2; ApcMos 38; Just., D. 57, 2) Mt 18:10a; 22:30; 24:36; 28:2; Mk 12:25; 13:32; Lk 2:15; 22:43; J 1:51; Gal 1:8; Rv 10:1; 18:1; 19:14; 20:1. Cp. Eph 3:15.—Lampe s.v. 7.
    ⓓ Christians who have died also dwell in heaven (cp. Dio Chrys. 23 [40], 35 οὐρανοῦ καὶ τῶν ἐν αὐτῷ θείων κ. μακαρίων αἰώνιον τάξιν; Libanius, Or. 21 p. 459, 9 F. πόρρω τοῦ τὸν οὐρανὸν οἰκοῦντος χοροῦ; Oenomaus in Eus., PE 5, 33, 5; 12; Artem. 2, 68 p. 160, 25 τὰς ψυχὰς ἀπαλλαγείσας τῶν σωμάτων εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνιέναι τάχει χρωμένας ὑπερβάλλοντι; Himerius, Or. 8 [=23], 23: the daemon of the dead holds the σῶμα of the dead person, τὴν ψυχὴν ὁ οὐρανός; Quintus Smyrn. 7, 88; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 26 [Stone p. 54]; TestJob 39:13; ApcEsdr 7:3). Their life, τὸ ἀληθῶς ἐν οὐρανῷ ζῆν, stands in strong contrast to the ὄντως θάνατος, that leads to the everlasting fire Dg 10:7b. Rhoda, who greets Hermas from heaven Hv 1, 1, 4, need not have died (s. MDibelius, Hdb. ad loc.), and still she shows us that heaven is open to the devout. Furthermore, the true citizenship of Christians is in heaven (Tat. 16, 1 τὴν ἐν οὐρανοῖς πορείαν; s. πολίτευμα) Phil 3:20; cp. Dg 5:9. Their names are enrolled in heaven (s. βίβλος 2) Lk 10:20; Hb 12:23. In heaven there await them their glorified body 2 Cor 5:1f, their reward Mt 5:12; Lk 6:23, their treasure Mt 6:20; Lk 12:33, the things they hoped for Col 1:5, their inheritance 1 Pt 1:4. It is a place of peace Lk 19:38.—ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ the New Jerusalem (s. Ἱεροσόλυμα 2) will come down to earth Rv 3:12; 21:2, 10.
    ⓔ The concept of a heaven in which God, attendant spirits of God, and the righteous dead abide, makes it easy to understand the taking over of certain OT expressions in which heaven is personified εὐφραίνεσθε οἱ οὐρανοί (cp. Is 44:23; 49:13; Mel., P. 98, 747) Rv 12:12; cp. 18:20; 9:3 (Is 1:2); 11:2 (Jer 2:12); 1 Cl 27:7 (Ps 18:2).
    ③ an indirect reference to God, God fig. ext. of 2 (s. βασιλεία 1b.—A common Hebrew practice, but not unknown among polytheists: Philippides Com. [IV/III B.C.] 27 νὴ τὸν οὐρανόν. Acc. to Clem. Al., Protr. 5, 66, 4 Θεόφραστος πῇ μὲν οὐρανὸν, πῇ δὲ πνεῦμα τὸν θεὸν ὑπονοεῖ=Theophrastus at one time thinks of God as heaven and at another time as spirit; Appian, Hann. 56 §233 σημεῖα ἐκ Διός [ln. 14 Viereck-R.]=ἐξ οὐρανοῦ [ln. 16]; JosAs 19:2; SEG XXVIII, 1251, 3 [III/IV A.D.; s. New Docs 3, 49f]). ἁμαρτάνειν εἰς τὸν οὐρ. sin against God Lk 15:18, 21. ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων Mt 21:25; Mk 11:30f; Lk 20:4f. βασιλεία τῶν οὐρ. (GrBar 11:2) in Mt=βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ 3:2; 4:17; 5:3, 10, 19f; 7:21; 8:11; 10:7; 11:11f; 13:11, 24, 31, 33, 44f, 47, 52; 16:19; 18:1, 3f, 23; 19:12, 14, 23; 20:1; 22:2; 23:13; 25:1: J 3:5 v.l.; AcPl Ha 8, 31 (restored)=BMM verso 3.—B. 53; 1484. DELG. M-M. DLNT 439–43. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > οὐρανός

  • 40 πληροφορέω

    πληροφορέω (*πληροφόρος [πλήρης, φέρω via φορέω]) 1 aor. impv. πληροφόρησον, inf. πληροφορῆσαι. Pass.: 1 aor. inf. πληροφορηθῆναι, ptc. πληροφορηθείς; pf. πεπληροφόρημαι, ptc. πεπληροφορημένος (Ctesias: 688 Fgm. 14 (42) Jac. p. 467, 9f [=Fgm. 29, 39 Müller]; elsewh. since LXX Eccl 8:11; TestAbr A 1 p. 78, 7f [Stone p. 4], B 7 p. 112, 5 v.l. [Stone p. 72; NTS 1, ’54/55, 223]; TestGad 2:4; BGU 665 II, 2 [I A.D.]; APF 5, 1913, 383 no. 69b, 5 [I/II A.D.]; BGU 747 I, 22 [139 A.D.]; PAmh 66 II, 42; POxy 509, 10 [both II A.D.]; Vett. Val. 43, 18; 226, 20.—Dssm., LO 67f [LAE 82f]).
    ① fill (completely), fulfill, a synonym of πληρόω, which occasionally appears as v.l. for it. In our lit. only fig.
    ⓐ w. a thing as obj. τὶ someth., adding to someth. that which it lacks, someth. like fill out, complement, aid τὸν πλοῦτον Hs 2:8a. τὰς ψυχάς 8b.—τὴν διακονίαν σου πληροφόρησον fulfill your ministry 2 Ti 4:5. Also the pass. ἵνα διʼ ἐμοῦ τὸ κήρυγμα πληροφορηθῇ vs. 17.—Of a request that is fulfilled Hm 9:2 (the pap use the word mainly in the sense ‘fully satisfy a demand’).— Accomplish τὰ πεπληροφορημένα ἐν ἡμῖν πράγματα the things that have been accomplished among us Lk 1:1 (s. M-JLagrange, Le sens de Luc 1:1 d’après les papyrus: Bull. d’ancienne Litt. et d’Arch. chrét. 2, 1912, 96–100; OPiper, Union Sem. Rev. 57, ’45, 15–25: Lk [and Ac] as ‘fulfillment’ of the OT.—S. also the lit. given s.v. παρακολουθέω, end). Some (e.g. KRengstorf, Das NT Deutsch ’37 ad loc.) would here transl. on which there is full conviction among us, and put the pass. under 2. But in view of Lk’s thematic emphasis on God’s βουλή (q.v. 2b), the idea of accomplishment of things planned seems more prob. (s. Lagrange).
    ⓑ of pers. πεπληροφορημένος τινός filled w. someth. ἀγάπης love 1 Cl 54:1 (w. εὔσπλαγχνος). Perh. also ἔν τινι (πληρόω 1b) πεπληροφορημένοι ἐν παντὶ θελήματι τ. θεοῦ full of everything that is (in accord with) God’s will Col 4:12 (s. also 2 below).
    ② convince fully (Ctesias: 688 Fgm. 14, 42 Jac. p. 467, 9f; AcPh 9 [Aa II, 2 p. 5, 20]; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 1, 20 al.) pass. be fully convinced, assured, certain (cp. Test Gad 2:4 ἐπληροφορήθημεν τῆς ἀναιρέσεως αὐτοῦ=‘we were quite filled w. the intention to kill him’.—Hegesippus in Eus., HE 2, 23, 14; Martyr. Pionii 4, 17 in HMusurillo, The Acts of the Christian Martyrs ’72) foll. by ὅτι be fully convinced that (Ps.-Clem., Hom. p. 9, 22 Lag.) Ro 4:21; IMg 8:2. Have perfect faith (i.e. limited by no doubt at all) εἰς τὸν κύριον in the Lord ISm 1:1. ἔν τινι in someth. IMg 11; IPhld ins.—Abs. (in case ἐν παντὶ κτλ. [s. 1b above] belongs to σταθῆτε) be fully assured τέλειοι καὶ πεπληροφορημένοι Col 4:12 (but in that case it may also mean here complete, finished). πληροφορηθέντες διὰ τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ κυρίου be fully assured by the Lord’s resurrection 1 Cl 42:3. ἕκαστος ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ νοὶ̈ πληροφορείσθω every one must be fully convinced in the person’s own mind Ro 14:5 (JBeckler, Biblica 65, ’84, 364).—Ltzm., Hdb. on Ro 4:21; Dssm. LO4 67f [LAE 86f].—DELG s.v. πίμπλημι. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πληροφορέω

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

  • which — /wItS/ determiner, pronoun 1 used to ask or state what people or things you mean when a choice has to be made: Which of these books is yours? | Ask him which one he wants. | Karen comes from either Los Angeles or San Francisco, I can t remember… …   Longman dictionary of contemporary English

  • WHICH — adj. & pron. interrog.adj. asking for choice from a definite set of alternatives (which John do you mean?; say which book you prefer; which way shall we go?). rel.adj. being the one just referred to; and this or these (ten years, during which… …   Useful english dictionary

  • Things (application) — Things A screenshot of the Things main window Developer(s) …   Wikipedia

  • which — W1S1 [wıtʃ] determiner, pron [: Old English; Origin: hwilc] 1.) used to ask or talk about one or more members of a group of people or things, when you are uncertain about it or about them ▪ Which book are you looking for? ▪ Which are the most… …   Dictionary of contemporary English

  • which — [hwich, wich] pron. [ME whiche < OE hwylc, hwelc, for * hwa lic, lit., who like (akin to Goth hwileiks, OHG hwelīh, Ger welch): see WHO & LY1] 1. what one (or ones) of the number of persons, things, or events mentioned or implied? [which of… …   English World dictionary

  • Things of Stone and Wood — (sometimes abbreviated to TOSAW) are a well known Australian band which had their first show in 1989. They are perhaps best known for the song Happy Birthday Helen (released 1992). The song was about singer Greg Arnold s girlfriend, whom he later …   Wikipedia

  • Things Fall Apart (disambiguation) — Things Fall Apart may refer to:* Things Fall Apart , 1958 novel by Nigerian author Chinua Achebe. * Things Fall Apart (album) , 1999 album by the hip hop band The Roots. * Things Falling Apart , 2000 album by the industrial artist Nine Inch Nails …   Wikipedia

  • which — [ wıtʃ, hwıtʃ ] function word *** Which can be used in the following ways: as a determiner (followed by a noun): Which color do you like best? as a pronoun (without a following noun): Choose any card it doesn t matter which. (introducing a… …   Usage of the words and phrases in modern English

  • Things as They Are or The Adventures of Caleb Williams — Things as They Are; or The Adventures of Caleb Williams (often abbreviated to Caleb Williams ) (1794) by William Godwin is a three volume novel written as a call to end the abuse of power by what Godwin saw as a tyrannical government. Intended as …   Wikipedia

  • things have come to a pretty pass — things have come to/reached a pretty pass something that you say which means a situation is very bad. Things have come to a pretty pass when old people are dying of hypothermia because they can t afford to heat their homes. (often + when) …   New idioms dictionary

  • things have come reached a pretty pass — things have come to/reached a pretty pass something that you say which means a situation is very bad. Things have come to a pretty pass when old people are dying of hypothermia because they can t afford to heat their homes. (often + when) …   New idioms dictionary

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»